1MRK505167-UEN_B_TRM_REB670_IEC_1pB.pdf

Innovation from ABB

Technical reference manualBusbar protection IEDREB 670

Document ID: 1MRK505167-UENIssued: November 2007

Revision: BIED product version: 1.B

© Copyright 2007 ABB. All rights reserved

COPYRIGHTWE RESERVE ALL RIGHTS TO THIS DOCUMENT, EVEN IN THE EVENTTHAT A PATENT IS ISSUED AND A DIFFERENT COMMERCIALPROPRIETARY RIGHT IS REGISTERED. IMPROPER USE, INPARTICULAR REPRODUCTION AND DISSEMINATION TO THIRDPARTIES, IS NOT PERMITTED.

THIS DOCUMENT HAS BEEN CAREFULLY CHECKED. HOWEVER, INCASE ANY ERRORS ARE DETECTED, THE READER IS KINDLYREQUESTED TO NOTIFY THE MANUFACTURER AT THE ADDRESSBELOW.

THE DATA CONTAINED IN THIS MANUAL IS INTENDED SOLELY FORTHE CONCEPT OR PRODUCT DESCRIPTION AND IS NOT TO BEDEEMED TO BE A STATEMENT OF GUARANTEED PROPERTIES. INTHE INTEREST OF OUR CUSTOMERS, WE CONSTANTLY SEEK TOENSURE THAT OUR PRODUCTS ARE DEVELOPED TO THE LATESTTECHNOLOGICAL STANDARDS. AS A RESULT, IT IS POSSIBLE THATTHERE MAY BE SOME DIFFERENCES BETWEEN THE HW/SWPRODUCT AND THIS INFORMATION PRODUCT.

Manufacturer:

ABB AB

Substation Automation Products

SE-721 59 Västerås

Sweden

Telephone: +46 (0) 21 34 20 00

Facsimile: +46 (0) 21 14 69 18

www.abb.com/substationautomation

Table of contents

Section 1 Introduction.....................................................................13Introduction to the technical reference manual.................................13

About the complete set of manuals for an IED............................13About the technical reference manual.........................................14Design of the Technical reference manual (TRM).......................15

Introduction.............................................................................15Principle of operation..............................................................15Input and output signals.........................................................18Function block........................................................................18Setting parameters.................................................................18Technical data........................................................................18

Intended audience.......................................................................19Related documents......................................................................19Revision notes.............................................................................19

Section 2 Local human-machine interface.....................................21Human machine interface.................................................................21Small size graphic HMI.....................................................................23

Introduction..................................................................................23Design.........................................................................................24

Medium size graphic HMI.................................................................25Introduction..................................................................................25Design.........................................................................................25

Keypad.............................................................................................26LED...................................................................................................27

Introduction..................................................................................27Status indication LEDs................................................................27Indication LEDs...........................................................................28

LHMI related functions......................................................................28Introduction..................................................................................28General setting parameters.........................................................28Status indication LEDs................................................................29

Design....................................................................................29Function block........................................................................29Input and output signals.........................................................29

Indication LEDs...........................................................................30Introduction.............................................................................30Design....................................................................................30Function block........................................................................37

Table of contents

REB 670 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B

1

Input and output signals.........................................................37Setting parameters.................................................................37

Section 3 Basic IED functions........................................................41Analog inputs....................................................................................41

Introduction..................................................................................41Principle of operation...................................................................41Function block.............................................................................42Setting parameters......................................................................42

Self supervision with internal event list.............................................49Introduction..................................................................................49Principle of operation...................................................................49

Internal signals.......................................................................51Run-time model......................................................................52

Function block.............................................................................53Output signals..............................................................................54Setting parameters......................................................................54Technical data.............................................................................54

Time synchronization........................................................................54Introduction..................................................................................54Principle of operation...................................................................54

General concepts...................................................................54Real Time Clock (RTC) operation..........................................55Synchronization alternatives..................................................57

Function block.............................................................................59Output signals..............................................................................59Setting parameters......................................................................59Technical data.............................................................................62

Parameter setting groups.................................................................63Introduction..................................................................................63Principle of operation...................................................................63Function block.............................................................................64Input and output signals..............................................................64Setting parameters......................................................................65

Test mode functionality.....................................................................66Introduction..................................................................................66Principle of operation...................................................................66Function block.............................................................................67Input and output signals..............................................................67Setting parameters......................................................................68

IED identifiers...................................................................................68Introduction..................................................................................68Setting parameters......................................................................68

Signal matrix for binary inputs (SMBI)..............................................69

Table of contents

2 Technical reference manual1MRK505167-UEN rev. B

REB 670

Introduction..................................................................................69Principle of operation...................................................................69Function block.............................................................................69Input and output signals..............................................................69

Signal matrix for binary outputs (SMBO)..........................................70Introduction..................................................................................70Principle of operation...................................................................70Function block.............................................................................71Input and output signals..............................................................71

Signal matrix for analog inputs (SMAI).............................................72Introduction..................................................................................72Principle of operation...................................................................72Function block.............................................................................72Input and output signals..............................................................73Setting parameters......................................................................74

Summation block 3 phase (SUM3Ph)..............................................76Introduction..................................................................................76Principle of operation...................................................................76Function block.............................................................................77Input and output signals..............................................................77Setting parameters......................................................................77

Section 4 Differential protection.....................................................79Busbar differential protection (PDIF, 87B)........................................79

Introduction..................................................................................80Available versions..................................................................80

Principle of operation...................................................................81Differential protection...................................................................81Differential Zone A.......................................................................81

Open CT detection.................................................................83Differential protection supervision..........................................83Explanation of Zone function block........................................83Function block........................................................................88Input and output signals.........................................................89Setting parameters.................................................................91

Calculation principles...................................................................97General...................................................................................97Open CT detection...............................................................103

Check zone (PDIF, 87B)............................................................105Explanation of Check zone function block............................105Function block......................................................................107Input and output signals.......................................................107Setting parameters...............................................................108

Zone selection...........................................................................108

Table of contents


3

Switch status monitoring............................................................109Explanation of Switch status monitoring function block........110Function block......................................................................112Input and output signals.......................................................112Setting parameters...............................................................112

Bay............................................................................................113Explanation of Bay function block........................................114Bay operation principles.......................................................118Function block......................................................................121Input and output signals.......................................................121Setting parameters...............................................................123

Zone interconnection (Load transfer)........................................124Explanation of Zone interconnection (Load transfer)function block ......................................................................124Description of Zone interconnection operation.....................125Function block......................................................................126Input and output signals.......................................................126Setting parameters...............................................................127

Technical data...........................................................................127

Section 5 Current protection.........................................................129Four step phase overcurrent protection (POCM, 51_67)................129

Introduction................................................................................129Principle of operation.................................................................129Function block...........................................................................133Input and output signals............................................................133Setting parameters....................................................................135Technical data...........................................................................141

Four step single phase overcurrent protection (POCM, 51)...........142Introduction................................................................................142Principle of operation.................................................................142Function block...........................................................................144Input and output signals............................................................144Setting parameters....................................................................145Technical data...........................................................................150

Breaker failure protection (RBRF, 50BF)........................................151Introduction................................................................................151Principle of operation.................................................................151Function block...........................................................................154Input and output signals............................................................154Setting parameters....................................................................155Technical data...........................................................................156

Breaker failure protection, single phase version (RBRF, 50BF).....156Introduction................................................................................157

Table of contents


REB 670

Principle of operation.................................................................157Function block...........................................................................158Input and output signals............................................................159Setting parameters....................................................................159Technical data...........................................................................160

Section 6 Control..........................................................................161Autorecloser (RREC, 79)................................................................161

Introduction................................................................................161Principle of operation.................................................................162

Logic Diagrams....................................................................162Auto-reclosing operation Off and On....................................162Start auto-reclosing and conditions for start of a reclosingcycle ....................................................................................162Control of the auto-reclosing open time for shot 1...............163Long trip signal.....................................................................164Time sequence diagrams.....................................................169

Function block...........................................................................172Input and output signals............................................................172Setting parameters....................................................................173Technical data...........................................................................175

Logic rotating switch for function selection and LHMIpresentation (GGIO).......................................................................176

Introduction................................................................................176Principle of operation.................................................................176Function block...........................................................................178Input and output signals............................................................179Setting parameters....................................................................180

Generic double point function block (DPGGIO)..............................181Introduction................................................................................181Principle of operation.................................................................181Function block...........................................................................181Input and output signals............................................................182Setting parameters....................................................................182

Section 7 Logic.............................................................................183Configurable logic blocks (LLD)......................................................183

Introduction................................................................................183Inverter function block (INV)......................................................183OR function block (OR).............................................................183AND function block (AND).........................................................184Timer function block (Timer)......................................................185Pulse timer function block (PULSE)..........................................186Exclusive OR function block (XOR)...........................................186

Table of contents


5

Set-reset with memory function block (SRM)............................187Controllable gate function block (GT)........................................187Settable timer function block (TS).............................................188Technical data...........................................................................189

Fixed signal function block (FIXD)..................................................189Introduction................................................................................189Principle of operation.................................................................189Function block...........................................................................190Input and output signals............................................................190Setting parameters....................................................................190

Section 8 Monitoring.....................................................................191Measurements (MMXU).................................................................191

Introduction................................................................................192Principle of operation.................................................................193

Measurement supervision....................................................193Service values (MMXU, SVR)..............................................197Current Phasors (MMXU, CP)..............................................201Voltage phasors (MMXU, VP)..............................................202Sequence quantities (MSQI, CSQ and VSQ).......................202


Event counter (GGIO).....................................................................220Introduction................................................................................220Principle of operation.................................................................220

Reporting..............................................................................221Design..................................................................................221

Function block...........................................................................222Input signals..............................................................................222Setting parameters....................................................................222Technical data...........................................................................222

Event function (EV).........................................................................223Introduction................................................................................223Principle of operation.................................................................223Function block...........................................................................225Input and output signals............................................................225Setting parameters....................................................................226

Measured value expander block.....................................................228Introduction................................................................................229Principle of operation.................................................................229Function block...........................................................................229Input and output signals............................................................229

Table of contents


REB 670

Disturbance report (RDRE)............................................................230Introduction................................................................................230Principle of operation.................................................................231Function block...........................................................................238Input and output signals............................................................239Setting parameters....................................................................241Technical data...........................................................................256

Event list (RDRE)...........................................................................257Introduction................................................................................257Principle of operation.................................................................257Function block...........................................................................258Input signals..............................................................................258Technical data...........................................................................258

Indications (RDRE).........................................................................258Introduction................................................................................258Principle of operation.................................................................259Function block...........................................................................260Input signals..............................................................................260Technical data...........................................................................260

Event recorder (RDRE)..................................................................260Introduction................................................................................260Principle of operation.................................................................261Function block...........................................................................261Input signals..............................................................................261Technical data...........................................................................261

Trip value recorder (RDRE)............................................................262Introduction................................................................................262Principle of operation.................................................................262Function block...........................................................................263Input signals..............................................................................263Technical data...........................................................................263

Disturbance recorder (RDRE)........................................................263Introduction................................................................................263Principle of operation.................................................................264

Memory and storage............................................................264IEC 60870-5-103..................................................................265


Section 9 Station communication.................................................267Overview.........................................................................................267IEC 61850-8-1 communication protocol.........................................267

Table of contents


7

Introduction................................................................................267Generic single point function block (SPGGIO)..........................268

Introduction...........................................................................268Principle of operation............................................................268Function block......................................................................268Input and output signals.......................................................268Setting parameters...............................................................269

Generic measured values function block (MVGGIO)................269Introduction...........................................................................269Principle of operation............................................................269Function block......................................................................270Input and output signals.......................................................270Setting parameters...............................................................270

Technical data...........................................................................271LON communication protocol.........................................................271

Introduction................................................................................271Principle of operation.................................................................272Setting parameters....................................................................289Technical data...........................................................................290

SPA communication protocol.........................................................290Introduction................................................................................290Principle of operation.................................................................290

Communication ports...........................................................300Design.......................................................................................300Setting parameters....................................................................300Technical data...........................................................................301

IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol.....................................301Introduction................................................................................301Principle of operation.................................................................301

General.................................................................................301Communication ports...........................................................311


Single command, 16 signals (CD)..................................................323Introduction................................................................................323Principle of operation.................................................................323Function block...........................................................................324Input and output signals............................................................324Setting parameters....................................................................325

Multiple command (CM) and Multiple transmit (MT).......................326Introduction................................................................................326

Table of contents


REB 670

Principle of operation.................................................................326Design.......................................................................................326

General.................................................................................326Function block...........................................................................327Input and output signals............................................................327Setting parameters....................................................................329

Section 10 Remote communication................................................331Binary signal transfer to remote end...............................................331

Introduction................................................................................331Principle of operation.................................................................331Function block...........................................................................332Input and output signals............................................................332Setting parameters....................................................................333

Section 11 Hardware......................................................................337Overview.........................................................................................337

Variants of case- and HMI display size.....................................337Case from the rear side.............................................................339

Hardware modules.........................................................................340Overview....................................................................................340Combined backplane module (CBM).........................................341

Introduction...........................................................................341Functionality.........................................................................341Design..................................................................................341

Universal backplane module (UBM)..........................................343Introduction...........................................................................343Functionality.........................................................................343Design..................................................................................343

Power supply module (PSM).....................................................345Introduction...........................................................................345Design..................................................................................345Technical data......................................................................346

Numeric processing module (NUM)..........................................346Introduction...........................................................................346Functionality.........................................................................347Block diagram.......................................................................348

Local human-machine interface (LHMI)....................................348Transformer input module (TRM)..............................................348

Introduction...........................................................................348Design..................................................................................349Technical data......................................................................349

Analog digital conversion module, with time synchronization(ADM) .......................................................................................349

Table of contents


9

Introduction...........................................................................349Design..................................................................................350

Binary input module (BIM).........................................................352Introduction...........................................................................352Design..................................................................................352Technical data......................................................................355

Binary output modules (BOM)...................................................356Introduction...........................................................................356Design..................................................................................356Technical data......................................................................358

Binary input/output module (IOM)..............................................359Introduction...........................................................................359Design..................................................................................359Technical data......................................................................360

Line data communication module (LDCM)................................361Introduction...........................................................................361Design..................................................................................362Technical data......................................................................363

Serial SPA/IEC 60870-5-103 and LON communicationmodule (SLM) ...........................................................................363

Introduction...........................................................................363Design..................................................................................363Technical data......................................................................365

Optical ethernet module (OEM).................................................365Introduction...........................................................................365Functionality.........................................................................365Design..................................................................................365Technical data......................................................................366

GPS time synchronization module (GSM).................................367Introduction...........................................................................367Design..................................................................................367Technical data......................................................................368

GPS antenna.............................................................................369Introduction...........................................................................369Design..................................................................................369Technical data......................................................................370

Case dimensions............................................................................371Case without rear cover.............................................................371Case with rear cover..................................................................371Flush mounting dimensions.......................................................373Side-by-side flush mounting dimensions...................................374Wall mounting dimensions.........................................................375External current transformer unit...............................................376

Table of contents


REB 670

Mounting alternatives.....................................................................376Flush mounting..........................................................................376

Overview..............................................................................376Mounting procedure for flush mounting................................377

19” panel rack mounting............................................................377Overview..............................................................................377Mounting procedure for 19” panel rack mounting.................378

Wall mounting............................................................................379Overview..............................................................................379Mounting procedure for wall mounting.................................379How to reach the rear side of the IED..................................380

Side-by-side 19” rack mounting.................................................381Overview..............................................................................381Mounting procedure for side-by-side rack mounting............381IED 670 mounted with a RHGS6 case.................................381

Side-by-side flush mounting......................................................382Overview..............................................................................382Mounting procedure for side-by-side flush mounting...........383

Technical data................................................................................383Enclosure...................................................................................383Connection system....................................................................384Influencing factors.....................................................................384Type tests according to standard..............................................385

Section 12 Labels...........................................................................387Different labels................................................................................387

Section 13 Connection diagrams...................................................391

Section 14 Time inverse characteristics.........................................409Application......................................................................................409Principle of operation......................................................................411

Mode of operation......................................................................411Inverse characteristics....................................................................417

Section 15 Glossary.......................................................................427Glossary.........................................................................................427

Table of contents


11

12

Section 1 Introduction

About this chapterThis chapter explains concepts and conventions used in this manual and providesinformation necessary to understand the contents of the manual.

1.1 Introduction to the technical reference manual

1.1.1 About the complete set of manuals for an IEDThe user’s manual (UM) is a complete set of five different manuals:

en06000097.vsd

Applicationmanual

Technicalreference

manual

Installation andcommissioning

manual

Operator´smanual

Engineeringguide

The Application Manual (AM) contains application descriptions, setting guidelinesand setting parameters sorted per function. The application manual should be used tofind out when and for what purpose a typical protection function could be used. Themanual should also be used when calculating settings.

The Technical Reference Manual (TRM) contains application and functionalitydescriptions and it lists function blocks, logic diagrams, input and output signals,setting parameters and technical data sorted per function. The technical referencemanual should be used as a technical reference during the engineering phase,installation and commissioning phase, and during normal service.

The Installation and Commissioning Manual (ICM) contains instructions on howto install and commission the protection IED. The manual can also be used as areference during periodic testing. The manual covers procedures for mechanical andelectrical installation, energizing and checking of external circuitry, setting andconfiguration as well as verifying settings and performing directional tests. Thechapters are organized in the chronological order (indicated by chapter/sectionnumbers) in which the protection IED should be installed and commissioned.

The Operator’s Manual (OM) contains instructions on how to operate the protectionIED during normal service once it has been commissioned. The operator’s manual

Section 1Introduction


13

can be used to find out how to handle disturbances or how to view calculated andmeasured network data in order to determine the cause of a fault.

The IED 670 engineering guide (EG) contains instructions on how to engineer theIED 670 products. The manual guides to use the different tool components for IED670 engineering. It also guides how to handle the tool component available to readdisturbance files from the IEDs on the basis of the IEC 61850 definitions. The thirdpart is an introduction about the diagnostic tool components available for IED 670products and the PCM 600 tool.

1.1.2 About the technical reference manualThe technical reference manual contains the following chapters:

• The chapter “Local human-machine interface” describes the control panel onthe IED. Display characteristics, control keys and various local human-machineinterface features are explained.

• The chapter “Basic IED functions” presents functions that are included in allIEDs regardless of the type of protection they are designed for. These arefunctions like Time synchronization, Self supervision with event list, Test modeand other functions of a general nature.

• The chapter “Differential protection” describes the various differential functionsas well as restricted earth fault protection.

• The chapter “Current protection” describes functions such as overcurrentprotection, breaker failure protection and pole discordance.

• The chapter “Control” describes the control functions. These are functions likethe Synchronization and energizing check as well as several others which areproduct specific.

• The chapter “Logic” describes trip logic and related functions.• The chapter “Monitoring” describes measurement related functions used to

provide data regarding relevant quantities, events, faults and the like.• The chapter “Station communication” describes Ethernet based communication

in general including the use of IEC61850, and horizontal communication viaGOOSE.

• The chapter “Remote communication” describes binary and analog signaltransfer, and the associated hardware.

• The chapter “Hardware” provides descriptions of the IED and its components.• The chapter “Connection diagrams” provides terminal wiring diagrams and

information regarding connections to and from the IED.• The chapter “Time inverse characteristics” describes and explains inverse time

delay, inverse time curves and their effects.• The chapter “Glossary” is a list of terms, acronyms and abbreviations used in

ABB technical documentation.



REB 670

1.1.3 Design of the Technical reference manual (TRM)The description of each IED related function follows the same structure (whereapplicable). The different sections are outlined below.

1.1.3.1 Introduction

Outlines the implementation of a particular protection function.

1.1.3.2 Principle of operation

Describes how the function works, presents a general background to algorithms andmeasurement techniques. Logic diagrams are used to illustrate functionality.

Logic diagramsLogic diagrams describe the signal logic inside the function block and are borderedby dashed lines.

Signal namesInput and output logic signals consist of two groups of letters separated by two dashes.The first group consists of up to four letters and presents the abbreviated name forthe corresponding function. The second group presents the functionality of theparticular signal. According to this explanation, the meaning of the signal BLKTR infigure 4 is as follows:

• BLKTR informs the user that the signal will BLOCK the TRIP command fromthe under-voltage function, when its value is a logical one (1).

Input signals are always on the left hand side, and output signals on the right handside. Settings are not displayed.

Input and output signalsIn a logic diagram, input and output signal paths are shown as a lines that touch theouter border of the diagram.

Input and output signals can be configured using the CAP531 tool. They can beconnected to the inputs and outputs of other functions and to binary inputs and outputs.Examples of input signals are BLKTR, BLOCK and VTSU. Examples output signalsare TRIP, START, STL1, STL2, STL3.

Setting parametersSignals in frames with a shaded area on their right hand side represent settingparameter signals. These parameters can only be set via the PST or LHMI. Theirvalues are high (1) only when the corresponding setting parameter is set to thesymbolic value specified within the frame. Example is the signal Block TUV=Yes.Their logical values correspond automatically to the selected setting value.



15

Internal signalsInternal signals are illustrated graphically and end approximately. 2 mm from theframe edge. If an internal signal path cannot be drawn with a continuous line, thesuffix -int is added to the signal name to indicate where the signal starts and continues,see figure 3.

TEST

Block TUV=Yes

STUL1N

STUL2N

STUL3N

&

>1 &

TEST

>1

&

&

&

xx04000375.vsd

t

BLKTR

BLOCK

VTSU

TRIP

START

STL1

STL2

STL3

BLOCK-int.

BLOCK-int.

BLOCK-int.

BLOCK-int.

Figure 1: Logic diagram example with -int signals

External signalsSignal paths that extend beyond the logic diagram and continue in another diagramhave the suffix “-cont.”, see figure 2 and figure 3.



REB 670

&

&

&

&

&

&

STCND

STNDL1L2-cont.

STNDL2L3-cont.

STNDL3L1-cont.

STNDL1N-cont.

STNDL2N-cont.

STNDL3N-cont.

STZMPP-cont.

STNDPE-cont.

&1--BLOCK

1--VTSZ 1--STND

BLK-cont.

>1

>1

>1

>1

xx04000376.vsd

1L1L2

1L2L3

1L3L1

1L1N

1L2N

1L3N

Figure 2: Logic diagram example with an outgoing -cont signal

xx04000377.vsd

STNDL1N-cont.

STNDL3N-cont.

STNDL1L2-cont.

STNDL2L3-cont.

STNDL3L1-cont.

>1

>1

>1

>1

&

&

&

&

BLK-cont.

t15 ms

t15 ms

t15 ms

t15 ms START

STL3

STL2

STL1STNDL2N-cont.

Figure 3: Logic diagram example with an incoming -cont signal



17

1.1.3.3 Input and output signals

Input and output signals are presented in two separate tables. Each table consists oftwo columns. The first column contains the name of the signal and the second columncontains the description of the signal.

1.1.3.4 Function block

Each function block is illustrated graphically.

Input signals are always on the left hand side, and output signals on the right handside. Settings are not displayed. Special kinds of settings are sometimes available.These are supposed to be connected to constants in the configuration scheme, and aretherefore depicted as inputs. Such signals will be found in the signal list but describedin the settings table.

PH2PUVMTUV1-

U3PBLOCKBLKTR1BLKST1BLKTR2BLKST2

TRIPTR1

TR1L1TR1L2TR1L3

TR2TR2L1TR2L2TR2L3

STARTST1

ST1L1ST1L2ST1L3

ST2ST2L1ST2L2ST2L3

en05000330.vsd

IEC 61850 - 8 -1Logical NodeCAP531 Name

Outputs

Inputs

DiagramNumber

Figure 4: Example of a function block

1.1.3.5 Setting parameters

These are presented in tables and include all parameters associated with the functionin question.

1.1.3.6 Technical data

The technical data section provides specific technical information about the functionor hardware described.



REB 670

1.1.4 Intended audience

GeneralThis manual addresses system engineers, installation and commissioning personnel,who use technical data during engineering, installation and commissioning, and innormal service.

RequirementsThe system engineer must have a thorough knowledge of protection systems,protection equipment, protection functions and the configured functional logics inthe protective devices. The installation and commissioning personnel must have abasic knowledge in the handling electronic equipment.

1.1.5 Related documentsDocuments related to REB 670 Identity numberOperator's manual 1MRK 505 168-UEN

Installation and commissioning manual 1MRK 505 169-UEN

Technical reference manual 1MRK 505 167-UEN

Application manual 1MRK 505 170-UEN

Buyer's guide 1MRK 505 172-BEN

Connection and Installation components 1MRK 013 003-BEN

Test system, COMBITEST 1MRK 512 001-BEN

Accessories for IED 670 1MRK 514 012-BEN

Getting started guide IED 670 1MRK 500 065-UEN

SPA and LON signal list for IED 670 1MRK 500 075-WEN

IEC 61850 Data objects list for IED 670 1MRK 500 077-WEN

Generic IEC 61850 IED Connectivity package 1KHA001027–UEN

Protection and Control IED Manager PCM 600 Installation sheet 1MRS755552

Engineering guide IED 670 products 1MRK 511 179–UEN

Latest versions of the described documentation can be found on www.abb.com/substationautomation

1.1.6 Revision notesRevision DescriptionB No functionality added. Minor changes made in content due to problem reports.



19

HTTP://WWW.ABB.COM/SUBSTATIONAUTOMATION

20

Section 2 Local human-machine interface

About this chapterThis chapter describes the structure and use of the Local human machine interface(LHMI) or in other words, the control panel on the IED.

2.1 Human machine interface

The local human machine interface is available in a small, and a medium sized model.The principle difference between the two is the size of the LCD. The small size LCDhas a four lines and the medium size LCD can display the single line diagram withup to 15 objects.

The local human machine interface is equipped with an LCD that is used among otherthings to locally display the following crucial information:

• Connection of each bay with respect to the two differential protection zones andthe check zone. The user can freely set in PST the individual bay names in orderto make easy identification of each primary bay for station personnel

• Status of each individual primary switchgear device (i.e. open, closed, 00 asintermediate and 11 as bad state). The user can freely set in PCM 600 theindividual primary switchgear object names in order to make easy identificationof each switchgear device for station personnel

The local human machine interface is equipped with an LCD that can display thesingle line diagram with up to 15 objects.

The local human-machine interface is simple and easy to understand – the whole frontplate is divided into zones, each of them with a well-defined functionality:

• Status indication LEDs• Alarm indication LEDs which consists of 15 LEDs (6 red and 9 yellow) with

user printable label. All LEDs are configurable from the PCM 600 tool• Liquid crystal display (LCD)• Keypad with push buttons for control and navigation purposes, switch for

selection between local and remote control and reset• An isolated RJ45 communication port

Section 2Local human-machine interface


21

Figure 5: Example of medium graphic HMI

Figure 6: Bay to zone connection example

1 User settable bay name



REB 670

2 Internally used bay FB

3 Connections to internal zones

Figure 7: Example of status of primary switchgear objects

1 User settable switchgear names

2 Switchgear object status

2.2 Small size graphic HMI

2.2.1 IntroductionThe small sized HMI is available for 1/2 and 1/1 x 19” case. The LCD on the smallHMI measures 32 x 90 mm and displays 7 lines with up to 40 characters per line. Thefirst line displays the product name and the last line displays date and time. Theremaining 5 lines are dynamic. This LCD has no graphic display potential.



23

2.2.2 DesignThe LHMI is identical for both the 1/2 and 1/1 cases. The different parts of the smallLHMI is shown in figure 8

1 2 3

4

5

6

78en05000055.eps

Figure 8: Small graphic HMI

1 Status indication LEDs

2 LCD

3 Indication LEDs

4 Label

5 Local/Remote LEDs

6 RJ 45 port

7 Communication indication LED

8 Keypad



REB 670

2.3 Medium size graphic HMI

2.3.1 IntroductionThe 1/2 and 1/1 x 19” cases can be equipped with the medium size LCD. This is afully graphical monochrome LCD which measures 120 x 90 mm. It has 28 lines withup to 40 characters per line. To display the station matrix, this LCD is required.

2.3.2 DesignThe different parts of the medium size LHMI is shown in figure 9

Figure 9: Medium size graphic HMI

1 Status indication LEDs

2 LCD

3 Indication LEDs



25

4 Label

5 Local/Remote LEDs

6 RJ45 port

7 Communication indication LED

8 Keypad

2.4 Keypad

The keypad is used to monitor and operate the IED. The keypad has the same lookand feel in all IEDs in the IED 670 series. LCD screens and other details may differbut the way the keys function is identical. The keypad is illustrated in figure 10.

Figure 10: The HMI keypad

The keys used to operate the IED are described below in table 1.

Table 1: HMI keys on the front of the IED

Key Function This key closes (energizes) a breaker or disconnector.

This key opens a breaker or disconnector.

The help key brings up two submenus. Key operation and IED information.

This key is used to clear entries, It cancels commands and edits.

Table continued on next page



REB 670

Key Function Opens the main menu, and used to move to the default screen.

The Local/Remote key is used to set the IED in local or remote control mode.

This key opens the reset screen.

The E key starts editing mode and confirms setting changes when in editing mode.

The right arrow key navigates forward between screens and moves right in editing mode.

The left arrow key navigates backwards between screens and moves left in editing mode.

The up arrow key is used to move up in the single line diagram and in menu tree.

The down arrow key is used to move down in the single line diagram and in menu tree.

2.5 LED

2.5.1 IntroductionThe LED module is a unidirectional means of communicating. This means that eventsmay occur that activate a LED in order to draw the operators attention to somethingthat has occurred and needs some sort of action.

2.5.2 Status indication LEDsThere are three LEDs above the LCD. The information they communicate is describedin the table below.

LED Indication InformationGreen:

Steady In service

Flashing Internal failure

Dark No power supply

Yellow:

Steady Dist. rep. triggered




27

LED Indication InformationFlashing Terminal in test mode

Red:

Steady Trip command issued

2.5.3 Indication LEDsThe LED indication module comprising 15 LEDs is standard in IED 670s. Its mainpurpose is to present an immediate visual information for protection indications oralarm signals.

There are alarm indication LEDs and hardware associated LEDs on the right handside of the front panel. The alarm LEDs are found to the right of the LCD screen.They can show steady or flashing light. Flashing would normally indicate an alarm.The alarm LEDs are configurable using the PCM 600 tool. This is because they aredependent on the binary input logic and can therefore not be configured locally onthe HMI. Some typical alarm examples follow:

• Bay controller failure• CB close blocked• Interlocking bypassed• SF6 Gas refill• Position error• CB spring charge alarm• Oil temperature alarm• Thermal overload trip

The RJ45 port has a yellow LED indicating that communication has been establishedbetween the IED and a computer.

The Local/Remote key on the front panel has two LEDs indicating whether local orremote control of the IED is active.

2.6 LHMI related functions

2.6.1 IntroductionThe adaptation of the LHMI to the application and user preferences is made with:

• function block LHMI (LocalHMISign)• function block HLED (LEDMonitor)• setting parameters

2.6.2 General setting parameters



REB 670

Table 2: General settings for the localHMI (LHM1-) function

Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionLanguage English

OptionalLanguage- English - Local HMI language

DisplayTimeout 10 - 120 10 60 Min Local HMI displaytimeout

AutoRepeat OffOn

- On - Activation of auto-repeat (On) or not(Off)

ContrastLevel -10 - 20 1 0 % Contrast level fordisplay

DefaultScreen 0 - 0 1 0 - Default screen

Password SimplePasswDOEG205.3-1

- SimplePassw - Password type forauthorization

EvListSrtOrder Latest on topOldest on top

- Latest on top - Sort order of event list

2.6.3 Status indication LEDs

2.6.3.1 Design

The function block LHMI (LocalHMISign) controls and supplies information aboutthe status of the status indication LEDs. The input and output signals of LHMI areconfigured with the PCM 600 tool.

See section "Status indication LEDs" for information about the LEDs.


LocalHMILHMI-

CLRLEDS HMI-ONRED-S

YELLOW-SYELLOW-FCLRPULSELEDSCLRD

en05000773.vsd

Figure 11: LHMI function block


Table 3: Input signals for the LocalHMI (LHMI-) function block

Signal DescriptionCLRLEDS Input to clear the LCD-HMI LEDs



29

Table 4: Output signals for the LocalHMI (LHMI-) function block

Signal DescriptionHMI-ON Backlight of the LCD display is active

RED-S Red LED on the LCD-HMI is steady

YELLOW-S Yellow LED on the LCD-HMI is steady

YELLOW-F Yellow LED on the LCD-HMI is flashing

CLRPULSE A pulse is provided when the LEDs on the LCD-HMI arecleared

LEDSCLRD Active when the LEDs on the LCD-HMI are not active

2.6.4 Indication LEDs


The function block HLED (LEDMonitor) controls and supplies information aboutthe status of the indication LEDs. The input and output signals of HLED areconfigured with the PCM 600 tool. The input signal for each LED is selectedindividually with the PCM 600 Signal Matrix Tool (SMT). LEDs (number 1–6) fortrip indications are red and LEDs (number 7–15) for start indications are yellow.

Each indication LED on the LHMI can be set individually to operate in six differentsequences; two as follow type and four as latch type. Two of the latching types areintended to be used as a protection indication system, either in collecting or restartingmode, with reset functionality. The other two are intended to be used as signallingsystem in collecting (coll) mode with an acknowledgment functionality. The lightfrom the LEDs can be steady (-S) or flickering (-F).

2.6.4.2 Design

The information on the LEDs is stored at loss of the auxiliary power to the IED. Thelatest LED picture appears immediately after the IED is successfully restarted.

Operating modes

• Collecting mode• LEDs which are used in collecting mode of operation are accumulated

continuously until the unit is acknowledged manually. This mode issuitable when the LEDs are used as a simplified alarm system.

• Re-starting mode• In the re-starting mode of operation each new start resets all previous active

LEDs and activates only those which appear during one disturbance. OnlyLEDs defined for re-starting mode with the latched sequence type 6(LatchedReset-S) will initiate a reset and a restart at a new disturbance. A



REB 670

disturbance is defined to end a settable time after the reset of the activatedinput signals or when the maximum time limit has been elapsed.

Acknowledgment/reset

• From local HMI• The active indications can be acknowledged/reset manually. Manual

acknowledgment and manual reset have the same meaning and is acommon signal for all the operating sequences and LEDs. The function ispositive edge triggered, not level triggered. The acknowledgment/reset isperformed via the Reset-button and menus on the LHMI. For details, referto the “Operators manual”.

• From function input• The active indications can also be acknowledged/reset from an input,

RESET, to the function. This input can for example be configured to abinary input operated from an external push button. The function is positiveedge triggered, not level triggered. This means that even if the button iscontinuously pressed, the acknowledgment/reset only affects indicationsactive at the moment when the button is first pressed.

• Automatic reset• The automatic reset can only be performed for indications defined for re-

starting mode with the latched sequence type 6 (LatchedReset-S). Whenthe automatic reset of the LEDs has been performed, still persistingindications will be indicated with a steady light.

Operating sequencesThe sequences can be of type Follow or Latched. For the Follow type the LED followthe input signal completely. For the Latched type each LED latches to thecorresponding input signal until it is reset.

The figures below show the function of available sequences selectable for each LEDseparately. For sequence 1 and 2 (Follow type), the acknowledgment/reset functionis not applicable. Sequence 3 and 4 (Latched type with acknowledgement) are onlyworking in collecting mode. Sequence 5 is working according to Latched type andcollecting mode while sequence 6 is working according to Latched type and re-starting mode. The letters S and F in the sequence names have the meaning S = Steadyand F = Flash.

At the activation of the input signal, the indication operates according to the selectedsequence diagrams below.

In the sequence diagrams the LEDs have the characteristics shown in figure 12.



31

en05000506.vsd

= No indication = Steady light = Flash

Figure 12: Symbols used in the sequence diagrams

Sequence 1 (Follow-S)This sequence follows all the time, with a steady light, the corresponding inputsignals. It does not react on acknowledgment or reset. Every LED is independent ofthe other LEDs in its operation.

Activatingsignal

LED

en01000228.vsd

Figure 13: Operating sequence 1 (Follow-S)

Sequence 2 (Follow-F)This sequence is the same as sequence 1, Follow-S, but the LEDs are flashing insteadof showing steady light.

Sequence 3 (LatchedAck-F-S)This sequence has a latched function and works in collecting mode. Every LED isindependent of the other LEDs in its operation. At the activation of the input signal,the indication starts flashing. After acknowledgment the indication disappears if thesignal is not present any more. If the signal is still present after acknowledgment itgets a steady light.

Activatingsignal

LED

Acknow.en01000231.vsd

Figure 14: Operating sequence 3 (LatchedAck-F-S)

Sequence 4 (LatchedAck-S-F)This sequence has the same functionality as sequence 3, but steady and flashing lighthave been alternated.



REB 670

Sequence 5 (LatchedColl-S)This sequence has a latched function and works in collecting mode. At the activationof the input signal, the indication will light up with a steady light. The difference tosequence 3 and 4 is that indications that are still activated will not be affected by thereset i.e. immediately after the positive edge of the reset has been executed a newreading and storing of active signals is performed. Every LED is independent of theother LEDs in its operation.

en01000235.vsd

Activatingsignal

LED

Reset

Figure 15: Operating sequence 5 (LatchedColl-S)

Sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S)In this mode all activated LEDs, which are set to sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S), areautomatically reset at a new disturbance when activating any input signal for otherLEDs set to sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S). Also in this case indications that are stillactivated will not be affected by manual reset, i.e. immediately after the positive edgeof that the manual reset has been executed a new reading and storing of active signalsis performed. LEDs set for sequence 6 are completely independent in its operation ofLEDs set for other sequences.

Definition of a disturbanceA disturbance is defined to last from the first LED set as LatchedReset-S is activateduntil a settable time, tRestart, has elapsed after that all activating signals for the LEDsset as LatchedReset-S have reset. However if all activating signals have reset andsome signal again becomes active before tRestart has elapsed, the tRestart timer doesnot restart the timing sequence. A new disturbance start will be issued first when allsignals have reset after tRestart has elapsed. A diagram of this functionality is shownin figure 16.



33

³1

&

³1New

disturbance

ttRestart

³1&

&³1

Fromdisturbancelength controlper LEDset tosequence 6

en01000237.vsd

Figure 16: Activation of new disturbance

In order not to have a lock-up of the indications in the case of a persisting signal eachLED is provided with a timer, tMax, after which time the influence on the definitionof a disturbance of that specific LED is inhibited. This functionality is shown idiagram in figure 17.

Activating signal

ttMax

ANDTo disturbance

length control

To LED

en05000507.vsd

Figure 17: Length control of activating signals

Timing diagram for sequence 6Figure 18 shows the timing diagram for two indications within one disturbance.



REB 670

en01000239.vsd

Activatingsignal 2

LED 2

Manualreset

Activatingsignal 1

Automaticreset

LED 1

Disturbance

t Restart

Figure 18: Operating sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S), two indications withinsame disturbance

Figure 19 shows the timing diagram for a new indication after tRestart time haselapsed.

en01000240.vsd

Activatingsignal 2

LED 2

Manualreset

Activatingsignal 1

Automaticreset

LED 1

Disturbance

t Restart

Disturbance

t Restart

Figure 19: Operating sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S), two different disturbances



35

Figure 20 shows the timing diagram when a new indication appears after the first onehas reset but before tRestart has elapsed.

en01000241.vsd

Activatingsignal 2

LED 2

Manualreset

Activatingsignal 1

Automaticreset

LED 1

Disturbance

t Restart

Figure 20: Operating sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S), two indications withinsame disturbance but with reset of activating signal between

Figure 21 shows the timing diagram for manual reset.

en01000242.vsd

Activatingsignal 2

LED 2

Manualreset

Activatingsignal 1

Automaticreset

LED 1

Disturbance

t Restart

Figure 21: Operating sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S), manual reset



REB 670


LEDMonitorHLED-

BLOCKRESETLEDTEST

NEWINDACK

en05000508.vsd

Figure 22: HLED function block


Table 5: Input signals for the LEDMonitor (HLED-) function block

Signal DescriptionBLOCK Input to block the operation of the LED-unit

RESET Input to acknowledge/reset the indications of the LED-unit

LEDTEST Input for external LED test

Table 6: Output signals for the LEDMonitor (HLED-) function block

Signal DescriptionNEWIND A new signal on any of the indication inputs occurs

ACK A pulse is provided when the LEDs are acknowledged


Table 7: General settings for the LEDMonitor (HLED-) function

Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionOperation Off

On- Off - Operation mode for

the LED function

tRestart 0.0 - 100.0 0.1 0.0 s Defines thedisturbance length

tMax 0.0 - 100.0 0.1 0.0 s Maximum time for thedefinition of adisturbance

SeqTypeLED1 Follow-SFollow-FLatchedAck-F-SLatchedAck-S-FLatchedColl-SLatchedReset-S

- Follow-S - Sequence type forLED 1




37

Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionSeqTypeLED2 Follow-S

Follow-FLatchedAck-F-SLatchedAck-S-FLatchedColl-SLatchedReset-S













- Follow-S - sequence type forLED 8








REB 670

Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionSeqTypeLED11 Follow-S

Follow-FLatchedAck-F-SLatchedAck-S-FLatchedColl-SLatchedReset-S












39

40

Section 3 Basic IED functions

About this chapterThis chapter presents functions that are basic to all REx670 IEDs. Typical functionsin this category are time synchronization, self supervision and test mode.

3.1 Analog inputs

3.1.1 IntroductionIn order to get correct measurement results as well as correct protection operationsthe analog input channels must be configured and properly set. It is necessary to definea reference PhaseAngleRef for correct calculation of phase angles. For powermeasuring and all directional and differential functions the directions of the inputcurrents must be properly defined. The measuring and protection algorithms in IED670 are using primary system quantities and the set values are done in primaryquantities as well. Therefore it is extremely important to properly set the data aboutthe connected current and voltage transformers.

VT inputs are sometimes not available depending on ordered type ofTransformer Input Module (TRM).

3.1.2 Principle of operationThe direction of a current to the IED is depending on the connection of the CT. Themain CTs are always supposed to be star connected and can be connected with thestar point to the object or from the object. This information must be set to the IED.The convention of the directionality is defined as follows: A positive value of current,power etc. means that the quantity has the direction into the object and a negativevalue means direction out from the object. For directional functions the direction intothe object is defined as Forward and the direction out from the object is defined asReverse, see figure 23

Section 3Basic IED functions


41

Protected ObjectLine, transformer, etc

ForwardReverse

Definition of directionfor directional functions

Measured quantity ispositive when flowing

towards the object

e.g. P, Q, I

ReverseForward

Definition of directionfor directional functions

e.g. P, Q, IMeasured quantity ispositive when flowing

towards the object

Set parameterCTStarPoint

Correct Setting is"ToObject"

Set parameterCTStarPoint

Correct Setting is"FromObject"

en05000456.vsd

Figure 23: Internal convention of the directionality in IED 670

With correct setting of the primary CT direction, CTStarPoint set to FromObject orToObject, a positive quantities always flowing towards the object and a directiondefined as Forward always is looking towards the object. To be able to use primarysystem quantities for settings and calculation in the IED the ration of the main CTsand VTs must be known. This information is given to the IED by setting of the ratedsecondary and primary currents and voltages of the CTs and VTs.

3.1.3 Function block

The function blocks are not represented in the configuration tool. Thesignals appear only in the SMT tool when a TRM is included in theconfiguration with the function selector tool. In the SMT tool they canbe mapped to the desired virtual input (SMAI) of the IED670 and usedinternally in the configuration.

3.1.4 Setting parametersDependent on ordered IED 670 type.

Table 8: General settings for the AISERVAL (AISV-) function

Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionPhaseAngleRef 1 - 24 1 1 Ch Reference channel

for phase anglepresentation



REB 670

Table 9: General settings for the ANALOGIN12I (TA40-) function

Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionCTStarPoint1 FromObject

ToObject- ToObject - ToObject= towards

protected object,FromObject= theopposite

CTsec1 1 - 10 1 1 A Rated CT secondarycurrent

CTprim1 1 - 99999 1 3000 A Rated CT primarycurrent

CTStarPoint2 FromObjectToObject

- ToObject - ToObject= towardsprotected object,FromObject= theopposite






















43




























REB 670

Table 10: General settings for the ANALOGIN6I (TB40-) function




























45

Table 11: General settings for the ANALOGIN9I3U (TC40-) function





























REB 670














VTsec10 0.001 - 999.999 0.001 110.000 V Rated VT secondaryvoltage

VTprim10 0.05 - 2000.00 0.05 400.00 kV Rated VT primaryvoltage





Table 12: General settings for the ANALOGIN6I6U (TD40-) function









47































REB 670

Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionVTsec10 0.001 - 999.999 0.001 110.000 V Rated VT secondary

voltage






3.2 Self supervision with internal event list

3.2.1 IntroductionThe self-supervision function listens and reacts to internal system events, generatedby the different built-in self-supervision elements. The internal events are saved inan internal event list.

3.2.2 Principle of operationThe self-supervision operates continuously and includes:

• Normal micro-processor watchdog function.• Checking of digitized measuring signals.• Other alarms, for example hardware and time synchronization.

The self-supervision status can be monitored from the local HMI or a SMS/SCSsystem.

Under the Diagnostics menu in the local HMI the present information from the self-supervision function can be reviewed. The information can be found underDiagnostics\Internal Events or Diagnostics\IED Status\General. Refer to the“Installation and Commissioning manual” for a detailed list of supervision signalsthat can be generated and displayed in the local HMI.

A self-supervision summary can be obtained by means of the potential free alarmcontact (INTERNAL FAIL) located on the power supply module. The function ofthis output relay is an OR-function between the INT—FAIL signal see figure 25 anda couple of more severe faults that can occur in the IED, see figure 24



49

Figure 24: Hardware self-supervision, potential-free alarm contact.

Figure 25: Software self-supervision, IES (IntErrorSign) function block.

Some signals are available from the IES (IntErrorSign) function block. The signalsfrom this function block are sent as events to the station level of the control system.



REB 670

The signals from the IES function block can also be connected to binary outputs forsignalization via output relays or they can be used as conditions for other functionsif required/desired.

Individual error signals from I/O modules can be obtained from respective modulein the Signal Matrix Tool. Error signals from time synchronization can be obtainedfrom the time synchronization block TIME.

3.2.2.1 Internal signals

Self supervision provides several status signals, that tells about the condition of theIED. As they provide information about the internal life of the IED, they are alsocalled internal signals. The internal signals can be divided into two groups. One grouphandles signals that are always present in the IED; standard signals. Another grouphandles signals that are collected depending on the hardware configuration. Thestandard signals are listed in table 13. The hardware dependent internal signals arelisted in table 14. Explanations of internal signals are listed in table 15.

Table 13: Self-supervision's standard internal signals

Name of signal DescriptionFAIL Internal Fail status

WARNING Internal Warning status

NUMFAIL CPU module Fail status

NUMWARNING CPU module Warning status

RTCERROR Real Time Clock status

TIMESYNCHERROR Time Synchronization status

RTEERROR Runtime Execution Error status

IEC61850ERROR IEC 61850 Error status

WATCHDOG SW Watchdog Error status

LMDERROR LON/Mip Device Error status

APPERROR Runtime Application Error status

SETCHGD Settings changed

SETGRPCHGD Setting groups changed

FTFERROR Fault Tolerant Filesystem status

Table 14: Self-supervision's HW dependent internal signals

Card Name of signal DescriptionADxx ADxx Analog In Module Error status

BIM BIM-Error Binary In Module Error status

BOM BOM-Error Binary Out Module Error status

IOM IOM-Error In/Out Module Error status

MIM MIM-Error Millampere Input Module Error status

LDCM LDCM-Error Line Differential Communication Error status



51

Table 15: Explanations of internal signals

Name of signal Reasons for activationFAIL This signal will be active if one or more of the following internal

signals are active; INT--NUMFAIL, INT--LMDERROR, INT--WATCHDOG, INT--APPERROR, INT--RTEERROR, INT--FTFERROR, or any of the HW dependent signals

WARNING This signal will be active if one or more of the following internalsignals are active; INT--RTCERROR, INT--IEC61850ERROR,INT--TIMESYNCHERROR

NUMFAIL This signal will be active if one or more of the following internalsignals are active; INT--WATCHDOG, INT--APPERROR, INT--RTEERROR, INT--FTFERROR

NUMWARNING This signal will be active if one or more of the following internalsignals are active; INT--RTCERROR, INT--IEC61850ERROR

RTCERROR This signal will be active when there is a hardware error with thereal time clock.

TIMESYNCHERROR This signal will be active when the source of the timesynchronization is lost, or when the time system has to make a timereset.

RTEERROR This signal will be active if the Runtime Engine failed to do someactions with the application threads. The actions can be loading ofsettings or parameters for components, changing of setting groups,loading or unloading of application threads.

IEC61850ERROR This signal will be active if the IEC61850 stack did not succeed insome actions like reading IEC61850 configuration, startup etc.

WATCHDOG This signal will be activated when the terminal has been under tooheavy load for at least 5 minutes. The operating systemsbackground task is used for the measurements.

LMDERROR LON network interface, MIP/DPS, is in an unrecoverable errorstate.

APPERROR This signal will be active if one or more of the application threadsare not in the state that Runtime Engine expects. The states canbe CREATED, INITIALIZED, RUNNING, etc.

SETCHGD This signal will generate an Internal Event to the Internal Event listif any settings are changed.

SETGRPCHGD This signal will generate an Internal Event to the Internal Event listif any setting groups are changed.

FTFERROR This signal will be active if both the working file and the backup fileare corrupted and can not be recovered.

3.2.2.2 Run-time model

The analog signals to the A/D converter is internally distributed into two differentconverters, one with low amplification and one with high amplification, see figure26.



REB 670

Figure 26: Simplified drawing of A/D converter for the 600 platform.

The technique to split the analogue input signal into two converters with differentamplification makes it possible to supervise the incoming signals under normalconditions where the signals from the two converters should be identical. An alarmis given if the signals are out of the boundaries. Another benefit is that it improvesthe dynamic performance of the A/D conversion.

The self-supervision of the A/D conversion is controlled by the ADx_Controllerfunction. One of the tasks for the controller is to perform a validation of the inputsignals. This is done in a validation filter which has mainly two objects: First is thevalidation part, i.e. checks that the A/D conversion seems to work as expected.Secondly, the filter chooses which of the two signals that shall be sent to the CPU,i.e. the signal that has the most suitable level, the ADx_LO or the 16 timeshigherADx_HI.

When the signal is within measurable limits on both channels, a direct comparisonof the two channels can be performed. If the validation fails, the CPU will be informedand an alarm will be given.

The ADx_Controller also supervise other parts of the A/D converter.


InternalSignalIS---

FAILWARNING

CPUFAILCPUWARN

TSYNCERRRTCERR

en04000392.vsd

Figure 27: IS function block



53

3.2.4 Output signals

Table 16: Output signals for the InternalSignal (IS---) function block

Signal DescriptionFAIL Internal fail

WARNING Internal warning

CPUFAIL CPU fail

CPUWARN CPU warning

TSYNCERR Time synchronization status

RTCERR Real time clock status

3.2.5 Setting parametersThe function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or Protection andControl IED Manager (PCM 600)

3.2.6 Technical data

Table 17: Self supervision with internal event list

Data ValueRecording manner Continuous, event controlled

List size 1000 events, first in-first out

3.3 Time synchronization

3.3.1 IntroductionUse the time synchronization source selector to select a common source of absolutetime for the IED when it is a part of a protection system. This makes comparison ofevents and disturbance data between all IEDs in a SA system possible.

3.3.2 Principle of operation

3.3.2.1 General concepts

Time definitionsThe error of a clock is the difference between the actual time of the clock, and thetime the clock is intended to have. The rate accuracy of a clock is normally called theclock accuracy and means how much the error increases, i.e. how much the clock



REB 670

gains or loses time. A disciplined clock is a clock that “knows” its own faults andtries to compensate for them, i.e. a trained clock.

Synchronization principleFrom a general point of view synchronization can be seen as a hierarchical structure.A module is synchronized from a higher level and provides synchronization to lowerlevels.

Module

Syncronization froma higher level

Optional syncronization ofmodules at a lower level

en05000206.vsd

Figure 28: Synchronization principle

A module is said to be synchronized when it periodically receives synchronizationmessages from a higher level. As the level decreases, the accuracy of thesynchronization decreases as well. A module can have several potential sources ofsynchronization, with different maximum errors, which gives the module thepossibility to choose the source with the best quality, and to adjust its internal clockafter this source. The maximum error of a clock can be defined as a function of:

• The maximum error of the last used synchronization message• The time since the last used synchronization message• The rate accuracy of the internal clock in the module.

3.3.2.2 Real Time Clock (RTC) operation

The IED has a built-in Real Time Clock (RTC) with a resolution of one nanosecond.The clock has a built-in calendar that handles leap years through 2098.

RTC at power offDuring power off, the time in the IED time is kept by a capacitor backed RTC thatwill provide 35 ppm accuracy for 5 days. This means that if the power is off, the timein the IED may drift with 3 seconds per day, during 5 days, and after this time thetime will be lost completely.



55

RTC at startupAt IED startup, the internal time is free running. If the RTC is still alive since the lastup time, the time in the IED will be quite accurate (may drift 35 ppm), but if the RTCpower has been lost during power off (will happen after 5 days), the IED time willstart at 1970-01-01. For more information, please refer to section "Timesynchronization startup procedure" and section "Example, binary synchronization".

Time synchronization startup procedureThe first message that contains full time (as for instance LON, SNTP, GPS etc.) willgive an accurate time to the IED. The IED is brought into a safe state and the time isthereafter set to the correct value. After the initial setting of the clock, one of threethings will happen with each of the coming synchronization messages, configured as“fine”:

• If the synchronization message, that is similar to the other messages from itsorigin has an offset compared to the internal time in the IED, the message is useddirectly for synchronization, that is for adjusting the internal clock to obtain zerooffset at the next coming time message.

• If the synchronization message has an offset that is large compared to the othermessages, a “spike-filter” in the IED will remove this time-message.

• If the synchronization message has an offset that is large, and the followingmessage also has a large offset, the spike filter will not act and the offset in thesynchronization message will be compared to a threshold that defaults to 100milliseconds. If the offset is more than the threshold, the IED is brought into asafe state and the clock is thereafter set to the correct time. If the offset is lowerthan the threshold, the clock will be adjusted with 1000 ppm until the offset isremoved. With an adjustment of 1000 ppm, it will take 100 seconds or 1.7minutes to remove an offset of 100 milliseconds.

Synchronization messages configured as coarse will only be used for initial settingof the time. After this has been done, the messages are checked against the internaltime and only an offset of more than 10 seconds will reset the time.

Rate accuracyIn the REx670 IED, the rate accuracy at cold start is about 100 ppm, but if the IEDis synchronized for a while, the rate accuracy will be approximately 1 ppm if thesurrounding temperature is constant. Normally it will take 20 minutes to reach fullaccuracy.

Time-out on synchronization sourcesAll synchronization interfaces has a time-out, and a configured interface must receivetime-messages regularly, in order not to give a TSYNCERR. Normally, the time-outis set so that one message can be lost without getting a TSYNCERR, but if more thanone message is lost, a TSYNCERR will be given.



REB 670

3.3.2.3 Synchronization alternatives

Three main alternatives of external time synchronization are available. Either thesynchronization message is applied via any of the communication ports of the IEDas a telegram message including date and time or as a minute pulse, connected to abinary input, or via GPS. The minute pulse is used to fine tune already existing timein the IEDs.

Synchronization via SNTPSNTP provides a “Ping-Pong” method of synchronization. A message is sent froman IED to an SNTP-server, and the SNTP-server returns the message after filling ina reception time and a transmission time. SNTP operates via the normal Ethernetnetwork that connects IEDs together in an IEC61850 network. For SNTP to operateproperly, there must be a SNTP-server present, preferably in the same station. TheSNTP synchronization provides an accuracy that will give 1 ms accuracy for binaryinputs. The IED itself can be set as a SNTP-time server.

Synchronization via Serial Communication Module (SLM)On the serial buses (both LON and SPA) two types of synchronization messages aresent.

• Coarse message is sent every minute and comprises complete date and time, i.e.year, month, day, hours, minutes, seconds and milliseconds.

• Fine message is sent every second and comprises only seconds and milliseconds.

IEC60870-5-103 is not used to synchronize the relay, but instead the offset betweenthe local time in the relay and the time received from 103 is added to all times (inevents and so on) sent via 103. In this way the relay acts as it is synchronized fromvarious 103 sessions at the same time. Actually, there is a “local” time for each 103session.

The SLM module is located on the AD conversion Module (ADM).

Synchronization via Built-in-GPSThe built in GPS clock modules receives and decodes time information from theglobal positioning system. The modules are located on the GPS time synchronizationModule (GSM).

Synchronization via binary inputThe IED accepts minute pulses to a binary input. These minute pulses can begenerated from e.g. station master clock. If the station master clock is notsynchronized from a world wide source, time will be a relative time valid for thesubstation. Both positive and negative edge on the signal can be accepted. This signalis also considered as a fine signal.

The minute pulse is connected to any channel on any Binary Input Module in the IED.The electrical characteristic is thereby the same as for any other binary input.



57

If the objective of synchronization is to achieve a relative time within the substationand if no station master clock with minute pulse output is available, a simple minutepulse generator can be designed and used for synchronization of the IEDs. The minutepulse generator can be created using the logical elements and timers available in theIED.

The definition of a minute pulse is that it occurs one minute after the last pulse. Asonly the flanks are detected, the flank of the minute pulse shall occur one minute afterthe last flank.

Binary minute pulses are checked with reference to frequency.

Pulse data:

• Period time (a) should be 60 seconds.• Pulse length (b):

• Minimum pulse length should be >50 ms.• Maximum pulse length is optional.

• Amplitude (c) - please refer to section "Binary input module (BIM)".

Deviations in the period time larger than 50 ms will cause TSYNCERR.

a

b

c

en05000251.vsd

Figure 29: Binary minute pulses

The default time-out-time for a minute pulse is two minutes, and if no valid minutepulse is received within two minutes a SYNCERR will be given.

If contact bounces occurs, only the first pulse will be detected as a minute pulse. Thenext minute pulse will be registered first 60 s - 50 ms after the last contact bounce.

If the minute pulses are perfect, e.g. it is exactly 60 seconds between the pulses,contact bounces might occur 49 ms after the actual minute pulse without effectingthe system. If contact bounces occurs more than 50 ms, e.g. it is less than 59950 msbetween the two most adjacent positive (or negative) flanks, the minute pulse willnot be accepted.



REB 670

Example, binary synchronizationA IED is configured to use only binary input, and a valid binary input is applied to abinary input card. The HMI is used to tell the IED the approximate time and the minutepulse is used to synchronize the IED thereafter. The definition of a minute pulse isthat it occurs one minute after the previous minute pulse, so the first minute pulse isnot used at all. The second minute pulse will probably be rejected due to the spikefilter. The third pulse will give the IED a good time and will reset the time so that thefourth minute pulse will occur on a minute border. After the first three minutes, thetime in the IED will be good if the coarse time is set properly via the HMI or the RTCbackup still keeps the time since last up-time. If the minute pulse is removed forinstance for an hour, the internal time will drift by maximum the error rate in theinternal clock. If the minute pulse is returned, the first pulse automatically is rejected.The second pulse will possibly be rejected due to the spike filter. The third pulse willeither synchronize the time, if the time offset is more than 100 ms, or adjust the time,if the time offset is small enough. If the time is set, the application will be brought toa safe state before the time is set. If the time is adjusted, the time will reach itsdestination within 1.7 minutes.


TIMETIME-

TSYNCERRRTCERR

en05000425.vsd

Figure 30: TIME function block

3.3.4 Output signals

Table 18: Output signals for the TIME (TIME-) function block

Signal DescriptionTSYNCERR Time synchronization error

RTCERR Real time clock error

3.3.5 Setting parametersPath in local HMI: Setting/Time

Path in PCM 600: Settings/Time/Synchronization



59

Table 19: Basic general settings for the TimeSynch (TSYN-) function

Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionCoarseSyncSrc Off

SPALONSNTP

- Off - Coarse timesynchronizationsource

FineSyncSource OffSPALONBINGPSGPS+SPAGPS+LONGPS+BINSNTPGPS+SNTP

- Off - Fine timesynchronizationsource

SyncMaster OffSNTP-Server

- Off - Activate IEDassynchronizationmaster

TimeAdjustRate SlowFast

- Fast - Adjust rate for timesynchronization

Table 20: Basic general settings for the TimeSynch (TSYN-) function

Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionCoarseSyncSrc Off

SPALONSNTP

- Off - Coarse timesynchronizationsource

FineSyncSource OffSPALONBINGPSGPS+SPAGPS+LONGPS+BINSNTPGPS+SNTP

- Off - Fine timesynchronizationsource

SyncMaster OffSNTP-Server

- Off - Activate IEDassynchronizationmaster

TimeAdjustRate SlowFast

- Slow - Adjust rate for timesynchronization



REB 670

Table 21: General settings for the TimeSynchBIN (TBIN-) function

Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionModulePosition 3 - 16 1 3 - Hardware position of

IO module for timesynchronization

BinaryInput 1 - 16 1 1 - Binary input numberfor timesynchronization

BinDetection PositiveEdgeNegativeEdge

- PositiveEdge - Positive or negativeedge detection

Table 22: General settings for the TimeSynchSNTP (TSNT-) function

Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionServerIP-Add 0 - 18 1 0.0.0.0 - Server IP-address

RedServIP-Add 0 - 18 1 0.0.0.0 - Redundant server IP-address

Table 23: General settings for the DaySumDSTBegin (TSTB-) function

Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionMonthInYear January

FebruaryMarchAprilMayJuneJulyAugustSeptemberOctoberNovemberDecember

- March - Month in year whendaylight time starts

DayInWeek SundayMondayTuesdayWednesdayThursdayFridaySaturday

- Sunday - Day in week whendaylight time starts

WeekInMonth LastFirstSecondThirdFourth

- Last - Week in month whendaylight time starts

UTCTimeOfDay 0 - 86400 1 3600 s UTC Time of day inseconds whendaylight time starts



61

Table 24: General settings for the DaySumTimeEnd (TSTE-) function

Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionMonthInYear January

FebruaryMarchAprilMayJuneJulyAugustSeptemberOctoberNovemberDecember

- October - Month in year whendaylight time ends

DayInWeek SundayMondayTuesdayWednesdayThursdayFridaySaturday

- Sunday - Day in week whendaylight time ends

WeekInMonth LastFirstSecondThirdFourth

- Last - Week in month whendaylight time ends

UTCTimeOfDay 0 - 86400 1 3600 s UTC Time of day inseconds whendaylight time ends

Table 25: General settings for the TimeZone (TZON-) function

Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionNoHalfHourUTC -24 - 24 1 0 - Number of half-hours

from UTC


Table 26: Time synchronization, time tagging

Function ValueTime tagging resolution, Events and SampledMeasurement Values

1 ms

Time tagging error with synchronization once/min(minute pulse synchronization), Events andSampled Measurement Values

± 1.0 ms typically

Time tagging error with SNTP synchronization,Sampled Measurement Values

± 1.0 ms typically



REB 670

3.4 Parameter setting groups

3.4.1 IntroductionUse the six sets of settings to optimize IED operation for different system conditions.By creating and switching between fine tuned setting sets, either from the human-machine interface or configurable binary inputs, results in a highly adaptable IEDthat can cope with a variety of system scenarios.

3.4.2 Principle of operationThe ACGR function block has six functional inputs, each corresponding to one of thesetting groups stored in the IED. Activation of any of these inputs changes the activesetting group. Seven functional output signals are available for configurationpurposes, so that up to date information on the active setting group is always available.

A setting group is selected by using the local HMI, from a front connected personalcomputer, remotely from the station control or station monitoring system or byactivating the corresponding input to the ACGR function block.

Each input of the function block can be configured to connect to any of the binaryinputs in the IED. To do this the PCM 600 configuration tool must be used.

The external control signals are used for activating a suitable setting group whenadaptive functionality is necessary. Input signals that should activate setting groupsmust be either permanent or a pulse exceeding 400 ms.

More than one input may be activated at the same time. In such cases the lower ordersetting group has priority. This means that if for example both group four and grouptwo are set to activate, group two will be the one activated.

Every time the active group is changed, the output signal SETCHGD is sending apulse with the length according to parameter t, which is set from PCM 600 or in thelocal HMI.

The parameter MAXSETGR defines the maximum number of setting groups in use toswitch between.



63

Figure 31: Connection of the function to external circuits

The above example also includes seven output signals, for confirmation of whichgroup that is active.

The SGC function block has an input where the number of setting groups used isdefined. Switching can only be done within that number of groups. The number ofsetting groups selected to be used will be filtered so only the setting groups used willbe shown on the PST setting tool.


ActiveGroupACGR-

ACTGRP1ACTGRP2ACTGRP3ACTGRP4ACTGRP5ACTGRP6

GRP1GRP2GRP3GRP4GRP5GRP6

SETCHGD

en05000433.vsd

Figure 32: ACGR function block

NoOfSetGrpSGC--

MAXSETGR

en05000716.vsd

3.4.4 Input and output signals



REB 670

Table 27: Input signals for the ActiveGroup (ACGR-) function block

Signal DescriptionACTGRP1 Selects setting group 1 as active

ACTGRP2 Selects setting group 2 as active





Table 28: Output signals for the ActiveGroup (ACGR-) function block

Signal DescriptionGRP1 Setting group 1 is active

GRP2 Setting group 2 is active





SETCHGD Pulse when setting changed

3.4.5 Setting parameters

Table 29: General settings for the ActiveGroup (ACGR-) function

Parameter Range Step Default Unit Descriptiont 0.0 - 10.0 0.1 1.0 s Pulse length of pulse

when setting changed

Table 30: General settings for the NoOfSetGrp (SGC--) function

Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionActiveSetGrp SettingGroup1

SettingGroup2SettingGroup3SettingGroup4SettingGroup5SettingGroup6

- SettingGroup1 - ActiveSettingGroup

MAXSETGR 1 - 6 1 1 No Max number of settinggroups 1-6



65

3.5 Test mode functionality

3.5.1 IntroductionMost of the functions in the IED can individually be blocked by means of settingsfrom the local HMI or PST. To enable these blockings the IED must be set in testmode. When leaving the test mode, i.e. entering normal mode, these blockings aredisabled and everything is set to normal operation. All testing will be done withactually set and configured values within the IED. No settings will be changed, thusmistakes are avoided.

3.5.2 Principle of operationTo be able to test the functions in the IED, you must set the terminal in the TESTmode. There are two ways of setting the terminal in the TEST mode:

• By configuration, activating the input of the function block TEST.• By setting TestMode to On in the local HMI, under the menu: TEST/IED test

mode.

While the IED is in test mode, the ACTIVE output of the function block TEST isactivated. The other two outputs of the function block TEST are showing which isthe generator of the “Test mode: On” state — input from configuration (OUTPUToutput activated) or setting from LHMI (SETTING output activated).

While the IED is in test mode, the yellow START LED will flash and all functionsare blocked. Any function can be de-blocked individually regarding functionality andevent signalling.

Most of the functions in the IED can individually be blocked by means of settingsfrom the local HMI. To enable these blockings the IED must be set in test mode (theoutput ACTIVE in function block TEST is set to true), see example in figure 33.When leaving the test mode, i.e. entering normal mode, these blockings are disabledand everything is set to normal operation. All testing will be done with actually setand configured values within the IED. No settings will be changed, thus no mistakesare possible.

The blocked functions will still be blocked next time entering the test mode, if theblockings were not reset.

The blocking of a function concerns all output signals from the actual function, so nooutputs will be activated.

The TEST function block might be used to automatically block functions when a testhandle is inserted in a test switch. A contact in the test switch (RTXP24 contact 29-30)can supply a binary input which in turn is configured to the TEST function block.



REB 670

Each of the protection functions includes the blocking from TEST function block. Atypical example from the undervoltage function is shown in figure 33.

Time

U

Normal voltage

U1<

U2<

IntBlkStVal1

IntBlkStVal2

Disconnection

tBlkUV1 <t1,t1Min

tBlkUV2 <t2,t2Min

Block step 1

Block step 2en05000466.vsd

Figure 33: Example of blocking the time delayed undervoltage protectionfunction.


TestTEST-

INPUT ACTIVEOUTPUTSETTING

en05000443.vsd

Figure 34: TEST function block


Table 31: Input signals for the Test (TEST-) function block

Signal DescriptionINPUT Sets terminal in test mode when active



67

Table 32: Output signals for the Test (TEST-) function block

Signal DescriptionACTIVE Terminal in test mode when active

OUTPUT Test input is active

SETTING Test mode setting is (On) or not (Off)


Table 33: General settings for the Test (TEST-) function

Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionTestMode Off

On- Off - Test mode in

operation (On) or not(Off)

3.6 IED identifiers

3.6.1 IntroductionThere are two functions that allow you to identify each IED individually:ProductInformation function has only three pre-set, unchangeable but neverthelessvery important settings: SerialNo., Ordering No., and ProductDate, that you can seeon the local HMI, under Diagnostics/IED Status/Identifiers. They are very helpful incase of support process (such as repair or maintenance).

Identifiers function is actually allowing you to identify the individual IED in yoursystem, not only in the substation, but in a whole region or a country.


Table 34: General settings for the TerminalID (TEID-) function

Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionStationName 0 - 18 1 Station name - Station name

StationNumber 0 - 99999 1 0 - Station number

ObjectName 0 - 18 1 Object name - Object name

ObjectNumber 0 - 99999 1 0 - Object number

UnitName 0 - 18 1 Unit name - Unit name

UnitNumber 0 - 99999 1 0 - Unit number



REB 670

3.7 Signal matrix for binary inputs (SMBI)

3.7.1 IntroductionThe SMBI function block is used within the CAP tool in direct relation with the SignalMatrix Tool SMT (please see the overview of the engineering process in the“Application manual”, chapter “Engineering of the IED”). It represents the waybinary inputs are brought in for one IED 670 configuration.

3.7.2 Principle of operationThe SMBI function block, see figure 35, receives its inputs from the real (hardware)binary inputs via the SMT, and makes them available to the rest of the configurationvia its outputs, named BI1 to BI10. The inputs, as well as the whole block, can betag-named. These tags will be represented in SMT.


en05000434.vsd

SMBISI01-

INSTNAMEBI1NAMEBI2NAMEBI3NAMEBI4NAMEBI5NAMEBI6NAMEBI7NAMEBI8NAMEBI9NAMEBI10NAME

BI1BI2BI3BI4BI5BI6BI7BI8BI9

BI10

Figure 35: SI function block


Table 35: Input signals for the SMBI (SI01-) function block

Signal DescriptionINSTNAME Instance name in Signal Matrix Tool

BI1NAME Signal name for BI1 in Signal Matrix Tool










69

Signal DescriptionBI8NAME Signal name for BI8 in Signal Matrix Tool



Table 36: Output signals for the SMBI (SI01-) function block

Signal DescriptionBI1 Binary input 1

BI2 Binary input 2

BI3 Binary input 3

BI4 Binary input 4

BI5 Binary input 5

BI6 Binary input 6

BI7 Binary input 7

BI8 Binary input 8

BI9 Binary input 9

BI10 Binary input 10

3.8 Signal matrix for binary outputs (SMBO)

3.8.1 IntroductionThe SMBO function block is used within the CAP tool in direct relation with theSignal Matrix Tool SMT (please see the overview of the engineering process in the“Application manual”, chapter “Engineering of the IED”). It represents the waybinary outputs are sent from one IED 670 configuration.

3.8.2 Principle of operationThe SMBO function block, see figure 36, receives logical signal from the IEDconfiguration, which it is transferring to the real (hardware) outputs, via the SMT.The inputs in the SMBO are named BO1 to BO10 and they, as well as the wholefunction block, can be tag-named. The name tags will appear in SMT.



REB 670


en05000439.vsd

SMBOSO01-

BO1BO2BO3BO4BO5BO6BO7BO8BO9BO10

INSTNAMEBO1NAMEBO2NAMEBO3NAMEBO4NAMEBO5NAMEBO6NAMEBO7NAMEBO8NAMEBO9NAME

BO10NAME

Figure 36: SO function block


Table 37: Input signals for the SMBO (SO01-) function block

Signal DescriptionBO1 Signal name for BO1 in Single Matrix Tool

BO2 Signal name for BO2 in Single Matrix Tool









Table 38: Output signals for the SMBO (SO01-) function block

Signal DescriptionINSTNAME Instance name in Single Matrix Tool

BO1NAME Signal name for BO1 in Single Matrix Tool










71

Signal DescriptionBO8NAME Signal name for BO8 in Single Matrix Tool



3.9 Signal matrix for analog inputs (SMAI)

3.9.1 IntroductionThe SMAI function block (or the pre-processing function block, as it is also known)is used within the PCM 600 in direct relation with the Signal Matrix Tool SMT (pleasesee the overview of the engineering process in the “Application manual”, chapter“Engineering of the IED”). It represents the way analog inputs are brought in for oneIED 670 configuration.

3.9.2 Principle of operationEvery SMAI function block can receive four analog signals (three phases and oneneutral value), either voltage or current, see figure 37 and figure 38. The outputs ofthe SMAI are giving information about every aspect of the 3ph analog signalsacquired (phase angle, RMS value, frequency and frequency derivates etc. – 244values in total). The BLOCK input will reset to 0 all the analog inputs of the functionblock.


en05000705.vsd

SMAIPR01-

BLOCKDFTSPFCGRPNAMEAI1NAMEAI2NAMEAI3NAMEAI4NAMETYPE

SYNCOUTSPFCOUT

AI3PAI1AI2AI3AI4AIN

NOSMPLCY

Figure 37: PR01 function block



REB 670

en05000706.vsd

SMAIPR02-

BLOCKGRPNAMEAI1NAMEAI2NAMEAI3NAMEAI4NAMETYPE

AI3PAI1AI2AI3AI4AIN

NOSMPLCY

Figure 38: PR02–12 function block


Table 39: Input signals for the SMAI (PR01-) function block

Signal DescriptionBLOCK Block group 1

DFTSYNC Synchronisation of DFT calculation

DFTSPFC Number of samples per fundamental cycle used for DFTcalculation

GRPNAME Group name for GRP1 in Signal Matrix Tool

AI1NAME Signal name for AI1 in Signal Matrix Tool




Table 40: Output signals for the SMAI (PR01-) function block

Signal DescriptionSYNCOUT Synchronisation signal from internal DFT reference function

SPFCOUT Number of samples per fundamental cycle from internal DFTreference function

AI3P Group 1 analog input 3-phase group

AI1 Group 1 analog input 1




AIN Group 1 analog input residual for disturbance recorder



73

Table 41: Input signals for the SMAI (PR02-) function block

Signal DescriptionBLOCK Block group 2

GRPNAME Group name for GRP2 in Signal Matrix Tool





Table 42: Output signals for the SMAI (PR02-) function block

Signal DescriptionAI3P Group 2 analog input 3-phase group





AIN Group 2 analog input residual for disturbance recorder


Settings DFTRefExtOut and DFTReference shall be set to defaultvalue InternalDFTRef if no VT inputs are available.



REB 670

Table 43: General settings for the SMAI (PR01-) function

Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionDFTRefExtOut InternalDFTRef

AdDFTRefCh1AdDFTRefCh2AdDFTRefCh3AdDFTRefCh4AdDFTRefCh5AdDFTRefCh6AdDFTRefCh7AdDFTRefCh8AdDFTRefCh9AdDFTRefCh10AdDFTRefCh11AdDFTRefCh12External DFT ref

- InternalDFTRef - DFT reference forexternal output

DFTReference InternalDFTRefAdDFTRefCh1AdDFTRefCh2AdDFTRefCh3AdDFTRefCh4AdDFTRefCh5AdDFTRefCh6AdDFTRefCh7AdDFTRefCh8AdDFTRefCh9AdDFTRefCh10AdDFTRefCh11AdDFTRefCh12External DFT ref

- InternalDFTRef - DFT reference

ConnectionType Ph-NPh-Ph

- Ph-N - Input connection type

Negation OffNegateNNegate3PhNegate3Ph+N

- Off - Negation

MinValFreqMeas 5 - 200 1 10 % Limit for frequencycalculation in % ofUBase

UBase 0.05 - 2000.00 0.05 400.00 kV Base voltage

TYPE 1 - 2 1 1 Ch 1=Voltage,2=Current



75

Table 44: General settings for the SMAI (PR02-) function

Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionDFTReference InternalDFTRef

AdDFTRefCh1AdDFTRefCh2AdDFTRefCh3AdDFTRefCh4AdDFTRefCh5AdDFTRefCh6AdDFTRefCh7AdDFTRefCh8AdDFTRefCh9AdDFTRefCh10AdDFTRefCh11AdDFTRefCh12External DFT ref


ConnectionType Ph-NPh-Ph

- Ph-N - Input connection type

Negation OffNegateNNegate3PhNegate3Ph+N

- Off - Negation

MinValFreqMeas 5 - 200 1 10 % Limit for frequencycalculation in % ofUBase


TYPE 1 - 2 1 1 Ch 1=Voltage,2=Current

3.10 Summation block 3 phase (SUM3Ph)

3.10.1 IntroductionThe SUM3Ph function block is used in order to get the sum of two sets of 3 ph analogsignals (of the same type) for those IED functions that might need it.

3.10.2 Principle of operationThe summation block receives the 3ph signals from the SMAI blocks, seefigure 39. In the same way, the BLOCK input will reset to 0 all the analog inputs ofthe function block.



REB 670


Sum3PhSU01-

BLOCKDFTSYNCDFTSPFCG1AI3PG2AI3P

AI3PAI1AI2AI3AI4

en05000441.vsd

Figure 39: SU function block


Table 45: Input signals for the Sum3Ph (SU01-) function block

Signal DescriptionBLOCK Block

DFTSYNC Synchronisation of DFT calculation

DFTSPFC Number of samples per fundamental cycle used for DFTcalculation

G1AI3P Group 1 analog input 3-phase group

G2AI3P Group 2 analog input 3-phase group

Table 46: Output signals for the Sum3Ph (SU01-) function block

Signal DescriptionAI3P Group analog input 3-phase group

AI1 Group 1 analog input





Settings DFTRefExtOut and DFTReference shall be set to defaultvalue InternalDFTRef if no VT inputs are available.



77

Table 47: General settings for the Sum3Ph (SU01-) function

Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionSummationType Group1+Group2

Group1-Group2Group2-Group1-(Group1+Group2)

- Group1+Group2 - Summation type

DFTReference InternalDFTRefAdDFTRefCh1External DFT ref


FreqMeasMinVal 5 - 200 1 10 % Amplitude limit forfrequencycalculation in % ofUbase




REB 670

Section 4 Differential protection

About this chapterThis chapter describes the measuring principles, functions and parameters used indifferential protection.

4.1 Busbar differential protection (PDIF, 87B)

Busbar differential protection, 3-phase version

Function block name:BTHxBTZA, BTZBBTCZBTZI

IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

3Id/IANSI number: 87B

IEC 61850 logical node name:BUTPTRCBZNTPDIFBCZTPDIFBZITGGIO

Busbar differential protection, 1-phase version

Function block name:BSxxBSZA, BSZBBSCZBSZI


3Id/IANSI number: 87B

IEC 61850 logical node name:BUSPTRCBZNSPDIFBCZSPDIFBZISGGIO

Switch status monitoring

Function block name: SSxx-- IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

ANSI number:

IEC 61850 logical node name:SWSGGIO

Section 4Differential protection


79

4.1.1 IntroductionREB 670 is designed for the selective, reliable and fast differential protection ofbusbars, T-connections and meshed corners. REB 670 can be used for differentswitchgear layouts, including single and double busbar with or without transfer bus,double circuit breaker or one-and-half circuit breaker stations. The IED is applicablefor the protection of medium voltage (MV), high voltage (HV) and extra high voltage(EHV) installations at a power system frequency of 50Hz or 60Hz. The IED can detectall types of internal phase-to-phase and phase-to-earth faults in solidly earthed or lowimpedance earthed power systems, as well as all internal multi-phase faults in isolatedor high-impedance earthed power systems.

4.1.1.1 Available versions

The following versions of REB 670 are available:

1. Three-phase version of the IED with two low-impedance differential protectionzones and four three-phase CT inputs.• This version is available in 1/2 of 19” case. The version is intended for

simpler applications such as T-connections, meshed corners, etc.2. Three-phase version of the IED with two low-impedance differential protection

zones and eight three-phase CT inputs.• This version is available in full 19” case. The version is intended for

applications on smaller busbars, with up to two zones and eight CT inputs.3. One-phase version of the IED with two low-impedance differential protection

zones and twelve CT inputs.• This version is available in either 1/2 of 19” or full 19” case.• The IED in 1/2 of 19” case is intended for applications without need for

dynamic Zone Selection. Typical examples are substations with singlebusbar with or without bus-section breaker, one-and-half breaker or doublebreaker arrangements. Three such IEDs offer cost effective solution forsuch simple substation arrangements with up to 12 CT inputs.

• The IED in full 19” case is intended for applications in substation wheredynamic Zone Selection or bigger number of binary inputs and outputs isneeded. Such stations for example are double busbar station with or withouttransfer bus with up to 12 CT inputs.

• This version can be optionally used with external auxiliary summationtransformers.

4. One-phase version of the IED with two low-impedance differential protectionzones and twenty-four CT inputs• This version is available in full 19” case. The IED is intended for busbar

protection applications in big substation where dynamic Zone Selection,quite large number of binary inputs and outputs and many CT inputs are



REB 670

needed. The IED includes two differential zones and twenty-four CTinputs.

• This version can be optionally used with external auxiliary summationtransformers.

4.1.2 Principle of operationBusbar differential protection detects internal faults within the station. In order to dothat selectively it often incorporates more than one differential protection-measuringelement. These differential protection-measuring elements are often called protectionzones in relay protection literature. On the other hand, busbar protection is quitespecific because typically all CTs in the station are connected to it. It is therefore ofoutmost importance that individually connected CT inputs are appropriately routedto the relevant protection zone. Sometimes these connections need to be dynamicallychanged in accordance with the actual connections within the station. Therefore REB670 busbar differential protection has two essential parts:

1. Differential Protection, which provide differential protection algorithm for eachbusbar section

2. Zone Selection, which provide dynamic linking between input CTs andindividual protection zones as well as routing of zone trip signals to the individualbay CBs

It is also important to understand that all function blocks described in the nextsections, except the Switch Status function block, are not independent from eachother. Hidden connections are pre-made in the REB software in order to simplify therequired engineering work in PCM 600 for the end user.

4.1.3 Differential protectionThis part of BBP consists of differential protection algorithm, sensitive differentialprotection algorithm, check zone algorithm, open CT algorithm and two supervisionalgorithms. It is presented to the end user as three function blocks:

1. Zone A2. Zone B (functionality wise completely identical to the Zone A)3. Check Zone

4.1.4 Differential Zone AThe numerical, low-impedance differential protection function is designed for fastand selective protection for faults within protected zone. All connected CT inputs areprovided with a restraint feature. The minimum pick-up value for the differentialcurrent is set to give a suitable sensitivity for all internal faults. For busbar protectionapplications typical setting value for the minimum differential operating current isfrom 50% to 150% of the biggest CT. This setting is made directly in primary amperes.



81

The operating slope for the differential operating characteristic is fixed to 53% in thealgorithm. The fast tripping time of the low-impedance differential protectionfunction is especially advantages for power system networks with high fault levelsor where fast fault clearance is required for power system stability. The advancedopen CT detection algorithm detects instantly the open CT secondary circuits andprevents differential protection operation without any need for additional check zone.

Differential protection zones in REB 670 include a sensitive operational level. Thissensitive operational level is designed to be able to detect internal busbar earth faultsin low impedance earthed power systems (i.e. power systems where the earth-faultcurrent is limited to a certain level, typically between 300A and 2000A primary by aneutral point reactor or resistor). Alternatively this sensitive level can be used whenhigh sensitivity is required from busbar differential protection (i.e. energizing of thebus via long line).

Overall operating characteristic of the differential function in REB 670 is shown infigure 40.

Differential protectionoperation characteristic

Operateregion

Diff Oper Level

I d [P

rimar

y Am

ps]

Iin [Primary Amps]

s=0.53

I d=I in

Sensitivedifferentialprotection

en06000142.vsd

Sensitive Oper Level Sens Iin Block

Figure 40: REB 670 operating characteristic

Where:

Iin Iin represents the RMS value of the incoming current to the differential protection zone

Id Id represents the RMS value of the differential current of the differential protection zone

s = 0.53 the operating slope for the differential function is fixed to 0.53 in the algorithm and can not bechanged by the user



REB 670

4.1.4.1 Open CT detection

The innovative measuring algorithm provides stability for open or short-circuitedmain CT secondary circuits, which means that no separate check zone is actuallynecessary. Pick-up current level for open CT detection can usually be set to detectthe open circuit condition for the smallest CT. This built-in feature allows theprotection terminal to be set very sensitive, even to a lower value than the maximumCT primary rating in the station. At detection of problems in CT secondary circuits,the differential protection can be instantly blocked and an alarm is given.Alternatively the differential protection can be automatically desensitized in order toensure busbar differential protection stability during normal through-load condition.When problems in CT secondary circuits has been found and associate error has beencorrected a manual reset must be given to the IED. This can be done locally from thefront HMI, or remotely via binary input or communication link.

However, it shall be noted that this feature can be only partly utilized when thesummation principle is used.

4.1.4.2 Differential protection supervision

Dual monitoring of differential protection status is available. The first monitoringfeature operates after settable time delay when differential current is higher than theuser settable level. This feature can be for example used to design automatic resetlogic for previously described open CT detection feature. The second monitoringfeature operates immediately when the busbar through-going current is bigger thanthe user settable level. Both of these monitoring features are phase segregated andthey give out binary signals, which can be either used to trigger disturbance recorderor for alarming purposes.

4.1.4.3 Explanation of Zone function block

Detailed explanation of Zone function block inputs

• BLOCK, when this binary input has logical value one all trip commands fromthe zone are prevented

• BLKST, when this binary input has logical value one the differential protectionwithin the zone is blocked (i.e. can not operate)

• TRZONE, when this binary input has logical value one forced external trip willbe given from the zone

• RSTTRIP, when this binary input has logical value one latched trip from the zonewill be re-set back to zero. Whether zone trip is in Latched or SelfReset mode isdefined by a parameter setting DiffTripOut

• RSTOCT, when this binary input has logical value one OCT latched signals andpossible blocking will be re-set. It shall be noted that it is possible to do this onlyif the zone differential current has lower value then defined by a parameterDiffOperLevel

• ENSENS, when this binary input has logical value one the sensitive differentialprotection feature within the zone is allowed to operate in accordance with its



83

settings (e.g. connect here the start signal from open delta overvoltage relay inimpedance grounded system)

Detailed explanation of Zone function block outputs

• TRIP, this binary output shall be used as general trip command from the zone.It will be activated when either differential protection operates or sensitivedifferential protection operates or for any external trip signal (i.e. either from theindividual bays connected to the zone or via TRZONE input).

• TRIPLX, this binary output has logical value one whenever zone TRIP outputsignal is initiated (only available in 1Ph-version)

• TRIPL1, TRIPl2, TRIPL3, these binary outputs has logical value one wheneverzone TRIP output signal is initiated (only available in 3Ph-version)

• TREXTBAY, this binary output has logical value one whenever zone TRIPoutput signal is initiated by operation of the external trip signal from one of theconnected bays. In most cases this will in practice mean operation of back-uptrip command from the breaker failure protection in that bay

• TREXTZ, this binary output has logical value one whenever zone TRIP outputsignal is initiated externally via input TRZONE

• TRSENS, this binary output has logical value one whenever zone TRIP outputsignal is initiated by operation of the sensitive differential protection algorithm(only available in 1Ph-version)

• TRSENSLx, this binary output has logical value one whenever zone TRIP outputsignal is initiated by operation of the sensitive differential protection algorithmin the corresponding phase (only available in 3Ph-version)

• OCT, this binary output shall be used as general Open CT detection signal fromthe zone. It will be activated when either fast or slow OCT algorithm operates.

• SOCT, this binary output has logical value one whenever zone OCT output signalis initiated by operation of the slow OCT algorithm (only available in 1Ph-version)

• SOCTLx, this binary output has logical value one whenever zone OCT outputsignal is initiated by operation of the slow OCT algorithm in the correspondingphase (only available in 3Ph-version)

• FOCT, this binary output has logical value one whenever zone OCT output signalis initiated by operation of the fast OCT algorithm (only available in 1Ph-version)

• FOCTLx, this binary output has logical value one whenever zone OCT outputsignal is initiated by operation of the fast OCT algorithm in the correspondingphase (only available in 3Ph-version)

• ALDIFF, this binary output has logical value one whenever differential currentsupervision algorithm operates (only available in 1Ph-version)

• ALDIFFLx, this binary output has logical value one whenever differentialcurrent supervision algorithm operates in the corresponding phase (onlyavailable in 3Ph-version)

• ALIIN, this binary output has logical value one whenever incoming currentsupervision algorithm operates (only available in 1Ph-version)

• ALIINLx, this binary output has logical value one whenever incoming currentsupervision algorithm operates in the corresponding phase (only available in3Ph-version)



REB 670

• IIN_ZA, this is output which represents internally calculated RMS value of theincoming current. It can be connected to the disturbance recorder function inorder to record it during external and internal faults (only available in 1Ph-version)

• IIN_ZALx, this is output which represents phase wise internally calculated RMSvalue of the incoming current. It can be connected to the disturbance recorderfunction in order to record it during external and internal faults (only availablein 3Ph-version)

• IINRANGE, this is output which represents internally calculated RMS value ofthe incoming current. It can be connected to the measurement expander blockfor value reporting via IEC 61850 (only available in 1Ph-version)

• IINRNGLx, this is output which represents phase wise internally calculated RMSvalue of the incoming current. It can be connected to the measurement expanderblock for value reporting via IEC 61850 (only available in 3Ph-version)

• ID_ZA, this is output which represents internally calculated RMS value of thedifferential current. It can be connected to the disturbance recorder function inorder to record it during external and internal faults (only available in 1Ph-version)

• ID_ZALx, this is output which represents phase wise internally calculated RMSvalue of the differential current. It can be connected to the disturbance recorderfunction in order to record it during external and internal faults (only availablein 3Ph-version)

• IDRANGE, this is output which represents internally calculated RMS value ofthe differential current. It can be connected to the measurement expander blockfor value reporting via IEC 61850 (only available in 1Ph-version)

• IDRNGLx, this is output which represents phase wise internally calculated RMSvalue of the differential current. It can be connected to the measurement expanderblock for value reporting via IEC 61850 (only available in 3Ph-version)

• IDFRMS, this is output which represents internally calculated fundamentalfrequency RMS value of the differential current. It can be connected to thedisturbance recorder function in order to record it during external and internalfaults (only available in 1Ph-version)

• IDFRMSLx, this is output which represents phase wise internally calculatedfundamental frequency RMS value of the differential current. It can be connectedto the disturbance recorder function in order to record it during external andinternal faults (only available in 3Ph-version)

Detailed explanation of Zone function block settings

• Operation, this setting determines whether the zone is in operation or out ofoperation. One of the following two alternatives shall be selected for everyfunction block:



85

1.1. On, when this mode is selected the zone is in operation1.2. Off, when this mode is selected the zone is out of operation

• DiffOperLevel, this setting determines the minimum pickup level for thedifferential feature. It shall be entered directly in primary amperes. Default value1000A.

• DiffTripOut, this setting determines how the trip output from the zone shallbehave. One of the following two alternatives shall be selected for every functionblock:3.1. SelfReset, when this mode is selected the zone TRIP output will reset to

logical value zero after the pre-set time determined by the setting parametertTripHold.

3.2. Latched, when this mode is selected the zone TRIP output will latched andit will require manual re-set command. This reset command can be givenfrom built-in front HMI or via communication links.

• tTripHold, defines the drop-off time for the TRIP signal in the SelfReset modeof operation. Time delay can be set from 0.000s to 60.000s in step of 0.001s.Default value is 0.200s.

• CheckZoneSup, this setting determines whether the BBP zone differentialalgorithm is supervised by the operation of the built-in Check Zone or not. Oneof the following two alternatives shall be selected for every function block:5.1. On, when this mode is selected the zone differential trip is supervised by

the operation of the built-in Check Zone5.2. Off, when this mode is selected the zone differential trip is not supervised

by the operation of the built-in Check Zone• SlowOCTOper, this setting determines operation of the slow OCT algorithm.

One of the following three alternatives shall be selected for every function block:6.1. Off, when this mode is selected the slow OCT feature is completely disabled6.2. Block, when this mode is selected the operation of the slow OCT feature

completely blocks the operation of the differential protection. It shall benoted that this blocking is selective (i.e. zone and phase wise)

6.3. Supervise, when this mode is selected the operation of the slow OCT featureonly supervises the operation of the differential protection. As soon asdifferential current is bigger than the pre-set level determined by the settingparameter OCTReleaseLev the differential function will be again allowedto operate.

• FastOCTOper, this setting determines operation of the fast OCT algorithm. Oneof the following three alternatives shall be selected for every function block:7.1. Off, when this mode is selected the fast OCT feature is completely disabled7.2. Block, when this mode is selected the operation of the fast OCT feature

completely blocks the operation of the differential protection. It shall benoted that this blocking is selective (i.e. zone and phase wise)

7.3. Supervise, when this mode is selected the operation of the fast OCT featureonly supervises the operation of the differential protection. As soon asdifferential current is bigger than the pre-set level determined by the settingparameter OCTReleaseLev the differential function will be again allowedto operate.



REB 670

• OCTOperLevel, this setting determines the minimum pickup level for the slowand fast OCT feature. It shall be entered directly in primary amperes. Defaultvalue 200A.

• tSlowOCT, this delay on pickup timer is used in order to delay the action of theslow OCT algorithm. Time delay can be set from 0.00s to 6000.00s in step of0.01s. Default value is 20.00s.

• OCTReleaseLev, this setting determines the differential current level abovewhich the OCT feature will again allow the differential protection operation,when OCT feature is used in the Supervise mode of the operation. It shall beentered directly in primary amperes. Default value 2500A.

• IdAlarmLev, this setting determines the differential current level above whichthe alarm is given after the pre-set time determined by the parameter settingtIdAlarm. It shall be entered directly in primary amperes. Default value 200A.

• tIdAlarm, this delay on pickup timer is used in order to delay the action of thedifferential alarm feature. Time delay can be set from 0.00s to 6000.00s in stepof 0.01s. Default value is 30.00s.

• IinAlarmLev, this setting determines the incoming current level (bus through-going current level) above which the alarm is given instantaneously. It shall beentered directly in primary amperes. Default value 3000A.

• SensDiffOper, this setting determines operation of the sensitive differentialalgorithm. One of the following two alternatives shall be selected for everyfunction block:14.1. On, when this mode is selected the sensitive differential algorithm is in

operation. Please note that the input signal ENSENS as well must havelogical value one in order to get operation from the sensitive differentialalgorithm

14.2. Off, when this mode is selected the sensitive differential algorithm is outof operation

• SensOperLevel, this setting determines the minimum pickup level for thesensitive differential algorithm. It shall be entered directly in primary amperes.Default value 200A.

• SensIinBlock, this setting determines the incoming current level (bus through-going current level) above which the sensitive differential algorithm isautomatically blocked. It shall be entered directly in primary amperes. Defaultvalue 1000A.

• tSensDiff this delay on pickup timer is used in order to delay the action of thesensitive differential algorithm. Time delay can be set from 0.000s to 60.000s instep of 0.001s. Default value is 0.400s.



87


en06000159.vsd

BZNTPDIF_87BBTZA-

BLOCKBLKSTTRZONERSTTRIPRSTOCTENSENS

TRIPTRIPL1TRIPL2TRIPL3

TREXTBAYTREXTZ

TRSENSL1TRSENSL2TRSENSL3

OCTSOCTL1SOCTL2SOCTL3FOCTL1FOCTL2FOCTL3

ALDIFFL1ALDIFFL2ALDIFFL3

ALIINL1ALIINL2ALIINL3

IIN_ZAL1IINRNGL1IIN_ZAL2

IINRNGL2IIN_ZAL3

IINRNGL3ID_ZAL1

IDRNGL1ID_ZAL2

IDRNGL2ID_ZAL3

IDRNGL3IDFRMSL1IDFRMSL2IDFRMSL3

Figure 41: BTZA function block (Differential Zone A, 3ph). Also applicable forDifferential Zone B, 3ph.

en06000160.vsd

BZNSPDIF_87BBSZA-

BLOCKBLKSTTRZONERSTTRIPRSTOCTENSENS

TRIPTRIPLX

TREXTBAYTREXTZTRSENS

OCTSOCTFOCT

ALDIFFALIIN

IIN_ZAIINRANGE

ID_ZAIDRANGE

IDFRMS

Figure 42: BSZA function block (Differential Zone A, 1ph). Also applicable forDifferential Zone B, 1ph.



REB 670


Table 48: Input signals for the BTZNPDIF_87B (BTZA-) function block

Signal DescriptionBLOCK Block zone trip

BLKST Block differential protection start

TRZONE External zone trip

RSTTRIP Reset latched zone trip

RSTOCT Reset open CT alarm

ENSENS Enable Sensitive Differential Protection

Table 49: Output signals for the BZNTPDIF_87B (BTZA-) function block

Signal DescriptionTRIP Zone general trip

TRIPL1 Differential trip phase L1



TREXTBAY Zone trip due to external trip from one of connected bays

TREXTZ Zone trip due to external input signal

TRSENSL1 Sensitive differential function trip phase L1



OCT General open CT alarm

SOCTL1 Open CT alarm from slow algorithm in phase L1



FOCTL1 Open CT alarm from fast algorithm in phase L1



ALDIFFL1 Differential current alarm in phase L1



ALIINL1 Incoming current alarm in phase L1



IIN_ZAL1 RMS incoming current L1, instantaneous value

IINRNGL1 RMS incoming current L1, range

IIN_ZAL2 RMS incoming current L2, instantaneous value





89

Signal DescriptionIIN_ZAL3 RMS incoming current L3, instantaneous value


ID_ZAL1 RMS differential current, instantaneous value

IDRNGL1 RMS differential current, range





IDFRMSL1 Fundamental Frequency Differential current



Table 50: Input signals for the BSZNPDIF_87B (BSZA-) function block

Signal DescriptionBLOCK Block zone trip

BLKST Block differential protection start

TRZONE External zone trip

RSTTRIP Reset latched zone trip

RSTOCT Reset open CT alarm

ENSENS Enable Sensitive Differential Protection

Table 51: Output signals for the BZNSPDIF_87B (BSZA-) function block

Signal DescriptionTRIP Zone general trip

TRIPLX Differential trip output

TREXTBAY Zone trip due to external trip from one of connected bays

TREXTZ Zone trip due to external input signal

TRSENS Sensitive differential function trip

OCT General open CT alarm

SOCT Open CT alarm from slow algorithm

FOCT Open CT alarm from fast algorithm

ALDIFF Differential current alarm

ALIIN Incoming current alarm

IIN_ZA RMS incoming current, magnitude of instantaneous value

IINRANGE RMS incoming current, range

ID_ZA RMS differential current, magnitude of instantaneous value

IDRANGE RMS differential current, range

IDFRMS Fundamental Frequency Differential current



REB 670


All general settings for busbar differential protection are only relevant for properevent reporting via IEC 61850-8-1. They are not important for proper operation ofbusbar differential protection.

However, please note that all settings for busbar protection under relevant parametersetting group are directly related to proper operation of the busbar differentialprotection.

Table 52: General settings for the BTZNPDIF_87B (BTZA-) function

Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionIINL1 db 0 - 300 1 10 s,%,

%sDeadband value in % ofrange (in %s if integral isused)

IINL1 zeroDb 0 - 100000 1 500 - Values less than this areforced to zero in 0,001%of range

IINL1 hhLim 0.000 -10000000000.000

0.001 5000.000 - High High limit

IINL1 hLim 0.000 -10000000000.000

0.001 3000.000 - High limit

IINL1 lLim 0.000 -10000000000.000

0.001 100.000 - Low limit

IINL1 llLim 0.000 -10000000000.000

0.001 50.000 - Low Low limit

IINL1 min 0.000 -10000000000.000

0.001 25.000 - Minimum value

IINL1 max 0.000 -10000000000.000

0.001 6000.000 - Maximum value

IINL1 dbType CyclicDead bandInt deadband

- Dead band - Reporting type (0=cyclic,1=db, 2=integral db)

IINL1 limHys 0.000 - 100.000 0.001 5.000 - Hysteresis value in % ofrange and is common forall limits

IINL2 db 0 - 300 1 10 s,%,%s

Deadband value in % ofrange (in %s if integral isused)


IINL2 L2hhLim 0.000 -10000000000.000


IINL2 hLim 0.000 -10000000000.000

0.001 3000.000 - High limit

IINL2 lLim 0.000 -10000000000.000

0.001 100.000 - Low limit

IINL2 llLim 0.000 -10000000000.000

0.001 50.000 - Low Low limit




91

Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionIINL2 min 0.000 -

10000000000.0000.001 25.000 - Minimum value

IINL2 max 0.000 -10000000000.000





IINL3 db 0 - 300 1 10 s,%,%s



IINL3 hhLim 0.000 -10000000000.000


IINL3 hLim 0.000 -10000000000.000

0.001 3000.000 - High limit

IINL3 lLim 0.000 -10000000000.000

0.001 100.00 - Low limit

IINL3 llLim 0.000 -10000000000.000

0.001 50.000 - Low Low limit

IINL3 min 0.000 -10000000000.000


IINL3 max 0.000 -10000000000.000





IDL1 db 0 - 300 1 10 s,%,%s


IDL1 zeroDb 0 - 100000 1 500 - Values less than this areforced to zero in 0,001%of range

IDL1 hhLim 0.000 -10000000000.000


IDL1 hLim 0.000 -10000000000.000

0.001 3000.000 - High limit

IDL1 lLim 0.000 -10000000000.000

0.001 100.000 - Low limit

IDL1 llLim 0.000 -10000000000.000

0.001 50.000 - Low Low limit

IDL1 min 0.000 -10000000000.000





REB 670

Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionIDL1 max 0.000 -

10000000000.0000.001 6000.000 - Maximum value

IDL1 dbType CyclicDead bandInt deadband


IDL1 limHys 0.000 - 100.000 0.001 5.000 - Hysteresis value in % ofrange and is common forall limits

IDL2 db 0 - 300 1 10 s,%,%s



IDL2 hhLim 0.000 -10000000000.000


IDL2 hLim 0.000 -10000000000.000

0.001 3000.000 - High limit

IDL2 lLim 0.000 -10000000000.000

0.001 100.000 - Low limit

IDL2 llLim 0.000 -10000000000.000

0.001 50.000 - Low Low limit

IDL2 min 0.000 -10000000000.000


IDL2 max 0.000 -10000000000.000





IDL3 db 0 - 300 1 10 s,%,%s



IDL3 hhLim 0.000 -10000000000.000


IDL3 hLim 0.000 -10000000000.000

0.001 3000.000 - High limit

IDL3 lLim 0.000 -10000000000.000

0.001 100.000 - Low limit

IDL3 llLim 0.000 -10000000000.000

0.001 50.000 - Low Low limit

IDL3 min 0.000 -10000000000.000





93

Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionIDL3 max 0.000 -

10000000000.0000.001 6000.000 - Maximum value




Table 53: Parameter group settings for the BTZNPDIF_87B (BTZA-) function


On- Off - Differential protection

operation

DiffOperLev 1 - 99999 1 1000 A Differential protectionoperation level inprimary amperes

DiffTripOut SelfResetLatched

- SelfReset - Differential protectiontrip output mode

tTripHold 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.200 s Differential trip drop-off delay in SelfResetmode

CheckZoneSup OffOn

- Off - Check zonesupervises differentialprotection operation

SlowOCTOper OffBlockSupervise

- Block - Operation of slowopen CT alarm

FastOCTOper OffBlockSupervise

- Block - Operation of fast openCT alarm

OCTOperLev 1 - 99999 1 200 A Open CT operationlevel in primaryamperes

tSlowOCT 0.00 - 6000.00 0.01 20.00 s Time delay for slowopen CT alarm

OCTReleaseLev 1 - 99999 1 2500 A Id level above whichOCT alarm releasesin supervision mode

IdAlarmLev 1 - 99999 1 200 A Differential currentalarm level in primaryamperes

tIdAlarm 0.00 - 6000.00 0.01 30.00 s Time delay forDifferential CurrentAlarm Level in sec.

IinAlarmLev 1 - 99999 1 3000 A Incoming currentalarm level in primaryamperes

SensDiffOper OffOn

- Off - Sensitive differentialprotection operation




REB 670

Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionSensOperLev 1 - 99999 1 200 A Sensitive differential

operation level inprimary amperes

SensIinBlock 1 - 99999 1 1000 A Iin level above whichsensitive diffprotection is blocked

tSensDiff 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.400 s Time delay forsensitive differentialfunction operation

Table 54: General settings for the BSZNPDIF_87B (BSZA-) function

Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionIIN db 0 - 300 1 10 s,%,

%sDeadband value in %of range (in %s ifintegral is used)

IIN zeroDb 0 - 100000 1 500 - Values less than thisare forced to zero in0,001% of range

IIN hhLim 0.000 -10000000000.000


IIN hLim 0.000 -10000000000.000

0.001 3000.000 - High limit

IIN lLim 0.000 -10000000000.000

0.001 100.000 - Low limit

IIN llLim 0.000 -10000000000.000

0.001 50.000 - Low Low limit

IIN min 0.000 -10000000000.000


IIN max 0.000 -10000000000.000


IIN dbType CyclicDead bandInt deadband

- Dead band - Reporting type(0=cyclic, 1=db,2=integral db)

IIN limHys 0.000 - 100.000 0.001 5.000 - Hysteresis value in %of range and iscommon for all limits

ID db 0 - 300 1 10 s,%,%s

Deadband value in %of range (in %s ifintegral is used)

ID zeroDb 0 - 100000 1 500 - Values less than thisare forced to zero in0,001% of range

ID hhLim 0.000 -10000000000.000


ID hLim 0.000 -10000000000.000

0.001 3000.000 - High limit

ID lLim 0.000 -10000000000.000

0.001 100.000 - Low limit




95

Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionID llLim 0.000 -

10000000000.0000.001 50.000 - Low Low limit

ID min 0.000 -10000000000.000


ID max 0.000 -10000000000.000


ID dbType CyclicDead bandInt deadband


ID limHys 0.000 - 100.000 0.001 5.000 - Hysteresis value in %of range and iscommon for all limits

Table 55: Parameter group settings for the BSZNPDIF_87B (BSZA-) function


On- Off - Differential protection

operation

DiffOperLev 1 - 99999 1 1000 A Differential protectionoperation level inprimary amperes

DiffTripOut SelfResetLatched

- SelfReset - Differential protectiontrip output mode

tTripHold 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.200 s Differential trip drop-off delay in SelfResetmode

CheckZoneSup OffOn

- Off - Check zonesupervises differentialprotection operation

SlowOCTOper OffBlockSupervise

- Block - Operation of slowopen CT alarm

FastOCTOper OffBlockSupervise

- Block - Operation of fast openCT alarm

OCTOperLev 1 - 99999 1 200 A Open CT operationlevel in primaryamperes

tSlowOCT 0.00 - 6000.00 0.01 20.000 s Time delay for slowopen CT alarm

OCTReleaseLev 1 - 99999 1 2500 A Id level above whichOCT alarm releasesin supervision mode

IdAlarmLev 1 - 99999 1 200 A Differential currentalarm level in primaryamperes

tIdAlarm 0.00 - 6000.00 0.01 30.000 s Time delay forDifferential CurrentAlarm Level in sec.

IinAlarmLev 1 - 99999 1 3000 A Incoming currentalarm level in primaryamperes




REB 670

Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionSensDiffOper Off

On- Off - Sensitive differential

protection operation

SensOperLev 1 - 99999 1 200 A Sensitive differentialoperation level inprimary amperes

SensIinBlock 1 - 99999 1 1000 A Iin level above whichsensitive diff.protection is blocked

tSensDiff 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.400 s Time delay forsensitive differentialfunction operation

4.1.5 Calculation principles

4.1.5.1 General

The calculation of relevant quantities from the CT input values are performed by REB670 and passed to the differential function and open CT algorithm for furtherprocessing.

These calculations are completely phase-segregated therefore they will be explainedfor one phase only. Calculations for other two phases are done in exactly the sameway.

The pre-requests for correct calculations are:

• Sampling of all analogue current inputs have to be done simultaneously• Current samples have to be in primary amps• All currents connected to the zone have to be measured with same reference

direction (i.e. all towards the zone or all from the zone).

First the instantaneous differential current is calculated as absolute value of the sumof all currents connected to the protection zone:

id ijj 1=

N

å=

(Equation 1)

Where:

id instantaneous differential current (calculated from raw samples)

N total number of bays connected to the protection zone

ij instantaneous current value (i.e. latest sample value) for bay j

Then only the sum of all latest current samples with positive value is made:



97

SP ij

M

å=

j 1= (Equation 2)

Where:

M number of bays with positive value of the latest current sample (M<N)

as well as the absolute value of the sum of all latest negative current samples:

SN ij

N

å=

j M+1= (Equation 3)

Now the instantaneous incoming and outgoing currents are calculated as follows:

iin = max {SP,SN}

iout = min {SP, SN}

All these quantities are calculated for every set of samples (i.e. 20 times in one powersystem cycle in REB 670). It should be noted that all three quantities (i.e. iin, iout &id) will be of a “DC” nature in time (i.e. these quantities can only be positive). Thismeans that the instantaneous incoming current during normal load condition lookslike as the output of the full wave rectifier. It shall be noted that iin is always biggerthan or equal to iout.

Figure 43 shows the comparison between above calculated quantities and REB 103(or RADSS) design:



REB 670

Z1 RZ2 TMZAR

SR

RD11

N

DR

TMDUd3

US

RD3

IR2

IR1

D2

3T inI i»

1d dI i»

L o u tI i»Z1

en06000134.vsd

Figure 43: Comparison between iin, iout and id quantities inside REB 670terminal and REB 103 (or RADSS) analogue design

Where:

iout instantaneous outgoing current from the zone of protection (calculated from raw samples)

id instantaneous differential current (calculated from raw samples)

iin instantaneous incoming current into the zone of protection (calculated from raw samples)

This practically means that any differential protection zone in REB 670 terminal canbe represented as shown in figure 44, regardless the number of the connected feeders.

DifferentialProtection Zone

iin

id

iout

en04000229.vsd

Figure 44: Differential zone representation inside REB 670 terminal.

The instantaneous quantities are constantly changing in time, therefore RMS valuesof the incoming, outgoing and differential currents (i.e. Iin, Iout and Id respectively)are used in the algorithm as well. These quantities are calculated over last powersystem cycle (i.e. 20ms long, moving window for 50Hz system). The onlyrequirement for this type of calculation is that the last twenty samples of theinstantaneous quantity must be stored in the terminal internal memory. The calculatedvalues of Iin and Id are available as service values on the built-in HMI.

When all six values (i.e. iin, iout, id, Iin, Iout and Id) are calculated, they are passedfurther to the general differential protection function & open CT algorithm for furtherprocessing to the differential and open CT algorithms.



99

CT saturationDifferential relays do not measure directly the primary currents in the high voltageconductors, but the secondary currents of magnetic core current transformers, whichare installed in all high-voltage bays. Because the current transformer is a non-linearmeasuring device, under high current conditions in the primary CT circuit, thesecondary CT current can be drastically different from the original primary current.This is caused by CT saturation, a phenomenon that is well known to protectionengineers. This phenomenon is especially relevant for bus differential protectionapplications, because it has the tendency to cause unwanted operation of thedifferential relay.

Another difficulty is the large number of main CTs (i.e. up to 24x3 for REB 670 singlephase and up to 8x3 CTs for REB 670 three phase version) which can be connectedto the differential relay. If the CT saturation have to be checked and preventivemeasures taken for every HV CT connected to the protection zone on one-by-onebasis, the differential relay algorithm would be slow and quite complex. Therefore inREB 670 design only the properties of incoming, outgoing and differential currentsare used in order to cope with CT saturation of any main CT connected to REB 670terminal as shown in see figure 45.

Id_modCT saturation compensation logic

Iout

Iin

Id

id

iin

iout

en01000148.vsd

Figure 45: CT saturation compensation logic inside REB 670 terminal

This CT saturation compensation logic effectively suppress the false differentialcurrent by looking into properties of the six input quantities. Output of the logic ismodified RMS value of the differential current Id_mod which has quite small valueduring external faults followed by CT saturation or full Id value in case of an internalfault.



REB 670

This logic incorporate a memory feature as well in order to cope with full CTremanence in the faulty overhead line bay in case of a high speed autoreclosing ontopermanent fault.

By this approach a new, patented differential algorithm has been formed which iscompletely stable for all external faults and operates very fast in case of an internalfault. All problems caused by the non-linearity of the CTs are solved in an innovativenumerical way on the basic principles described above.

Tripping criteriaIn order to provide reliable but fast differential protection, a multiple tripping criteriais implemented in general differential protection function.

The main tripping criterias can be listed as follows:

• Minimum differential current level (Id >DiffOperLev)• RMS tripping criteria (Id_mod >0.53 * Iin)• Instantaneous tripping criteria based only on properties of iin, iout and id• No pick-up of the Block binary input• No operation of open CT algorithm• Sensitive differential current level (Id>SensOperLev) which can be enable or

disable.• Check zone differential operation can also supervise the trip output signal. This

feature can be enable or disabled.

These tripping conditions are then arranged in an AND gate in order to provide finaltrip signal to the binary output contacts of the terminal.

The trip from differential zone can be either latched or self rest in accordance withend user settings. Figure 46 shows the simplified internal trip logic for BBP.



101

en06000072.vsd

Id

Iin

ZA Diff Algorithm

CheckZoneSup = Off

CZTrip OR

BLOCK

RSTTRIP

Operation = On

DiffTripOper = Latched

ANDAND S

R

OR TRIP

AND ttTripHold

AND

AND

BLKST

SensDiffOper = OnENSENS

t3sIin a>ba

bSensIinBlock

Id a>babSensOperLevel

ttSensDiff

TRSENSAND

TRZONEtripZoneA from Bay01tripZoneA from Bay02

tripZoneA from Baynn

OR

TREXTZ

TREXTBAY

OR

OR

OROCTBlock AND

ZATrip-cont.

. . .

OR TRIPLX

Figure 46: Simplified Zone internal trip logic for one phase.

Dual monitoring of differential protection status is available. The first monitoringfeature operates after settable time delay when differential current is higher than theuser settable level. This feature can for example be used to design automatic resetlogic for previously described open CT detection feature. The second monitoringfeature operates immediately when the busbar through-going current is bigger thanthe user settable level. Both of these monitoring features are phase segregated andthey give out binary signals, which can be either used to trigger disturbance recorderor for alarming purposes.



REB 670

en06000071.vsd

IdAlarmLeva>b

ab

t tIdAlarm

ALDIFF

ALIIN

Id

Iin a>babIinAlarmLev

Figure 47: Simplified logic for Zone supervision features

4.1.5.2 Open CT detection

The three input quantities into the open CT detection algorithm are:

• Id = RMS value of the differential current• Iin = RMS value of the incoming current• Iout = RMS value of the outgoing current

It shall be noted that the open CT detection algorithm does not know the number ofconnected CT inputs into the REB 670 terminal.

The open CT detection algorithm is completely phase-segregated. Therefore it willbe explained for one phase only.

Fast operating open CT detection logic will instantly detect the moment when anhealthy CT secondary circuit carrying the load current is accidently opened (i.e.current interrupted to the differential relay). The logic is based on the perception thatthe total busbar through-load current is the same before and after that CT is opencircuited.

In order to prevent false operation of this logic in case of a fault or disturbance in thepower system, the total through-load current must not have big changes three secondsbefore the open CT condition is detected.

When one CT secondary circuit is open circuited during normal through-loadcondition one measuring point is lost and therefore the following should hold true:

• values of Iin and Iout were equal one cycle before• value of Iin remains constant (i.e. unchanged)• value of Iout drops for more than pre-set value of OCTOperLev• value of Id rises for more than pre-set value of OCTOperLev• value of the sum Iout + Id is equal to value of Iin one cycle before

When all above conditions are simultaneously detected open CT condition is declared,the trip output of the affected phase is blocked and alarm output is set

It shall be noted that this logic can only detect an instant of time when an alreadyconnected CT with the secondary load current is open circuited. This logic will not



103

detect for example the situation when a new bay is connected to the differential zone,but its CT secondary circuits are short circuited or open circuited.

Slow operating open CT detection logic will detect most abnormalities in the CTsecondary circuits or in the Zone Selection logic, but with the time delay determinedby setting parameter tSlowOCT. The logic is based on the perception that the valuesof Iin and Iout shall be equal during normal through-load situation.

This logic will operate when:

• there was not any big through-load current change during last five seconds• value of Iin is much bigger than value of Iout (0.9·Iin > Iout)• Id > OCTOperLevel

When these conditions are fulfilled for longer than time defined by the tSlowOCTparameter, the open CT condition is declared.

en06000074.vsd

Slow OCT Algorithm

Id a>babOCTOperLevel

&

SlowOCTOper=Off

Fast OCT Algorithm

Id a>babOCTOperLevel

FastOCTOper=Off

ttSlowOCT

SOCT& S

R

FOCT& S

R

RSTOCT&

&

Id a>babOCTReleaseLev

FastOCTOper=Supervise &

Id a>babOCTReleaseLev

SlowOCTOper=Supervise &

Id a>babDiffOperLevel

³1 &

³1

OCT

OCTBlock-cont.

100ms

Figure 48: Simplified internal logic for fast and slow OCT features



REB 670

4.1.6 Check zone (PDIF, 87B)For busbar protection in double busbar stations when dynamic zone selection isneeded, it is sometimes required to include the overall differential zone (i.e. checkzone). Hence, the built-in, overall check zone is available in REB 670. Because thebuilt-in check zone current measurement is not dependent on the disconnector status,this feature ensures stability of the busbar differential protection even for completelywrong status indication from the busbar disconnectors. It shall be noted that theoverall check zone, only supervise the usual differential protection operation. Theexternal trip commands, breaker failure backup-trip commands and sensitivedifferential protection operation is not supervised by the overall check zone.

The overall check zone in REB 670 has simple current operating algorithm, whichensures check zone operation for all internal faults regardless the fault currentdistribution. In order to achieve this the outgoing current from the overall check zoneis used as restraint quantity. If required, the check zone operation can be activatedexternally by a binary signal.

Operating characteristic of the check zone is shown in figure 49.

en06000062.vsd

Oper Levels=0.0-0.90 (settable)

Iout [Primary Amps]

I d [P

rimar

y A

mps

]

Operateregion

Figure 49: Check zone operating characteristic

4.1.6.1 Explanation of Check zone function block

Detailed explanation of Check Zone function block inputs

• EXTTRIP, when this binary input has logical value one, operation of the checkzone will be forced (i.e. TRIP output signal set to one). Therefore this signal can



105

be used to connect other release criteria (e.g. start signal from externalundervoltage relay)

Detailed explanation of Check Zone function block outputs

• TRIP, this binary output shall be used as general trip command from the checkzone. It will be activated when either differential protection in check zoneoperates or when external signal EXTTRIP is set one.

• TRLx, this binary output has logical value one whenever check zone TRIP outputsignal is initiated by operation of the differential protection in the correspondingphase (only available in 3Ph-version)

Detailed explanation of Check Zone function block settings

• Operation, this setting determines whether the check zone is in operation or outof operation. One of the following two alternatives shall be selected for everyfunction block:1.1. On, when this mode is selected the check zone is enabled1.2. Off, when this mode is selected the check zone is out of operation

• OperLevel, this setting determines the minimum pickup level for the check zone.It shall be entered directly in primary amperes. Default value 1000A.

• Slope, this setting determines the slope of the check zone operating characteristic.It can be set from 0.00 to 0.90 in step of 0.01. Default value 0.15.

Check zone uses simple differential algorithm. Outgoing current is used forrestraining in order to insume check zone operation for all internal faults.

en06000073.vsd

Id

Iout

CZ Diff Algorithm

Operation = On

EXTTRIP

Operation = Off

³1 &

³1

TRIP

CZTrip-cont.

Figure 50: Simplified Check zone internal logic



REB 670


en06000161.vsd

BCZTPDIF_87BBTCZ-

EXTTRIP TRIPTRL1TRL2TRL3

Figure 51: BTCZ function block (Check zone, 3ph)

en06000162.vsd

BCZSPDIF_87BBSCZ-

EXTTRIP TRIP

Figure 52: BSCZ function block (Check zone, 1ph)


Table 56: Input signals for the BTCZPDIF_87B (BTCZ-) function block

Signal DescriptionEXTTRIP External check zone trip

Table 57: Output signals for the BCZTPDIF_87B (BTCZ-) function block

Signal DescriptionTRIP Check zone general trip

TRL1 Check zone trip phase L1



Table 58: Input signals for the BSCZPDIF_87B (BSCZ-) function block

Signal DescriptionEXTTRIP External check zone trip

Table 59: Output signals for the BCZSPDIF_87B (BSCZ-) function block

Signal DescriptionTRIP Check zone general trip



107


Table 60: Parameter group settings for the BTCZPDIF_87B (BTCZ-) function


On- Off - Check zone operation

OperLevel 1 - 99999 1 1000 A Check zone operationlevel in primaryamperes

Slope 0.00 - 0.90 0.01 0.15 - Check zone slope

Table 61: Parameter group settings for the BSCZPDIF_87B (BSCZ-) function


On- Off - Check zone operation

OperLevel 0 - 99999 1 1000 A Check zone operationlevel in primaryamperes

Slope 0.00 - 0.90 0.01 0.15 - Check zone slope

4.1.7 Zone selectionTypically CT secondary circuits from every bay in the station are connected to thebusbar protection. The built-in software feature called “Zone Selection” gives asimple but efficient control over the connected CTs to busbar protection IED in orderto provide fully operational differential protection scheme for multi-zone applicationson both small and large buses.

Flexible, software based dynamic Zone Selection enables easy and fast adaptation tothe most common substation arrangements such as single busbar with or withouttransfer bus, double busbar with or without transfer bus, one-and-a-half breakerstations, double busbar-double breaker stations, ring busbars, etc. The software baseddynamic Zone Selections ensures:

1. Dynamic linking of measured CT currents to the appropriate differentialprotection zone as required by substation topology

2. Efficient merging of the two differential zones when required by substationtopology (i.e. zone interconnection)

3. Selective operation of busbar differential protection to ensure tripping only ofcircuit breakers connected to the faulty zone

4. Correct marshaling of backup-trip commands from internally integrated orexternal circuit breaker failure protections to all surrounding circuit breakers

5. Easy incorporation of bus-section and/or bus-coupler bays (i.e. tie-breakers) withone or two sets of CTs into the protection scheme

6. Disconnector and/or circuit breaker status supervision



REB 670

Zone Selection logic accompanied by optionally available end-fault and/or circuitbreaker failure protections ensure minimum possible tripping time and selectivity forfaults within the blind spot or the end zone between main CT and affiliated circuitbreaker. Therefore REB 670 offers best possible coverage for such faults in feederand bus-section/bus-coupler bays.

The Zone Selection functionality consists of the following function blocks:

• Switch Status, for monitoring of disconnector/circuit breaker status• Bay, which provide all necessary interface for one primary bay to/from busbar

protection• Zone Interconnection, which offer facility to effectively merge two zones when

required

4.1.8 Switch status monitoringFor stations with complex primary layout (i.e. double busbar single breaker stationwith or without transfer bus) the information about busbar disconnector position inevery bay is crucial information for busbar protection. The positions of thesedisconnectors then actually determine which CT input (i.e. bay) is connected to whichdifferential protection zone. For some more advanced features like end-fault or blind-spot protection the actual status of the circuit breaker in some or even all bays can bevital information for busbar protection as well. The switch function block is used inREB 670 to take the status of two auxiliary contacts from the primary device, evaluatethem and then to deliver the device primary contact position to the rest of the zoneselection logic.

For such applications typically two auxiliary contacts (i.e. normally open andnormally closed auxiliary contacts) from each relevant primary switching object shallbe connected to the IED. Then the status for every individual primary switching objectwill be determined. In REB 670 dedicated function block for each primary switchingobject is available in order to determine the status of the object primary contacts. Bya parameter setting one of the following two logical schemes can be selected for eachprimary object individually by the end user:

• If not open then closed (i.e. as in RADSS schemes)

• Open or closed only when clearly indicated by aux contact status (i.e. as in INXschemes)

Table62 gives quick overview about both schemes

It shall be noted that the first scheme only requires fast breaking normally closedauxiliary contact (i.e. b contact) for proper operation. The timing of normally openauxiliary contact is not critical because it is only used for supervision of the primaryobject status. The second scheme in addition requires properly timed-adjusted, early-making normally open auxiliary contact (i.e. early making a contact) for properoperation.



109

Regardless which scheme is used the time-delayed disconnector/circuit breaker statussupervision alarm is available (i.e. 00 or 11 auxiliary contact status). How twointegrated differential protection zones behave when disconnector alarm appears isfreely configurable by the end user.

It is as well possible by a parameter setting to override the primary object status aseither permanently open or permanently closed. This feature can be useful duringtesting, installation and commissioning of the busbar protection scheme. At the sametime, separate alarm is given to indicate that the actual object status is overwritten bya setting parameter.

It shall be noted that it is as well possible to use only normally closed auxiliarycontacts for Zone Selection logic. In that case the Switch function blocks are not usedat all.

Table 62: Treatment of primary object auxiliary contact status within BBP in REB 670

Primary equipment Status in BBP Alarm facilityNormally Openauxiliary contactstatus(i.e. “closed” or“a” contact)

Normally Closedauxiliary contactstatus(i.e. “open” or “b”contact)

when“Scheme 1RADSS”is selected

when“Scheme 2 INX”is selected

Alarm aftersettable timedelay

Informationvisible onbuilt-in frontHMI

open open closed Last positionsaved

yes intermediate_00

open

closed open open no open

closed

open closed closed no closed

closed closed closed closed yes badState_11

4.1.8.1 Explanation of Switch status monitoring function block

Detailed explanation of Switch status monitoring function block inputs

• DISABLE, when this binary input has logical value zero function works inaccordance with the selected scheme (see setting OperMode). When this binaryinput has logical value one, OPEN and CLOSED outputs from the function areunconditionally set to logical value zero. All other outputs work as usual.

• NO, to this binary input normally open (i.e. ”closed” or “a” contact) of theprimary switching object shall be connected

• NC, to this binary input normally closed (i.e. ”OPEN” or “b” contact) of theprimary switching object shall be connected



REB 670

Detailed explanation of Switch status monitoring function block outputs

• CLOSED, this binary output has logical value one when the internal logicdetermines that the primary object is closed (see table 62 for more info aboutavailable logical schemes)

• OPEN, this binary output has logical value one when the internal logicdetermines that the primary object is open (see table 62 for more info aboutavailable logical schemes)

• ALARM, this binary output has logical value one when pre-set timer set undersetting tAlarm expires and the auxiliary contacts still have illegal status (i.e. 00or 11)

• FORCED, this binary output has logical value zero when the object status isforced via parameter setting OperMode

Detailed explanation of Switch status monitoring function block settings

• SwitchName, this setting is only a string with user definable free, descriptive textto designate particular primary switching object in the station in order to makeeasier identification of the relevant primary object in the SwitchgearStatus matrixon the built-in HMI. The string can be up to thirteen characters long.

• OperMode, this setting determines the operating logic used within the functionblock. One of the following five alternatives shall be selected for every functionblock2.1. Off, when this mode is selected the entire function block is switched off

(i.e. de-activated)2.2. Scheme1_RADSS, when this mode is selected the internal logic behaves as

described in table 62/row 3. It shall be noted that this logical scheme hasthe minimal requirements regarding the auxiliary contacts timing. It isrecommended scheme to be used, especially to determine the circuitbreaker status

2.3. Scheme2_INX, when this mode is selected the internal logic behaves asdescribed in table 62/row 4. It shall be noted that this logical scheme hasincreased requirements regarding the auxiliary contacts timing, especiallyfor normally open (i.e. a contact), as explained intable 62.

2.4. ForceOpen, when this mode is selected the internal logic consider theprimary object as open regardless the status of the auxiliary contacts.However it shall be noted that ALARM output will still work as usual andthat FORCED binary output will be unconditionally set to one

2.5. ForceClosed, when this mode is selected the internal logic consider theprimary object as closed regardless the actual status of the auxiliarycontacts. However it shall be noted that ALARM output will still work asusual and that FORCED binary output will be unconditionally set to one

• tAlarm, this delay on pickup timer is used in order to give an alarm output whenillegal status of auxiliary input contacts (i.e. 00 or 11) is given to the function.Timer can be set from 0.00s to 6000.00s in step of 0.01s. Default value is 15.00s.



111


SWSGGIO_87BSS01-

DISABLENONC

CLOSEDOPEN

ALARMFORCED

en06000163.vsd

Figure 53: SS function block


Table 63: Input signals for the SWSGGIO_87B (SS01-) function block

Signal DescriptionDISABLE OPEN & CLOSED outputs are both set unconditionally to zero

NO Connect normally open auxiliary contact (a contact) here

NC Connect normally closed auxiliary contact (b contact) here

Table 64: Output signals for the SWSGGIO_87B (SS01-) function block

Signal DescriptionCLOSED Indicates that primary object is closed

OPEN Indicates that primary object is open

ALARM Delayed alarm for abnormal aux. contact status, 00 or 11

FORCED Primary object status forced to open or closed by setting


Table 65: General settings for the SWSGGIO_87B (SS01-) function

Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionSwitchName 0 - 13 1 Switch# - User defined name for

switch

Table 66: Parameter group settings for the SWSGGIO_87B (SS01-) function

Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionOperMode Off

Scheme1_RADSSScheme2_INXForceOpenForceClosed

- Off - Switch operatingmode (Scheme 1,Scheme 2 or forced)

tAlarm 0.00 - 6000.00 0.01 15.00 s Alarm time delay forabnormal aux.contact status



REB 670

4.1.9 BayEach CT input into REB 670 is allocated to one dedicated bay function block. Thisfunction block is used to provide complete user interface for all signals from andtowards this bay. It is also used to influence bay measured current.

In order to guarantee proper operation of the IED, the first instanceof Bay function block must always be used in the configuration.

First of all it is possible by a parameter setting CTConnection to connect or disconnectthe CT input to the bay function block. Once the CT input is connected to the bayfunction block this associated current input can be included to or excluded from thetwo internally available differential functions in software. This can be done by aparameter setting for simple station layouts (i.e. one-and-a-half breaker stations) oralternatively via dedicated logical scheme (i.e. double busbar stations). For each baythe end user have to select one of the following five alternatives:

• Permanently connect this bay current to zone A (i.e. ZA)• Permanently connect this bay current to zone B (i.e. ZB)• Permanently connect this bay current to zone A and inverted bay current to ZB

(i.e. ZA and-ZB)• Connect this bay current to ZA or ZB depending on the logical status of the two

input binary signals available on this bay function block. These two input signalswill include measured current to the respective zone when their logical value isone (i.e. CntrlIncludes). This option is used together with above described Switchfunction blocks in order to provide complete Zone Selection logic

• Connect the bay current to ZA or ZB depending on the logical status of the twoinput binary signals available on this bay function block. These two signals willinclude measured current to the respective zone when their logical value is zero(i.e. CntrlExcludes). This option is typically used when only normally closedauxiliary contacts from the busbar disconnector are available to the ZoneSelection logic

At the same time, an additional feature for instantaneous or time delayeddisconnection or even inversion of the connected bay current via separate logicalsignals is also available. This feature is provided in order to facilitate for bus-sectionor bus-coupler CT disconnection for tie-breakers with a CT only on one side of thecircuit breaker. This ensures correct and fast fault clearance of faults between the CTand the circuit breaker within these bays. The same feature can be individually usedin any feeder bay as well in order to optimize busbar differential protectionperformance, when feeder circuit breaker is open. Thus, the end-fault protection forfaults between circuit breaker and the CT is available in REB 670. However to usethis feature circuit breaker auxiliary contacts and closing command to the circuitbreaker shall be wired to the binary inputs of the IED. Therefore REB 670 offers bestpossible coverage for these special faults between CT and circuit breaker in feederand bus-section/bus-coupler bays.



113

Within the Bay function block it is decided by a parameter setting how this bay shouldbehave during zone interconnection (i.e. load transfer). For each bay individually oneof the following three options can be selected:

• Bay current is forced out from both zones during zone interconnection (used forbus-coupler bays)

• Bay current is unconditionally forced into both zones during zoneinterconnection (used in special applications)

• Bay current is connected to both zones during zone interconnection if the baywas previously connected to one of the two zones (typically used for feeder bays)

The third option ensures that the feeder, which is out of service, is not connected toany of the two zones during zone interconnection.

Within the Bay function block it is as well decided by a parameter setting whetherthis bay should be connected to the check zone or not. In this way the end user hassimple control over the bays, which shall be connected to the overall check zone.

By appropriate configuration logic it is possible to take any bay (i.e. CT input) out ofservice. This can be done from the built-in HMI or externally via binary signal. Inthat case all internal current measuring functions (i.e. differential protection, sensitivedifferential protection, check zone, breaker failure protection and overcurrentprotection) are disabled. At the same time, any trip command to this bay circuitbreaker can be inhibited.

Via two dedicated binary input signals it is possible to:

• Trip only the bay circuit breaker (used for integrated OC protection tripping)• Trip the whole differential zone to which this bay is presently connected (used

for backup-trip command from either integrated or external bay circuit breakerfailure protection)

Finally dedicated trip binary output from the Bay function block is available in orderto provide common trip signal to the bay circuit breaker from busbar differentialprotection, breaker failure protection, backup overcurrent protection, etc.

In this way the interface to the user is kept as simple as possible and IED engineeringwork is quite straight forward.

4.1.9.1 Explanation of Bay function block

Detailed explanation of Bay function block inputs

• I3PB1, 3ph CT input; applicable for 3-phase version of the terminal• ISI1, 1ph CT input; applicable for 1-phase version of the terminal• BLKTR, when this binary input has logical value one all trip commands from

the bay function block are prevented including BBP, BFP & external tripcommands



REB 670

• CTRLZA, this binary input is used to control the bay CT connection to thedifferential zone A. However it shall be noted that the status of this binary inputis considered ONLY if the value of setting parameter ZoneSel is either• CtrlIncludes when logical value one of this input will include current to

zone A, or• CtrlExcludes when logical value zero of this input will include current to

zone A• CTRLZB, this binary input is used to control the bay CT connection to the

differential zone B. However it shall be noted that the status of this binary inputis considered ONLY if the value of setting parameter ZoneSel is either• CtrlIncludes when logical value one of this input will include current to

zone B, or• CtrlExcludes when logical value zero of this input will include current to

zone B• ZEROCUR, when this binary input has logical value one the bay CT current will

be unconditionally forced to zero (i.e. internally multiplied with zero) after theinternal delay on pickup timer has expired. The time delay is determined bysetting parameter tZeroCurrent. It shall be noted that the zero current value willbe given to all differential zones, including the check zone, to which this bay iscurrently connected

• INVCUR, when this binary input has logical value one the bay CT current willbe inverted (i.e. internally multiplied with –1) after the internal delay on pickuptimer has expired. The time delay is determined by setting parametertInvertCurrent. It shall be noted that the inverted current value will be given toall differential zones, including the check zone, to which this bay is currentlyconnected. However it shall be noted that the INVCUR input has lower prioritythan ZEROCUR input. This means that when both of them simultaneously havelogical value one and both timers have expired the bay CT current will be forcedto zero!

• TRZONE, when this binary input has logical value one the trip signal will besent to the differential zone to which this bay is currently connected. As aconsequence all bays connected to that zone will receive the trip signal. To thisinput the BFP backup trip command for this bay is typically connected. This willinsure that all breakers connected to the same zone with the failed breaker willbe tripped. It shall be noted that this tripping is not supervised by the Check Zoneoperation, in application where Check Zone is enabled.

• TRBAY, when this binary input has logical value one the output TRIP signalfrom the same function block will be activated. In this way only the bay circuitbreaker will be tripped. No any other breaker in the station will receive this tripcommand. This input shall be used to give backup overcurrent trip command tothe bay CB.

Detailed explanation of Bay function block outputs

• TRIP, this binary output shall be used as dedicated three-phase trip command tothe bay circuit breaker. It will be activated when the differential zone, to whichthis bay is currently connected, operates for internal fault, or in case of breakerfailure in some other bay connected to the same zone (see description for input



115

TRZONE). It will as well operate when external trip signal is given to this bay(see description for input TRBAY).

• CONNZA, this binary output has logical value one whenever this bay CT isconnected to zone A

• CONNZB, this binary output has logical value one whenever this bay CT isconnected to zone B

• CONNBAY, this is not a binary output. It has integer value between 1 and 9 andis used in order to display actual “BayConnections” information on the built-inHMI

Detailed explanation of Bay function block settings

• BAYnn, this setting is only a string with user definable free, descriptive text todesignate particular primary bay in the station in order to make easier bayidentification on the BayConnections matrix on the built-in HMI. The string canbe up to thirteen characters long.

• CTConnection, this setting determines how the hardware CT input is connectedto bay function block in software. One of the following three alternatives shallbe selected for every function block:2.1. NotConnected, when this mode is selected the hardware CT input is

disconnected from the bay function block in software. This setting shall beused for spare CT inputs in REB 670 or for a CT inputs where only forexample BFP protection is required (i.e. for middle breaker in one and halfbreaker configuration)

2.2. Connected, when this mode is selected the hardware CT input is connectedto the bay function block in software. This is normal setting for a CT inputwhich is used for BBP

2.3. Conn Inverted, when this mode is selected the hardware CT input isconnected to the bay function block in software, but the CT current isinverted (i.e. multiplied with –1). This is used only in special applications.

• ZoneSel, this setting determines how the bay CT input connection to thedifferential zones is controlled within REB 670 internal logic. One of the fivealternatives listed below shall be selected for every function block.CtrlIncludes and CtrlExcludes are typically used for feeder bays in doublebusbar-single breaker stations where dynamic connections between CT anddifferential zones is required. It shall be noted that when one of the last two modesare selected and in the same time the operation of the Zone Interconnectionfunction block is set to "On" the zone interconnection (i.e. merging between ZA& ZB) will be automatically started as soon as the bay is connected to both zonessimultaneously (i.e. zone interconnection on a feeder bay).3.1. FixedToZA, when this mode is selected the bay CT input is always

connected to the differential zone A. This is for example used for simplebusbar configurations where dynamic connections between CTs anddifferential zones are not required (i.e. single zone, double bus-doublebreaker or one and a half breaker stations)

3.2. FixedToZB, when this mode is selected the bay CT input is alwaysconnected to the differential zone B. This is for example used for simplebusbar configurations where dynamic connections between CTs and



REB 670

differential zones are not required (i.e. double bus-double breaker or oneand a half breaker stations)

3.3. FixedToZA&-ZB, when this mode is selected the bay CT input is alwaysconnected to the differential zone A and its inverted value to the differentialzone B. This is for example used for bus-tie bays with just one set of mainCT. In this way the same current is easily given to both differential zones.It shall be noted that the CT staring shall be set with respect to zone A.

3.4. CtrlIncludes, when this mode is selected the bay CT input will be:connected to zone A when binary input CTRLZA into the function blockhave logical value one connected to zone B when binary input CTRLZBinto the function block have logical value one

3.5. CtrlExcludes, when this mode is selected the bay CT input will be:connected to zone A when binary input CTRLZA into the function blockhave logical value zero connected to zone B when binary input CTRLZBinto the function block have logical value zero

• ZoneSwitching, this setting determines how the bay CT shall behave when zoneinterconnection is active (i.e. merging between ZA & ZB). One of the followingthree alternatives shall be selected for every function block:4.1. ForceOut, when this mode is selected the bay CT input is unconditionally

disconnected from both differential zones when zone interconnectionfeature is active. This setting is typically used for bus-coupler bay in doublebusbar stations.

4.2. ForceIn, when this mode is selected the bay CT input is unconditionallyconnected to both differential zones when zone interconnection feature isactive.

4.3. Conditionally, when this mode is selected the bay CT input is connectedto both differential zones when zone interconnection feature is active if itwas previously connected to at least one of them. This setting is typicallyused for feeder bays in double busbar-single breaker stations, and for allspare/future bays.

• CheckZoneSel, this setting determines the bay CT input connection towards thecheck zone. One of the following two alternatives shall be selected for everyfunction block:5.1. NotConnected, when this mode is selected the bay CT input is not

connected to the overall check zone. This setting is typically used for bus-coupler bay in double busbar-single breaker stations.

5.2. Connected, when this mode is selected the bay CT input is connected tothe overall check zone. This setting is typically used for feeder bays indouble busbar-single breaker stations.

• tTripPulse, this pulse timer is used in order to guarranty minimum trip pulseduration from the bay function block. Pulse time can be set from 0.000s to60.000s in step of 0.001s. Default value is 0.200s.

• tZeroCurrent, this delay on pickup timer is used in order to unconditionally forcebay current to zero when ZEROCUR input into the function block has logical



117

value one. Time delay can be set from 0.000s to 60.000s in step of 0.001s. Defaultvalue is 0.200s.

• tInvertCurrent, this delay on pickup timer is used in order to invert bay currentwhen INVCUR input into the function block has logical value one. Time delaycan be set from 0.000s to 60.000s in step of 0.001s. Default value is 0.200s.

4.1.9.2 Bay operation principles

In order to have properly balanced differential function for the station busbardisconnector switching arrangements, it is important to properly configure the zoneselection data for every connected current transformer. Due to this configurationparameter, the REB 670 IED allows an effective application for stations where thezone selection (i.e. CT switching) is required. This is possible due to the softwarefacility to have full and easy control over all CT inputs connected to the terminal. Thephilosophy is to allow every CT input to be individually controlled by a settingparameter.

The setting parameters for the differential protection function (DFB) are set via thelocal HMI or PCM 600. Refer to the Technical reference manual for settingparameters and path in local HMI.

Description of bay connectionThe setting parameter for bay connection called ZoneSel can be individually set forevery CT. ZoneSel can be set to only one of the following five alternatives:

• FixedToZA, the CTx will be fixed to zone A.• FixedToZB, the CTx will be fixed to zone B.• FixedToZA&-ZB, the CTx is included to zone A and invert included to zone B.• CtrlIncludes, the CTx will be included to zone A/zone B when the input signal

CTRLZA/CTRLZB is TRUE.• CtrlExcludes, the CTx will be included to zone A/zone B when the input signal

CTRLZA/CTRLZB is FALSE. See figure 54.

When the last two options are used the CT input can be dynamically included/excluded from the differential zone by simply controlling the dedicated inputs of theBay function block.



REB 670

en06000066.vsd

&

&

&

³1

³1

³1

³1

&

CTtoZoneA-cont.

CTtoZoneB-cont.

StrtLoadTransfBayxx-cont.

InvertCTtoZoneB-cont.

CTRLZB

t5 ms

t5 ms

&

CTRLZA

ZoneSel=CtrlIncludes

ZoneSel=CtrlExcludes

ZoneSel=FixedToZA

ZoneSel=FixedToZB

ZoneSel=FixedToZA&-ZB

Figure 54: Zone selection logic.

Description of invert current and forcing current to zeroThis logic is intended for binary input signals that gives possibility to force currentto zero or invert the current. Two settable delays on timer tZeroCurrent andtInvertCurrent are also implemented making sure that the right decision is taken, seefigure 55.

en06000068.vsd

ttZeroCurrent

ttInvertCurrent

TF

TF

X

0.0

-1.0 1.0

ZEROCUR

INVCUR

Connected= 1NotConnected= 0ConnInverted= -1

CTConnection

CurrentBayxx-cont.

REB 670CT Input

X

A/D Conversion,Multiplication with CT Ratio,

Taking in account settingCTStarPoint for TRM

Bayxx Current inPrimary Amperes

Figure 55: Overall CT status.



119

Description of Zone interconnection and Check zone selection influence onZone selectionFigure 56 shows influence of zone interconnection feature and check zone selectionon overall zone selection logic. At the same time influence on TRZONE binary inputis shown.

Figure 56: Check zone selection and zone interconnection operation influenceon zone selection.

Bay trip logicIn case of an internal fault differential function will operate, i.e. a tripZoneA/TripZoneB will be given to all bays. All the bays that are connected to that zone willbe tripped if they are not blocked by input BLKTR.

A pulse timer “tTripPulse” will ensure the minimal duration of the trip signal.



REB 670

BLKTR & t tTripPulse

³1

&³1

TRBAY

TRIP

&

en06000070.vsd

BayxxInZA

BayxxInZBZBTrip

ZATrip

Figure 57: Bay trip logic


BUTPTRC_87BBTH1-

I3PB1BLKTRCTRLZACTRLZBZEROCURINVCURTRZONETRBAY

TRIPCONNZACONNZB

CONNBAY

en06000164.vsd

Figure 58: BTH function block (Bay, 3ph), example for BTH1 – BTH8.

BUSPTRC_87BBS01-

ISI1BLKTRCTRLZACTRLZBZEROCURINVCURTRZONETRBAY

TRIPCONNZACONNZB

CONNBAY

en06000165.vsd

Figure 59: BS function block (Bay, 1ph), example for BS01 – BS21.




121

Table 67: Input signals for the BUTPTRC_87B (BTH1-) function block

Signal DescriptionI3PB1 Group signal for current input

BLKTR Block bay trip

CTRLZA Logical signal which controls bay connection to zone A

CTRLZB Logical signal which controls bay connection to zone B

ZEROCUR Force bay current to zero

INVCUR Invert bay current

TRZONE Trip zone to which bay is connected

TRBAY External bay trip

Table 68: Output signals for the BUTPTRC_87B (BTH1-) function block

Signal DescriptionTRIP Common trip signal for the bay

CONNZA Bay is connected to zone A

CONNZB Bay is connected to zone B

CONNBAY Status of bay to zones connections

Table 69: Input signals for the BUSPTRC_87B (BS01-) function block

Signal DescriptionISI1 Group signal for current input

BLKTR Block bay trip

CTRLZA Logical signal which controls bay connection to zone A

CTRLZB Logical signal which controls bay connection to zone B

ZEROCUR Force bay current to zero

INVCUR Invert bay current

TRZONE Trip zone to which bay is connected

TRBAY External bay trip

Table 70: Output signals for the BUSPTRC_87B (BS01-) function block

Signal DescriptionTRIP Common trip signal for the bay

CONNZA Bay is connected to zone A

CONNZB Bay is connected to zone B

CONNBAY Status of bay to zones connections



REB 670


Table 71: General settings for the BUTPTRC_87B (BTH1-) function

Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionBAY01 0 - 13 1 BayName01 - User defined name for

bay

Table 72: Parameter group settings for the BUTPTRC_87B (BTH1-) function

Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionCTConnection Conn Inverted

NotConnectedConnected

- Connected - Hardware CT inputconnection to the bayfunction block

ZoneSel FixedToZAFixedToZBFixedToZA&-ZBCtrlIncludesCtrlExcludes

- CtrlIncludes - How bay/CT iscontrolled toward thezones

ZoneSwitching ForceOutForceInConditionally

- ForceIn - Bay/CT status duringzone switching

CheckZoneSel NotConnectedConnected

- NotConnected - Bay/CT status for thecheck zone

tTripPulse 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.200 s Bay trip pulseduration if zone tripsin SelfReset mode

tZeroCurrent 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.200 s Time delay to forcecurrent to zero viabinary signal

tInvertCurrent 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.200 s Time delay to invertcurrent via binarysignal

Table 73: Parameter group settings for the BUSPTRC_87B (BS01-) function

Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionCTConnection Conn Inverted

NotConnectedConnected

- Connected - Hardware CT inputconnection to the bayfunction block

ZoneSel FixedToZAFixedToZBFixedToZA&-ZBCtrlIncludesCtrlExcludes

- CtrlIncludes - How bay/CT iscontrolled toward thezones

ZoneSwitching ForceOutForceInConditionally

- ForceIn - Bay/CT status duringzone switching

CheckZoneSel NotConnectedConnected

- NotConnected - Bay/CT status for thecheck zone




123

Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptiontTripPulse 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.200 s Bay trip pulse

duration if zone tripsin SelfReset mode

tZeroCurrent 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.200 s Time delay to forcecurrent to zero viabinary signal

tInvertCurrent 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.200 s Time delay to invertcurrent via binarysignal

4.1.10 Zone interconnection (Load transfer)When this feature is activated the two integrated differential protection zones aremerged into one common, overall differential zone. This future is required in doublebusbar stations when in any of the feeder bays both busbar disconnectors are closedat the same time (i.e. load transfer). As explained in above section Bay each CT inputwill then behave in the pre-set way in order to ensure proper current balancing duringthis special condition. This feature can be started automatically (when Zone Selectionlogic determines that both busbar disconnectors in one feeder bay are closed at thesame time) or externally via dedicated binary signal. If this feature is active for longertime than the pre-set vale the alarm signal is given.

4.1.10.1 Explanation of Zone interconnection (Load transfer) function block

Detailed explanation of Zone interconnection (Load transfer) functionblock inputs

• EXTSTART, when this binary input has logical value one the zoneinterconnection feature will be activated if it is enabled by the setting parameterOperation

• SUMB1B2, this binary input is used for quite special feature which enables theuser of REB 670 to internally sum Bay 01 and Bay 02 currents while the zoneinterconnection is active

• SUMB3B4, this binary input is used for quite special feature which enables theuser of REB 670 to internally sum Bay 03 and Bay 04 currents while the zoneinterconnection is active

• SUMB5B6, this binary input is used for quite special feature which enables theuser of REB 670 to internally sum Bay 05 and Bay 06 currents while the zoneinterconnection is active. It shall be noted that this input is only available in 1-phase version of REB 670.



REB 670

Detailed explanation of Zone interconnection (Load transfer) functionblock outputs

• ACTIVE, this binary output has logical value one while zone interconnectionfeature is active in REB 670

• ALARM, this binary output has logical value one if the zone interconnectionfeature is active longer than the time set under setting parameter tAlarm

Detailed explanation of Zone interconnection (Load transfer) functionblock settings

• Operation, this setting is used in order to switch On/Off (i.e. enable/disable) zoneinterconnection feature.

• tAlarm, this delay on pickup timer is used in order to give an alarm output whenzone interconnection feature is active for too long time. Timer can be set from0.00s to 6000.00s in step of 0.01s. Default value is 300.00s.

4.1.10.2 Description of Zone interconnection operation

Zone interconnection can be activated by external signal or by internal logic insidethe REB 670 IED, when a bay is connected to both zones, it means that zoneinterconnection can be activated by any particular bay. When the binary output signalACTIVE is activated, each CT will individually be include or exclude to the bothzones depending on status of ZoneSwitching setting.

EXTSTART³1

³1

&

ttAlarm

ACTIVE

ALARM

t50 ms

Operation = On

en06000069.vsd

ZoneIntercActive-cont.

StrtLoadTransfBay02

StrtLoadTransfBay01

StrtLoadTransfBaynn

. . .

Figure 60: Zone interconnection logic

ZoneSwitching can be set to only one of the following three alternatives:

• ForceOut, the particular bay will be excluded during the zone interconnection.• ForceIn, the particular bay will be included during the zone interconnection.• Conditionally, the particular bay will be included if it was in operation two ms

before, otherwise the bay will be excluded during the zone interconnection.



125


BZITGGIO_87BBTZI-

EXTSTARTSUMB1B2SUMB3B4

ACTIVEALARM

en06000166.vsd

Figure 61: BTZI function block (Zone interconnection, 3ph)

BZISGGIO_87BBSZI-

EXTSTARTSUMB1B2SUMB3B4SUMB5B6

ACTIVEALARM

en06000167.vsd

Figure 62: BSZI function block (Zone interconnection, 1ph)


Table 74: Input signals for the BZITGGIO_87B (BTZI-) function block

Signal DescriptionEXTSTART External Load Transfer/Zone Interconnection start

SUMB1B2 Sum Bay1 and Bay2 currents during load transfer


Table 75: Output signals for the BZITGGIO_87B (BTZI-) function block

Signal DescriptionACTIVE Load Transfer/Zone Interconnection active

ALARM Too long load transfer alarm

Table 76: Input signals for the BZISGGIO_87B (BSZI-) function block

Signal DescriptionEXTSTART External Load Transfer/Zone Interconnection start






REB 670

Table 77: Output signals for the BZISGGIO_87B (BSZI-) function block

Signal DescriptionACTIVE Load Transfer/Zone Interconnection active

ALARM Too long load transfer alarm


Table 78: Parameter group settings for the BZITGGIO_87B (BTZI-) function


On- Off - Load Transfer/Zone

Interconnectionoperation

tAlarm 0.00 - 6000.00 0.01 300.00 s Time delayed alarmfor too long LoadTransfer/ZoneIntercon

Table 79: Parameter group settings for the BZISGGIO_87B (BSZI-) function


On- Off - Load Transfer/Zone

Interconnectionoperation

tAlarm 0.00 - 6000.00 0.01 300.00 s Time delayed alarmfor too long LoadTransfer/ZoneIntercon.


Table 80: Busbar differential protection (PDIF, 87B)

Function Range or value AccuracyOperating characteristic S=0.53 fixed ± 2.0% of Ir for I < Ir

± 2.0% of I for I > Ir

Reset ratio > 95% -

Differential current operating level (1-100000) A ± 2.0% of Ir for I < Ir± 2.0% of I for I > Ir

Sensitive differential operationlevel

(1-100000) A ± 2.0% of Ir for I < Ir± 2.0% of I for I < Ir

Check zone operation level (0-100000) A ± 2.0% of Ir for I < Ir± 2.0% of I for I > Ir

Check zone slope (0.0-0.9) -

Timers (0.000-60.000) s ± 0.5% ± 10 ms




127

Function Range or value AccuracyTimers (0.00-6000.00) s ± 0.5% ± 10 ms

Operate time 19 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Id12 ms typically at 0 to 10 x Id

-

Reset time 21 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Id29 ms typically at 10 to 0 x Id

-

Critical impulse time 8 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Id -



REB 670

Section 5 Current protection

About this chapterThis chapter describes current protection functions. These include functions likeInstantaneous phase overcurrent protection, Four step phase overcurrent protection,Pole discordance protection and Residual overcurrent protection.

5.1 Four step phase overcurrent protection(POCM, 51_67)

Function block name: TOCx- IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

44 alt

3I>ANSI number: 51

IEC 61850 logical node name:PH4POCM

5.1.1 IntroductionThe four step phase overcurrent function has an inverse or definite time delayindependent for each step separately.

All IEC and ANSI time delayed characteristics are available together with an optionaluser defined time characteristic.

5.1.2 Principle of operationThe function is divided into four different sub-functions, one for each step. For eachstep an operation mode is set (DirModen): Off/Non-directional/Forward/Reverse.

The protection design can be decomposed in four parts:

• The direction element, indicates the over current fault direction• The harmonic Restraint Blocking function• The 4 step over current function• The Mode Selection

Section 5Current protection


129

If VT inputs are not available or not connected, func parameterDirModeX shall be left to default value, Non-directional.

en05000740.vsd

DirectionElement

4 step over currentelement

One element for eachstep

HarmonicRestraint

Mode Selection

dirPh1Flt

dirPh2Flt

dirPh3Flt

harmRestrBlock

enableDir

enableStep1-4

DirectionalMode1-4

faultState

Element

faultState

I3P

U3P

I3P

START

TRIP

Figure 63: Functional overview of TOC.

A common setting for all steps, StPhaseSel, is used to specify the number of phasecurrents to be high to enable operation. The settings can be chosen: 1 out of 3, 2 outof 3 or 3 out of 3.

The sampled analogue phase currents are pre-processed in a discrete Fourier filter(DFT) block. From the fundamental frequency components of each phase current theRMS value of each phase current is derived. These phase current values are fed tothe TOC function. In a comparator, for each phase current, the RMS values arecompared to the set operation current value of the function (I1>, I2>, I3> or I4>). Ifa phase current is larger than the set operation current a signal from the comparatorfor this phase and step is set to true. This signal will, without delay, activate the outputsignal Start for this phase/step, the Start signal common for all three phases for thisstep and a common Start signal.

A harmonic restrain of the function can be chosen. A set 2nd harmonic current inrelation to the fundamental current is used. The 2nd harmonic current is taken fromthe pre-processing of the phase currents and compared to a set restrain current level.

The function can use a directional option. The direction of the fault current is givenas current angle in relation to the voltage angle. The fault current and fault voltagefor the directional function is dependent of the fault type. To enable directionalmeasurement at close in faults, causing low measured voltage, the polarization



REB 670

voltage is a combination of the apparent voltage (80%) and a memory voltage (20%).The following combinations are used.

Phase-phase short circuit:

1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2= - = -refL L L L dirL L L LU U U I I I



Phase-earth short circuit:

1 1 1 1= =refL L dirL LU U I I



The directional setting is given as a characteristic angle AngleRCA for the functionand an angle window AngleRCA-maxFwdAng to AngleRCA+minFwdAng.



131

Uref

Idir

RCA ROA

Forward

Reverse

ROA

en05000745.vsd

Figure 64: Directional characteristic of the phase overcurrent protection

The default value of AngleRCA is –65°. The parameters minFwdAng andmaxFwdAng gives the angle sector from AngleRCA for directional borders.

A minimum current for directional phase start current signal can be set:IminOpPhSel.

If no blockings are given the start signals will start the timers of the step. The timecharacteristic for each step can be chosen as definite time delay or some type ofinverse time characteristic. A wide range of standardized inverse time characteristicsis available. It is also possible to create a tailor made time characteristic. Thepossibilities for inverse time characteristics are described in chapter "Time inversecharacteristics".

Different types of reset time can be selected as described in chapter "Time inversecharacteristics".

There is also a possibility to activate a preset change (InMult, n= 1, 2, 3 or 4) of theset operation current via a binary input (enable multiplier). In some applications theoperation value needs to be changed, for example due to changed network switchingstate. The function can be blocked from the binary input BLOCK. The start signalsfrom the function can be blocked from the binary input BLKST. The trip signals fromthe function can be blocked from the binary input BLKTR.



REB 670


PH4POCMTOC1-

I3PU3PBLOCKBLKTRBLKST1BLKST2BLKST3BLKST4ENMULT1ENMULT2ENMULT3ENMULT4

TRIPTR1TR2TR3TR4

TRL1TRL2TRL3

TR1L1TR1L2TR1L3TR2L1TR2L2TR2L3TR3L1TR3L2TR3L3TR4L1TR4L2TR4L3START

ST1ST2ST3ST4

STL1STL2STL3

ST1L1ST1L2ST1L3ST2L1ST2L2ST2L3ST3L1ST3L2ST3L3ST4L1ST4L2ST4L3

2NDHARMDIRL1DIRL2DIRL3

en05000708.vsd

Figure 65: TOC function block


Table 81: Input signals for the PH4POCM_51_67 (TOC1-) function block

Signal DescriptionI3P Group signal for current input

U3P Group signal for voltage input

BLOCK Block of function

BLKTR Block of trip

BLKST1 Block of Step1





133

Signal DescriptionBLKST3 Block of Step3


ENMULT1 When activated, the current multiplier is in use for step1




Table 82: Output signals for the PH4POCM_51_67 (TOC1-) function block

Signal DescriptionTRIP Trip

TR1 Common trip signal from step1




TRL1 Trip signal from phase L1



TR1L1 Trip signal from step1 phase L1












START General start signal

ST1 Common start signal from step1




STL1 Start signal from phase L1



ST1L1 Start signal from step1 phase L1




REB 670

Signal DescriptionST1L2 Start signal from step1 phase L2











2NDHARM Block from second harmonic detection

DIRL1 Direction for phase1




Table 83: Parameter group settings for the PH4POCM_51_67 (TOC1-) function


On- Off - Operation Off / On

IBase 1 - 99999 1 3000 - Base setting forcurrent values

UBase 0.05 - 2000.00 0.05 400.00 kV Base setting forvoltage levels in kV

MaxFwdAng 40.0 - 70.0 0.1 50.0 Deg Maximum forwardangle

MinFwdAng 75.0 - 90.0 0.1 80.0 Deg Minimum forwardangle

AngleRCA -70.0 - -50.0 1.0 -65.0 Deg Relay characteristicangle (RCA)

IMinOpPhSel 1 - 100 1 7 %IB Minimum current forphase selection in %of IBase

StartPhSel Not Used1 out of 32 out of 33 out of 3

- 1 out of 3 - Number of phasesrequired for op (1 of 3,2 of 3, 3 of 3)

2ndHarmStab 5 - 100 1 20 %IB Operate level of 2ndharm restrain op in %of Fundamental




135

Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionDirMode1 Off

Non-directionalForwardReverse

- Non-directional - Directional mode ofstep 1 (off, nodir,forward, reverse)

Characterist1 ANSI Ext. inv.ANSI Very inv.ANSI Norm. inv.ANSI Mod. inv.ANSI Def. TimeL.T.E. inv.L.T.V. inv.L.T. inv.IEC Norm. inv.IEC Very inv.IEC inv.IEC Ext. inv.IEC S.T. inv.IEC L.T. inv.IEC Def. TimeReservedProgrammableRI typeRD type

- ANSI Def. Time - Selection of timedelay curve type forstep 1

I1> 1 - 2500 1 1000 %IB Operate phasecurrent level for step1in % of IBase

t1 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.000 s Independent(defenitive) time delayof step 1

k1 0.05 - 999.00 0.01 0.05 - Time multiplier for thedependent time delayfor step 1

I1Mult 1.0 - 10.0 0.1 2.0 - Multiplier for operatecurrent level for step 1

t1Min 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.000 s Minimum operatetime for IEC IDMTcurves for step 1

ResetTypeCrv1 InstantaneousIEC ResetANSI reset

- Instantaneous - Selection of resetcurve type for step 1

tReset1 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.020 s Reset time delay usedin IEC Definite Timecurve step 1

tPCrv1 0.005 - 3.000 0.001 1.000 - Parameter P forcustomerprogrammable curvefor step 1

tACrv1 0.005 - 200.000 0.001 13.500 - Parameter A forcustomerprogrammable curvefor step 1

tBCrv1 0.00 - 20.00 0.01 0.00 - Parameter B forcustomerprogrammable curvefor step 1




REB 670

Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptiontCCrv1 0.1 - 10.0 0.1 1.0 - Parameter C for

customerprogrammable curvefor step 1

tPRCrv1 0.005 - 3.000 0.001 0.500 - Parameter PR forcustomerprogrammable curvefor step 1

tTRCrv1 0.005 - 100.000 0.001 13.500 - Parameter TR forcustomerprogrammable curvefor step 1

tCRCrv1 0.1 - 10.0 0.1 1.0 - Parameter CR forcustomerprogrammable curvefor step 1

HarmRestrain1 DisabledEnabled

- Enabled - Enable block of step 1from harmonicrestrain

DirMode2 OffNon-directionalForwardReverse







I2Mult 1.0 - 10.0 0.1 2.0 - Multiplier for scalingthe current settingvalue for step 2





137

Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionResetTypeCrv2 Instantaneous

IEC ResetANSI reset






tCCrv2 0.1 - 10.0 0.1 1.0 - Parameter C forcustomerprogrammable curvefor step 2











REB 670

Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionCharacterist3 ANSI Ext. inv.

ANSI Very inv.ANSI Norm. inv.ANSI Mod. inv.ANSI Def. TimeL.T.E. inv.L.T.V. inv.L.T. inv.IEC Norm. inv.IEC Very inv.IEC inv.IEC Ext. inv.IEC S.T. inv.IEC L.T. inv.IEC Def. TimeReservedProgrammableRI typeRD type



t3 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.800 s Independent(definitive) time delayfor step 3














139

Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptiontPRCrv3 0.005 - 3.000 0.001 0.500 - Parameter PR for





- Enabled - Enable block of step3from harmonicrestrain



Characterist4 ANSI Ext. inv.ANSI Very inv.ANSI Norm. inv.ANSI Def. TimeL.T.E. inv.L.T.V. inv.L.T. inv.IEC Norm. inv.IEC Very inv.IEC inv.IEC Ext. inv.IEC S.T. inv.IEC L.T. inv.IEC Def. TimeReservedProgrammableRI typeRD type



t4 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 2.000 s Independent(definitive) time delayof step4









REB 670

Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptiontReset4 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.020 s Reset time delay used

in IEC Definite Timecurve step 4









- Enabled - Enable block of Step4 from harmonicrestrain


Table 84: Four step phase overcurrent protection (POCM, 51/67)

Function Setting range AccuracyOperate current (1-2500)% of lbase ± 1.0% of Ir at I £ Ir

± 1.0% of I at I > Ir

Reset ratio > 95% -

Min. operating current (1-100)% of lbase ± 1.0% of Ir

Maximum forward angle (40.0–70.0) degrees ± 2.0 degrees

Minimum forward angle (75.0–90.0) degrees ± 2.0 degrees

Second harmonic blocking (5–100)% of fundamental ± 2.0% of Ir

Independent time delay (0.000-60.000) s ± 0.5% ± 10 ms

Minimum operate time (0.000-60.000) s ± 0.5% ± 10 ms




141

Function Setting range AccuracyInverse characteristics, seetable 263 and table 264

19 curve types See table 263 and table 264

Operate time, start function 25 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset -

Reset time, start function 25 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Iset -

Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset -

Impulse margin time 15 ms typically -

5.2 Four step single phase overcurrent protection(POCM, 51)

Function block name: OCx- IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

44 alt

I>ANSI number: 51

IEC 61850 logical node name:PH4SPOCM

5.2.1 IntroductionThe four step single phase overcurrent function has an inverse or definite time delayindependent for each step separately.

All IEC and ANSI time delayed characteristics are available together with an optionaluser defined time characteristic.

The function is non-directional.

5.2.2 Principle of operationThe function is divided into four different sub-functions, one for each step.

The function consists of two major parts:



REB 670

• The harmonic Restraint Blocking function• The 4 step over current function

en06000141.vsd

4 step overcurrentelement

One element for eachstep

HarmonicRestraint harmRestrBlockElement

I3P

START

TRIP

ISI

Figure 66: Functional overview of OC.

The sampled analogue phase currents are pre-processed in a discrete Fourier filter(DFT) block. The RMS value of the phase current is derived. The phase current valueis fed to the OC function. In a comparator the RMS value is compared to the setoperation current value of the function (I1>, I2>, I3> or I4>). If the phase current islarger than the set operation current a signal from the comparator is set to true. Thissignal will, without delay, activate the output signal Start for this step and a commonStart signal.

A harmonic restrain of the function can be chosen. A set 2nd harmonic current inrelation to the fundamental current is used. The 2nd harmonic current is taken fromthe pre-processing of the phase current and compared to a set restrain current level.

If no blockings are given the start signals will start the timers of the step. The timecharacteristic for each step can be chosen as definite time delay or some type ofinverse time characteristic. A wide range of standardized inverse time characteristicsis available. It is also possible to create a tailor made time characteristic. Thepossibilities for inverse time characteristics are described in chapter "Time inversecharacteristics".

Different types of reset time can be selected as described in chapter "Time inversecharacteristics".

There is also a possibility to activate a preset change (InMult, n= 1, 2, 3 or 4) of theset operation current via a binary input (enable multiplier). In some applications theoperation value needs to be changed, for example due to changed network switchingstate. The function can be blocked from the binary input BLOCK. The start signalsfrom the function can be blocked from the binary input BLKST. The trip signals fromthe function can be blocked from the binary input BLKTR.



143


PH4SPOCM_51OC01-

ISIBLOCKBLKST1BLKST2BLKST3BLKST4BLKTRENMULT1ENMULT2ENMULT3ENMULT4

TRIPTR1TR2TR3TR4

STARTST1ST2ST3ST4

2NDHARM

en06000157.vsd

Figure 67: OC function block


Table 85: Input signals for the PH4SPOCM_51 (OC01-) function block

Signal DescriptionISI Group signal for current input






BLKTR Block of trip





Table 86: Output signals for the PH4SPOCM_51 (OC01-) function block

Signal DescriptionTRIP Trip





START General start signal






REB 670

Signal DescriptionST3 Common start signal from step3


2NDHARM Block from second harmonic detection


Table 87: Parameter group settings for the PH4SPOCM_51 (OC01-) function



IBase 1 - 99999 1 3000 - Base setting forcurrent values in A

2ndHarmStab 5 - 100 1 20 %IB Operate level of 2ndharm restrain op in %of Fundamental

OpStep1 OffOn

- On - Operation overcurrent step 1 Off / On

Characterist1 ANSI Ext. inv.ANSI Very inv.ANSI Norm. inv.ANSI Mod. inv.ANSI Def. TimeL.T.E. inv.L.T.V. inv.IEC Norm. inv.IEC Very inv.IEC inv.IEC Ext. inv.IEC L.T. inv.IEC Def. TimeReservedProgrammableRI typeRD type





I1Mult 1.0 - 10.0 0.1 2.0 - Multiplier for operatecurrent level for step 1



- Instantaneous - Selection of resetcurve type for step




145

Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptiontReset1 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.020 s Reset time delay used

in IEC Definite Timecurve step 1










OPStep2 OffOn


Characterist2 ANSI Ext. inv.ANSI Very inv.IEC ResetANSI Norm. inv.ANSI Mod. inv.ANSI Def. TimeL.T.E. inv.L.T.V. inv.L.T. inv.IEC Norm. inv.IEC Very inv.IEC inv.IEC Ext. inv.IEC L.T. inv.IEC Def. TimeReservedProgrammableRI typeRD type





REB 670

Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionI2> 1 - 2500 1 500 %IB Operate phase

current level for step2in %of IBase

















OpStep3 OffOn





147

Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionCharacterist3 ANSI Ext. inv.

ReportEventsANSI Very inv.ANSI Norm. inv.ANSI Mod. inv.ANSI Def. TimeL.T.E. inv.L.T.V. inv.L.T. inv.IEC Norm. inv.IEC Very inv.IEC inv.IEC Ext. inv.IEC S.T. inv.IEC L.T. inv.IEC Def. TimeProgrammableRI typeRD type


I3> 1 - 2500 1 250 %IB Operate phasecurrent level for step3in %of Ibase

t3 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.800 s Independent(definitive) time delayfor step 3














REB 670

Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptiontPRCrv3 0.005 - 3.000 0.001 0.500 - Parameter PR for





- Enabled - Enable block of step3from harmonicrestrain

OpStep4 OffOn





t4 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 2.000 s Independent(definitive) time delayof step4










149

Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptiontPCrv4 0.005 - 3.000 0.001 1.000 - Parameter P for









- Enabled - Enable block of Step4 from harmonicrestrain


Table 88: Four step single phase overcurrent protection (POCM, 51)

Function Setting range AccuracyOperate current (1-2500)% of lbase ± 1.0% of Ir at I £ Ir

± 1.0% of I at I > Ir

Reset ratio > 95% -

Second harmonic blocking (5–100)% of fundamental ± 2.0% of Ir

Independent time delay (0.000-60.000) s ± 0.5% ± 10 ms

Minimum operate time (0.000-60.000) s ± 0.5% ± 10 ms

Inverse characteristics, seetable 263 and table 264

19 curve types See table 263 and table 264

Operate time, start function 25 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset -

Reset time, start function 25 ms typically at 2 to 0 x Iset -

Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset -

Impulse margin time 15 ms typically -



REB 670

5.3 Breaker failure protection (RBRF, 50BF)

Function block name: BFPx- IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

3I>BF

ANSI number: 50BF

IEC 61850 logical node name:CCRBRF

5.3.1 IntroductionThe circuit breaker failure function ensures fast back-up tripping of surroundingbreakers. The breaker failure protection operation can be current based, contact basedor adaptive combination between these two principles.

A current check with extremely short reset time is used as a check criteria to achievea high security against unnecessary operation.

The breaker failure protection can be single- or three-phase started to allow use withsingle phase tripping applications. For the three-phase version of the breaker failureprotection the current criteria can be set to operate only if two out of four e.g. twophases or one phase plus the residual current starts. This gives a higher security tothe back-up trip command.

The function can be programmed to give a single- or three phase re-trip of the ownbreaker to avoid unnecessary tripping of surrounding breakers at an incorrect startingdue to mistakes during testing.

5.3.2 Principle of operationThe breaker failure protection function is initiated from protection trip command,either from protection functions within the protection terminal or from externalprotection devices.

The start signal can be phase selective or general (for all three phases). Phase selectivestart signals enable single pole re-trip function. This means that a second attempt toopen the breaker is done. The re-trip attempt can be made after a set time delay. Fortransmission lines single pole trip and autoreclosing is often used. The re-trip functioncan be phase selective if it is initiated from phase selective line protection. The re-trip function can be done with or without current check. With the current check there-trip is only performed if the current through the circuit breaker is larger than theoperate current level.

The start signal can be an internal or external protection trip signal. If this start signalgets high at the same time as current is detected through the circuit breaker, the back-



151

up trip timer is started. If the opening of the breaker is successful this is detected bythe function, both by detection of low RMS current and by a special adaptedalgorithm. The special algorithm enables a very fast detection of successful breakeropening, i.e. fast resetting of the current measurement. If the current detection hasnot detected breaker opening before the back-up timer has run its time a back-up tripis initiated. There is also a possibility to have a second back-up trip output activatedafter an added settable time after the first back-up trip.

Further the following possibilities are available:

• The minimum length of the re-trip pulse, the back-up trip pulse and the back-uptrip pulse 2 are settable. The re-trip pulse, the back-up trip pulse and the back-up trip pulse 2 will however sustain as long as there is an indication of closedbreaker.

• In the current detection it is possible to use three different options: 1 out of 3where it is sufficient to detect failure to open (high current) in one pole, 1 out of4 where it is sufficient to detect failure to open (high current) in one pole or highresidual current and 2 out of 4 where at least two current (phase current and/orresidual current) shall be high for breaker failure detection.

• The current detection for the residual current can be set different from the settingof phase current detection.

• It is possible to have different re-trip time delays for single phase faults and formulti-phase faults.

• The back-up trip can be made without current check. It is possible to have thisoption activated for small load currents only.

• It is possible to have instantaneous back-up trip function if a signal is high if thecircuit breaker is insufficient to clear faults, for example at low gas pressure.

en05000832.vsd

STIL1

START

STL1 OR

AND

BLOCK

ANDCBCLDL1

CurrentAND

Current & Contact AND

AND Contact

t

t1 tpTRRETL1

L2 L3

TRRET

OR

OR

Figure 68: Simplified logic scheme of the retrip function



REB 670

Figure 69: Simplified logic scheme of the back-up trip function

Internal logical signals STIL1, STIL2, STIL3 have logical value 1 when current inrespective phase has magnitude larger than setting parameter IP>.

Internal logical signal STN has logical value 1 when neutral current has magnitudelarger than setting parameter IN>.



153

tt2

1 of 3

2 of 3

OR1 of 4

tp

AND tt2MPh

tp

t

t3TRBU2

TRBU

en06000223.vsd

More than 1 current high

tCBALARM

CBFLT CBALARM

AND

OR

Figure 70: Simplified logic scheme of the back-up trip function


CCRBRFBFP1-

I3PBLOCKSTARTSTL1STL2STL3CBCLDL1CBCLDL2CBCLDL3CBFLT

TRBUTRBU2TRRET

TRRETL1TRRETL2TRRETL3

CBALARM

en04000397.vsd

Figure 71: BFP function block


Table 89: Input signals for the CCRBRF_50BF (BFP1-) function block



START Three phase start of breaker failure protection function

STL1 Start signal of phase L1




REB 670

Signal DescriptionSTL2 Start signal of phase L2

STL3 Start signal of phase L3

CBCLDL1 Circuit breaker closed in phase L1



CBFLT CB faulty, unable to trip. Back-up trip instantanously.

Table 90: Output signals for the CCRBRF_50BF (BFP1-) function block

Signal DescriptionTRBU Back-up trip by breaker failure protection function

TRBU2 Second back-up trip by breaker failure protection function

TRRET Retrip by breaker failure protection function

TRRETL1 Retrip by breaker failure protection function phase L1



CBALARM Alarm for faulty circuit breaker


Table 91: Parameter group settings for the CCRBRF_50BF (BFP1-) function



IBase 1 - 99999 1 3000 A Base setting forcurrent level settings

FunctionMode CurrentContactCurrent&Contact

- Current - Detection for back-uptrip Current/Cont/Current and Cont

BuTripMode 2 out of 41 out of 31 out of 4

- 1 out of 3 - Back-up trip mode, 2out of 4, 1 out of 3 or1 out of 4

RetripMode Retrip OffI> CheckNo I> Check

- Retrip Off - Operation mode of re-trip logic: OFF/I>check/No I> check

IP> 5 - 200 1 10 %IB Operate level in % ofIBase

I>BlkCont 5 - 200 1 20 %IB Current for blocking ofCB contact operationin % of IBase

IN> 2 - 200 1 10 %IB Operate residual levelin % of IBase

t1 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.000 s Time delay of re-trip




155

Parameter Range Step Default Unit Descriptiont2 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.150 s Time delay of back-up

trip

t2MPh 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.150 s Time delay of back-uptrip at multi-phasestart

t3 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.030 s Additional time delayto t2 for a secondback-up trip

tCBAlarm 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 5.000 s Time delay for CBfaulty signal

tPulse 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.200 s Trip pulse duration


Table 92: Breaker failure protection (RBRF, 50BF)

Function Range or value AccuracyOperate phase current (5-200)% of lbase ± 1.0% of Ir at I £ Ir

± 1.0% of I at I > Ir

Reset ratio, phase current > 95% -

Operate residual current (2-200)% of lbase ± 1.0% of Ir at I £ Ir± 1.0% of I at I > Ir

Reset ratio, residual current > 95% -

Phase current level for blocking ofcontact function

(5-200)% of lbase ± 1.0% of Ir at I £ Ir± 1.0% of I at I > Ir

Reset ratio > 95% -

Timers (0.000-60.000) s ± 0.5% ± 10 ms

Operate time for current detection 10 ms typically -

Reset time for current detection 15 ms maximum -

5.4 Breaker failure protection, single phase version(RBRF, 50BF)

Function block name: BFx- IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

I>BF

ANSI number: 50BF

IEC 61850 logical node name:CCSRBRF



REB 670

5.4.1 IntroductionThe circuit breaker failure function ensures fast back-up tripping of surroundingbreakers.

A current check with extremely short reset time is used as a check criteria to achievea high security against unnecessary operation.

The function can be programmed to give a re-trip of the own breaker to avoidunnecessary tripping of surrounding breakers at an incorrect starting due to mistakesduring testing.

5.4.2 Principle of operationThe breaker failure protection function is initiated from protection trip command,either from protection functions within the protection terminal or from externalprotection devices.

The start signal enables the re-trip function. This means that a second attempt to openthe breaker is done. The re-trip attempt can be made after a set time delay. The re-trip function can be done with or without current check. With the current check there-trip is only performed if the current through the circuit breaker is larger than theoperate current level.

The start signal can be an internal or external protection trip signal. If this start signalgets high at the same time as current is detected through the circuit breaker, the back-up trip timer is started. If the opening of the breaker is successful this is detected bythe function, both by detection of low RMS current and by a special adaptedalgorithm. The special algorithm enables a very fast detection of successful breakeropening, i.e. fast resetting of the current measurement. If the current detection hasnot detected breaker opening before the set back-up time has elapsed, a back-up tripis initiated. There is also a possibility to have a second back-up trip output activateda settable time after the first back-up trip.

Further the following possibilities are available:

• The length of the re-trip pulse, the back-up trip pulse and the back-up trip pulse2 are settable.

• The back-up trip can be made without current check. It is possible to have thisoption activated for small load currents only.

• It is possible to have instantaneous back-up trip function if a signal (CBFLT) ishigh due to that circuit breaker is unable to clear faults, for example at low gaspressure.



157

en06000150.vsd

STIL1

START

AND

BLOCK

ANDCBCLD

CurrentAND

Current &Contact AND

AND Contact

t

t1 tpTRRET

OR

OR

Figure 72: Simplified logic diagram of the retrip function

Internal logical signal STIL1 has logical value 1 when current in that phase hasmagnitude larger than setting parameter IP>.

en06000156.vsd

START

AND

CBCLD

CurrentAND

Current &Contact AND

AND Contact

OR

t

t3 tpTRBU2

tpTRBU

I>

tCBAlarm

AND

OR t

t2

OR

CBFLT CBALARM

Figure 73: Simplified logic diagram of the back-up trip function


CCSRBRF_50BFBF01-

ISIBLOCKSTARTCBCLDCBFLT

TRBUTRBU2TRRET

CBALARM

en06000158.vsd

Figure 74: BFP function block



REB 670


Table 93: Input signals for the CCSRBRF_50BF (BF01-) function block

Signal DescriptionISI Group signal for current input 1Ph


START Start of breaker failure protection

CBCLD Circuit breaker closed

CBFLT CB faulty, unable to trip. Back-up trip instantanously

Table 94: Output signals for the CCSRBRF_50BF (BF01-) function block

Signal DescriptionTRBU Back-up trip by breaker failure protection

TRBU2 Second back-up trip by breaker failure protection

TRRET Retrip by breaker failure protection

CBALARM Alarm for faulty circuit breaker


Table 95: Parameter group settings for the CCSRBRF_50BF (BF01-) function


On- Off - Operation Mode Off /

On

IBase 1 - 99999 1 3000 A Base setting forcurrent level settings

FunctionMode CurrentContactCurrent&Contact

- Current - Detection for tripCurrent/Contact/Current&Contact

RetripMode Retrip OffI> CheckNo I> Check

- Retrip Off - Operation mode of re-trip logic: OFF /I>check/ No I> check

IP> 5 - 200 1 10 %IB Operate level in % ofIBase

I>BlkCont 5 - 200 1 20 %IB Current for blocking ofCB contact operationin % of IBase

t1 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.000 s Delay for re-trip

t2 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.150 s Delay of back-up trip




159

Parameter Range Step Default Unit Descriptiont3 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.030 s Additional delay to t2

for a second back-uptrip

tCBAlarm 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 5.000 s Delay for CB faultysignal

tPulse 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.200 s Trip pulse duration


Table 96: Breaker failure protection, single phase version (RBRF, 50BF)

Function Range or value AccuracyOperate phase current (5-200)% of lbase ± 1.0% of Ir at I £ Ir

± 1.0% of I at I > Ir

Reset ratio, phase current > 95% -

Phase current level for blocking ofcontact function

(5-200)% of lbase ± 1.0% of Ir at I £ Ir± 1.0% of I at I > Ir

Reset ratio > 95% -

Timers (0.000-60.000) s ± 0.5% ± 10 ms

Operate time for current detection 10 ms typically -

Reset time for current detection 15 ms maximum -



REB 670

Section 6 Control

About this chapterThis chapter describes the control functions. The way the functions work, their settingparameters, function blocks, input and output signals and technical data are includedfor each function.

6.1 Autorecloser (RREC, 79)

Function block name: ARx-- IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

O->I

ANSI number: 79

IEC 61850 logical node name:SMBRREC

6.1.1 IntroductionThe autoreclosing function provides high-speed and/or delayed auto-reclosing forsingle or multi-breaker applications.

Up to five reclosing attempts can be programmed. The first attempt can be single-,two and/or three phase for single phase or multi-phase faults respectively.

Multiple autoreclosing functions are provided for multi-breaker arrangements. Apriority circuit allows one circuit breaker to close first and the second will only closeif the fault proved to be transient.

Each autoreclosing function can be configured to co-operate with a synchrocheckfunction.

The autoreclosing function provides high-speed and/or delayed three poleautoreclosing. In REB 670 the autoreclosing can be used for delayed busbarrestoration. One AR per zone can be made available.

Section 6Control


161


6.1.2.1 Logic Diagrams

The logic diagrams below illustrate the principles applicable in the understanding ofthe functionality.

6.1.2.2 Auto-reclosing operation Off and On

Operation of the automatic reclosing can be set to Off or On via the setting parametersand through external control. With the setting Operation=ON, the function isactivated while with the setting Operation=OFF the function is deactivated. With thesetting Operation=External ctrl, the activation/deactivation is made by input signalpulses, for example from a control system.

When the function is set On and is operative the output SETON is activated (high).Other input conditions such as CBPOS and CBREADY must also be fulfilled. At thispoint the automatic recloser is prepared to start the reclosing cycle and the outputsignal READY on the AR function block is activated (high).

6.1.2.3 Start auto-reclosing and conditions for start of a reclosing cycle

The usual way in which to start a reclosing cycle, or sequence, is to start it when aline protection tripping has occurred, by applying a signal to the START input. Shouldit be necessary to adjust three-phase auto-reclosing open time, (dead time) fordifferent power system configurations or during tripping at different protectionstages, the input STARTHS (start high-speed reclosing) can also be used.

For a new auto-reclosing cycle to be started, a number of conditions need to be met.They are linked to dedicated inputs. The inputs are: a) CBREADY, CB ready for areclosing cycle, e.g. charged operating gear, b) CBPOS to ensure that the CB wasclosed when the line fault occurred and start was applied, c) No blocking or inhibitsignal shall be present. After the start has been accepted, it is latched in and an internalsignal “Started” is set. It can be interrupted by certain events, like an inhibit signal.

To start auto-reclosing by CB position Open instead of from protection trip signals,one has to configure the CB Open position signal to inputs CBPOS and START andset a parameter StartByCBOpen = ON and CBAuxContType = NormClosed (normallyclosed, 52b). One also has to configure and connect signals from manual tripcommands to input INHIBIT.

The logic for switching the auto-recloser ON/OFF and the starting of the reclosing isshown in figure 75. The following should be considered.

• Setting Operation can be set to Off, External ctrl or ON. External ctrl offers thepossibility of switching by external switches to inputs ON and OFF,communication commands to the same inputs etc.

• Autoreclose AR is normally started by tripping. It is either a Zone 1 andCommunication aided trip or a general trip. If the general trip is used the function

Section 6Control


REB 670

must be blocked from all back-up tripping connected to INHIBIT. In bothalternatives the breaker failure function must be connected to inhibit the function.START makes a first attempt with synchrocheck, STARTHS makes its firstattempt without synchrocheck. TRSOTF starts shots 2-5.

• Circuit breaker checks that the breaker was closed for a certain length of timebefore the starting occurred and that the CB has sufficient stored energy toperform an auto-reclosing sequence and is connected to inputs CBPOS andCBREADY.

Operation:On

Operation:Off

Operation:External Ctrl

AND

AND

AND S

R

AND

AND

AND

SETON

initiate

start

READY

CBPOS

CBREADY

TRSOTF

START

OFF

ON

Additional conditions

en05000782.vsd

STARTHS

autoInitiate

ttCBClosedMin

CB Closed

AND S

Blocking conditions

Inhibit condistions

count 0

AND

OR

OR

OR

OR

R

OR

t120 ms

AND

Figure 75: Auto-reclosing Off/On and start

6.1.2.4 Control of the auto-reclosing open time for shot 1

It is possible to use up to four different time settings for the first shot, and oneextension time. There are separate settings for single-, two- and three-phase auto-reclosing open times, t1 1Ph, t1 2Ph, t1 3Ph. If no particular input signal is applied,and an auto-reclosing program with single-phase reclosing is selected, the auto-reclosing open time t1 1Ph will be used. If one of the inputs TR2P or TR3P is activatedin connection with the start, the auto-reclosing open time for two-phase or three-phasereclosing is used. There is also a separate time setting facility for three-phase high-speed auto-reclosing, t1 3PhHS available for use when required. It is activated byinput STARTHS.

An auto-reclosing open time extension delay, tExtended t1, can be added to the normalshot 1 delay. It is intended to come into use if the communication channel forpermissive line protection is lost. In a case like this there can be a significant time

Section 6Control


163

difference in fault clearance at the two line ends. A longer auto-reclosing open timecan then be useful. This extension time is controlled by setting parameter Extendedt1 = On and the input PLCLOST.

6.1.2.5 Long trip signal

In normal circumstances the trip command resets quickly due to fault clearing. Theuser can set a maximum trip pulse duration tTrip. When trip signals are longer, theauto-reclosing open time is extended by tExtended t1. If Extended t1 = Off. A longtrip signal interrupts the reclosing sequence in the same way as a signal to inputINHIBIT.

ANDAND

ttTrip

AND

initiatePLCLOST

AND

Extend t1

long duration

en05000783.vsd

start

Extended t1

AND

(block AR)

OR

Figure 76: Control of extended auto-reclosing open time and long trip pulsedetection

Reclosing checks and the reclaim timerWhen dead time has elapsed during the auto-reclosing procedure certain conditionsmust be fulfilled before the CB closing command is issued. To achieve this, signalsare exchanged between program modules to check that these conditions are met. Inthree-phase reclosing a synchronizing and/or energizing check can be used. It ispossible to use a synchronism check function in the same physical device or anexternal one. The release signal is configured by connecting to the auto-reclosingfunction input SYNC. If reclosing without checking is preferred the SYNC input canbe set to TRUE (set high). Another possibility is to set the output of the synchro-checkfunction to a permanently activated state. At confirmation from the synchro-check,or if the reclosing is of single-phase or two-phase type, the signal passes on. At single-phase, two-phase reclosing and at three-phase high-speed reclosing started bySTARTHS, synchronization is not checked, and the state of the SYNC input isdisregarded.

By choosing CBReadyType = CO (CB ready for a Close-Open sequence) thereadiness of the circuit breaker is also checked before issuing the CB closingcommand. If the CB has a readiness contact of type CBReadyType = OCO (CB ready

Section 6Control


REB 670

for an Open-Close-Open sequence) this condition may not be complied with after thetripping and at the moment of reclosure. The Open-Close-Open condition washowever checked at the start of the reclosing cycle and it is then likely that the CB isprepared for a Close-Open sequence.

The synchronism check or energizing check must be fulfilled within a set timeinterval, tSync. If it is not, or if other conditions are not met, the reclosing is interruptedand blocked.

The reclaim timer defines a time from the issue of the reclosing command, after whichthe reclosing function resets. Should a new trip occur during this time, it is treated asa continuation of the first fault. The reclaim timer is started when the CB closingcommand is given.

A number of outputs for Autoreclosing state control keeps track of the actual state inthe reclosing sequence.

ANDOR

OR

AND

tt1 1Ph

tt1 2Ph

tt1 3Ph HS

From logic forreclosingprograms

ANDAND OR

AND ttSync

"AR Open time" timers

1P2PTO

3PHSTO

Pulse AR

XBlockingCBREADY

initiateSYNC

3PT4TO3PT3TO3PT2TO3PT1TO3PHSTO

ORAND t

tReclaim

1

OR ttInhibit

INPROGR

PERMIT1PPREP3P

YInhibitY BlockingINHIBIT

Pulse AR (above)

en05000784.vsd

tt1 3Ph

3PT1TO

OR

1P2PTO

3PT5TO

Reclaim Timer On

0CL

COUNTER

AR StateControl

Shot 0

R

12345

Shot 1Shot 2Shot 3Shot 4Shot 5

LOGICreclosingprograms 1PT1

2PT13PHS3PT13PT23PT3

ORShot 0

startinitiate

TR3PTR2P

Shot 1Shot 2Shot 3Shot 4Shot 5 3PT4

3PT5

Figure 77: Reclosing Reclaim and Inhibit timers

Section 6Control


165

Pulsing of the CB closing commandThe CB closing command, CLOSECB is a pulse with a duration set by parametertPulse. For circuit-breakers without anti-pumping function, the close pulse cuttingdescribed below can be used. This is done by selecting the parameterCutPulse=On. In case of a new trip pulse, the closing command pulse is cut(interrupted). The minimum duration of the pulse is always 50 ms. See figure 78

When a reclosing command is issued, the appropriate reclosing operation counter isincremented. There is a counter for each type of reclosing and one for the total numberof reclosing commands issued.

tPulse

AND

AND

pulse

50 ms

**)

AND

AND

AND

AND

AND

CLOSECB

COUNT1P

COUNT2P

COUNT3P1

COUNT3P2

COUNT3P3

COUNT3P4

initiate

1PT1

2PT1

3PT1

3PT2

3PT3

3PT4

**) Only if "CutPulse" = On

en05000785.vsd

AND COUNT3P5

COUNTAR

3PT5

RSTCOUNT

counter

counter

counter

counter

counter

counter

counter

counter

OR

Figure 78: Pulsing of closing command and driving the operation counters

Transient faultAfter the reclosing command the reclaim timer tReclaim starts running for the settime. If no tripping occurs within this time, the auto-reclosing will reset.

Permanent fault and reclosing unsuccessful signalIf a new trip occurs after the CB closing command, and a new input signal STARTor TRSOTF appears, the output UNSUCCL (unsuccessful closing) is set high. Thetimers for the first shot can no longer be started. Depending on the setting for thenumber of reclosing shots, further shots may be made or the reclosing sequence willbe ended. After the reclaim time has elapsed, the auto-reclosing function resets but

Section 6Control


REB 670

the CB remains open. The CB closed data at the CBPOS input will be missing.Because of this, the reclosing function will not be ready for a new reclosing cycle.

Normally the signal UNSUCCL appears when a new trip and start is received afterthe last reclosing shot has been made and the auto-reclosing function is blocked. Thesignal resets once the reclaim time has elapsed. The “unsuccessful“ signal can alsobe made to depend on CB position input. The parameter UnsucClByCBChk shouldthen be set to CBCheck, and a timer tUnsucCl should also be set. If the CB does notrespond to the closing command and does not close, but remains open, the outputUNSUCCL is set high after time tUnsucCl.

ANDOR

AND

SAND

ttUnsucCl

ANDOR

eno5000786.vsd

initiateblock start

UnsucClByCBchk = CBcheck

UNSUCCL

shot 0

Pulse AR (Closing)

CBPOS CBclosed

R

Figure 79: Issue of signal UNSUCCL, unsuccessful reclosing

Automatic continuation of the reclosing sequenceThe auto-reclosing function can be programmed to proceed to the following reclosingshots (if selected) even if the start signals are not received from the protectionfunctions, but the breaker is still not closed. This is done by setting parameterAutoCont = On and tAutoContWait to the required delay for the function to proceedwithout a new start.

Section 6Control


167

AND

AND

AND

ttAutoContWait

OR

ORSTART

CBPOS

initiate

en05000787.vsd

CLOSECBS

R

Q

CBClosed

Figure 80: Automatic proceeding of shot 2 to 5

Start of reclosing from CB open informationIf a user wants to apply starting auto-reclosing from CB open position instead of fromprotection trip signals, the function offers such a possibility. This starting mode isselected by a setting parameter StartByCBOpen = On. One needs then to blockreclosing at all manual trip operations. Typically one also set CBAuxContType =NormClosed and connect a CB auxiliary contact of type NC (normally closed, 52b)to inputs CBPOS and START. When the signal changes from CB closed to CB openan auto-reclosing start pulse is generated and latched in the function, subject to theusual checks. Then the reclosing sequence continues as usual. One needs to connectsignals from manual tripping and other functions, which shall prevent reclosing, tothe input INHIBIT.

Section 6Control


REB 670

en05000788.vsd

AND

AND

AND

AND

1

³1100 ms

100 ms

StartByCBOpen = On

START

STARTHSstart

Figure 81: Pulsing of the start inputs at "StartByCBOpen=On"

6.1.2.6 Time sequence diagrams

Some examples of the timing of internal and external signals at typical transient andpermanent faults are shown below in figures 82 to 85.

CB READY

Fault

SUCCL

PREP3P

CLOSE CB

ACTIVE

1PT1

INPROG

READY

SYNCSTART

CB POS Closed

(Trip)

Open Closed

tPulset1 1Ph

tReclaim

Time

en04000196.vsd

Figure 82: Transient single-phase fault. Single -phase reclosing

Section 6Control


169

CB READY

Fault

UNSUCCL

ACTIVE

3PT2

3PT1

INPROGR

READY

SYNCTR3P

START

CB POS Closed

(Trip)

Time

en04000197.vsd

PREP3P

CLOSE CB

Open C Open C

t1 3Ph

tPulse

t2 3Ph

tPulse

tReclaim

Figure 83: Permanent fault. Three-phase trip. Two-shot reclosing

Section 6Control


REB 670

AR01-CBREADY(CO)

Fault

AR01-UNSUC

AR01-T2

AR01-T1

AR01-1PT1

AR01-INPROGR

AR01-READY

AR01-SYNC

AR01-TR3P

AR01-START

AR01-CBCLOSED

en04000198.vsd

AR01-P3P

AR01-CLOSECB t1s

tReclaim

Figure 84: Permanent single-phase fault. Program 1/2/3ph, single-phasesingle-shot reclosing

AR01-CBREADY(CO)

Fault

AR01-UNSUC

AR01-T2

AR01-T1

AR01-1PT1

AR01-INPROGR

AR01-READY

AR01-SYNC

AR01-TR3P

AR01-START

AR01-CBCLOSED

en04000199.vsd

AR01-P3P

AR01-CLOSECB t1st2

tReclaim

Figure 85: Permanent single-phase fault. Program 1ph + 3ph or 1/2ph + 3ph,two-shot reclosing

Section 6Control


171


SMBRRECAR01-

ONOFFBLKONBLKOFFRESETINHIBITSTARTSTARTHSTRSOTFSKIPHSTR2PTR3PTHOLHOLDCBREADYCBPOSPLCLOSTSYNCWAITRSTCOUNT

BLOCKEDSETONREADYACTIVESUCCL

UNSUCCLINPROGR

1PT12PT13PT13PT23PT33PT43PT5

PERMIT1PPREP3P

CLOSECBWFMASTER

COUNT1PCOUNT2P

COUNT3P1COUNT3P2COUNT3P3COUNT3P4COUNT3P5COUNTAR

en04000402.vsd

Figure 86: AR function block


Table 97: Input signals for the SMBRREC_79 (AR01-) function block

Signal DescriptionON Switches the AR on (at Operation = ExternalCtrl)

OFF Switches the AR off (at Operation = ExternalCtrl)

BLKON Sets the AR in blocked state

BLKOFF Releases the AR from the blocked state

RESET Resets the AR to initial conditions

INHIBIT Interrupts and inhibits reclosing sequence

START Reclosing sequence starts by a protection trip signal

STARTHS Start HS reclosing without SC: t13PhHS

TRSOTF Makes AR to continue to shots 2-5 at a trip from SOTF

SKIPHS Will skip the high speed shot and continue on delayed shots.

TR2P Signal to the AR that a two-phase tripping occurred

TR3P Signal to the AR that a three-phase tripping occurred

THOLHOLD Hold the AR in wait state

CBREADY CB must be ready for CO/OCO operation to allow start / close

CBPOS Status of the circuit breaker Closed/Open

PLCLOST Power line carrier or other form of permissive sigÂnal lost

SYNC Synchronizing check fulfilled (for 3Ph attempts)

WAIT Wait for master (in Multi-breaker arrangements)

RSTCOUNT Resets all counters

Section 6Control


REB 670

Table 98: Output signals for the SMBRREC_79 (AR01-) function block

Signal DescriptionBLOCKED The AR is in blocked state

SETON The AR operation is switched on, operative

READY Indicates that the AR function is ready for a new sequence

ACTIVE Reclosing sequence in progress

SUCCL Activated if CB closes during the time tUnsucCl

UNSUCCL Reclosing unsuccessful, signal resets after the reclaim time

INPROGR Reclosing shot in progress, activated during open time

1PT1 Single-phase reclosing is in progress, shot 1

2PT1 Two-phase reclosing is in progress, shot 1

3PT1 Three-phase reclosing in progress, shot 1





PERMIT1P Permit single-phase trip, inverse signal to PREP3P

PREP3P Prepare three-phase trip, control of the next trip operation

CLOSECB Closing command for CB

WFMASTER Signal to Slave issued by Master for sequential reclosing

COUNT1P Counting the number of single-phase reclosing shots

COUNT2P Counting the number of two-phase reclosing shots

COUNT3P1 Counting the number of three-phase reclosing shot 1





COUNTAR Counting total number of reclosing shots


Section 6Control


173

Table 99: Parameter group settings for the SMBRREC_79 (AR01-) function


External ctrlOn

- External ctrl - 0 = Off, 1 =ExternalCtrl, 2 = On

NoOfShots 12345

- 1 - Max number ofreclosing shots 1-5

FirstShot 3 phase1/2/3ph1/2ph1ph+1*2ph1/2ph+1*3ph1ph+1*2/3ph

- 1/2/3ph - Restriction of faulttype for shot 1

StartByCBOpen OffOn

- Off - To be set ON if AR isto be started by CBopen position

CBAuxContType NormClosedNormOpen

- NormOpen - Select the CB auxcontact type NC/NOfor CBPOS input

CBReadyType COOCO

- CO - Select type of circuitbreaker ready signalCO/OCO

t1 1Ph 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 1.000 s Open time for shot 1,single-phase

t1 2Ph 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 1.000 s Open time for shot 1,two-phase

t1 3Ph 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 6.000 s Open time for shot 1,delayed reclosing 3ph

t1 3PhHS 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.400 s Open time for shot 1,high speed reclosing3ph

t2 3Ph 0.00 - 6000.00 0.01 30.00 s Open time for shot 2,three-phase




tReclaim 0.00 - 6000.00 0.01 60.00 s Duration of thereclaim time

tSync 0.00 - 6000.00 0.01 30.00 s Maximum wait timefor synchrocheck OK

Extended t1 OffOn

- Off - Extended open timefor loss of permissivechannel

tExtended t1 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.400 s Open time extendedby this value ifExtended t1 is true


Section 6Control


REB 670

Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptiontInhibit 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 5.000 s Inhibit reclosing reset

time

tTrip 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.200 s Maximum trip pulseduration

CutPulse OffOn

- Off - Shorten closing pulseat a new trip Off/On

tPulse 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.200 s Duration of the circuitbreaker closing pulse

Follow CB OffOn

- Off - Advance to next shotif CB has been closedduring dead time

tCBClosedMin 0.00 - 6000.00 0.01 5.00 s Min time that CB mustbe closed before newsequence allows

AutoCont OffOn

- Off - Continue with nextreclosing-shot ifbreaker did not close

tAutoContWait 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 2.000 s Wait time after closecommand beforeproceeding to nextshot

UnsucClByCBChk NoCBCheckCB check

- NoCBCheck - Unsuccessful closingsignal obtained bychecking CB position

BlockByUnsucCl OffOn

- Off - Block AR atunsuccessfulreclosing

tUnsucCl 0.00 - 6000.00 0.01 30.00 s Wait time for CBbefore indicatingunsuccessful/successful

Priority NoneLowHigh

- None - Priority selectionbetween adjacentterminals None/Low/High

tWaitForMaster 0.00 - 6000.00 0.01 60.00 s Maximum wait timefor release fromMaster


Section 6Control


175

Table 100: Autorecloser (RREC, 79)

Function Range or value AccuracyNumber of autoreclosing shots 1 - 5 -

Number of autoreclosing programs 8 -

Autoreclosing open time:shot 1 - t1 1Phshot 1 - t1 2Phshot 1 - t1 3PhHSshot 1 - t1 3PhDld

(0.000-60.000) s

± 0.5% ± 10 ms

shot 2 - t2shot 3 - t3shot 4 - t4shot 5 - t5

(0.00-6000.00) s

Extended autorecloser open time (0.000-60.000) s

Autorecloser maximum wait time forsync

(0.00-6000.00) s

Maximum trip pulse duration (0.000-60.000) s

Inhibit reset time (0.000-60.000) s

Reclaim time (0.00-6000.00) s

Minimum time CB must be closedbefore AR becomes ready forautoreclosing cycle

(0.00-6000.00) s

Circuit breaker closing pulse length (0.000-60.000) s

CB check time before unsuccessful (0.00-6000.00) s

Wait for master release (0.00-6000.00) s

Wait time after close command beforeproceeding to next shot

(0.000-60.000) s

6.2 Logic rotating switch for function selection andLHMI presentation (GGIO)

6.2.1 IntroductionThe Logic rotating switch for function selection and LHMI presentation (LSR, or theselector switch function block, as it is also known) is used within the CAP tool inorder to get a selector switch functionality similar with the one provided by a hardwareselector switch. Hardware selector switches are used extensively by utilities, in orderto have different functions operating on pre-set values. Hardware switches arehowever sources for maintenance issues, lower system reliability and extendedpurchase portfolio. The virtual selector switches eliminate all these problems.

6.2.2 Principle of operationThe selector switch can be operated either from the control menu on the Local HMIor with logic prepared in the configuration.

Section 6Control


REB 670

The LSR has two operating inputs – UP and DOWN. When a signal is received onthe UP input, the block will activate the output next to the present activated output,in ascending order (if the present activated output is 3 – for example and one operatesthe UP input, then the output 4 will be activated). When a signal is received on theDOWN input, the block will activate the output next to the present activated output,in descending order (if the present activated output is 3 – for example and one operatesthe DOWN input, then the output 2 will be activated). Depending on the outputsettings the output signals can be steady or pulsed. In case of steady signals, in caseof UP or DOWN operation, the previously active output will be deactivated. Also,depending on the settings one can have a time delay between the UP or DOWNactivation signal positive front and the output activation.

Repeated down or up when end position has been reached will give repeated pulseson the selected step. This can e.g. be used to have multiple activations on two positionswitches.

One can block the function operation, by activating the BLOCK input. In this case,the present position will be kept and further operation will be blocked. The operatorplace (local or remote) is specified through the PSTO input.

The LSR function block has also an integer value output, that generates the actualposition number. The positions names are fully settable by the user.

Section 6Control


177


SLGGIOSL01-

BLOCKPSTOUPDOWN

SWPOS01SWPOS02SWPOS03SWPOS04SWPOS05SWPOS06SWPOS07SWPOS08SWPOS09SWPOS10SWPOS11SWPOS12SWPOS13SWPOS14SWPOS15SWPOS16SWPOS17SWPOS18SWPOS19SWPOS20SWPOS21SWPOS22SWPOS23SWPOS24SWPOS25SWPOS26SWPOS27SWPOS28SWPOS29SWPOS30SWPOS31SWPOS32SWPOSN

INSTNAMENAME1NAME2NAME3NAME4NAME5NAME6NAME7NAME8NAME9

NAME10NAME11NAME12NAME13NAME14NAME15NAME16NAME17NAME18NAME19NAME20NAME21NAME22NAME23NAME24NAME25NAME26NAME27NAME28NAME29NAME30NAME31NAME32

en05000658.vsd

Figure 87: LRS1 function block, example for LRS1-LRS6

Section 6Control


REB 670


Table 101: Input signals for the SSGGIO (LRS1-) function block

Signal DescriptionBLOCK Block of function.

PSTO Operator place selection.

UP Binary "UP" command

DOWN Binary "DOWN" command

Table 102: Output signals for the SSGGIO (LRS1-) function block

Signal DescriptionSWPOS01 Selector switch position 1

SWPOS02 Selector switch position 2




























Section 6Control


179

Signal DescriptionSWPOS29 Selector switch position 29




SWPOSN Switch position (integer).

NAME01 User define string for position 1

































Section 6Control


REB 670

Table 103: General settings for the SSGGIO (LRS1-) function

Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionStopAtExtremes Disabled

Enabled- Disabled - Stop when min or max

position is reached

Table 104: Parameter group settings for the SSGGIO (LRS1-) function


On- Off - Operation Off/On

NrPos 2 - 32 1 32 - Number of positionsin the switch

OutType PulsedSteady

- Steady - Output type, steady(=1) or pulse (=0)

tPulse 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.200 s Operate pulseduration, in [s]

tDelay 0.000 - 60000.000 0.010 0.000 s Time delay on theoutput, in [s]

6.3 Generic double point function block (DPGGIO)

6.3.1 IntroductionThe DPGGIO function block is used to send three logical signals to other systems orequipment in the substation. It is especially conceived to be used in the interlockingand reservation station-wide logics.

6.3.2 Principle of operationUpon receiving the input signals, the DPGGIO function block will send the signalsover IEC 61850-8-1 (via its non-transparent-to-CAP user outputs) to the equipmentor system that requests these signals. To be able to get the signals, one must use othertools, described in the Application Manual, Chapter 2: “Engineering of the IED” anddefine which function block in which equipment or system should receive thisinformation.


DPGGIODP01-

OPENCLOSEVALID

POSITION

en07000200.vsd

Figure 88: DP function block

Section 6Control


181


Table 105: Input signals for the DPGGIO (DP01-) function block

Signal DescriptionOPEN Open indication

CLOSE Close indication

VALID Valid indication

Table 106: Output signals for the DPGGIO (DP01-) function block

Signal DescriptionPOSITION Double point indication


Section 6Control


REB 670

Section 7 Logic

About this chapterThis chapter describes primarily tripping and trip logic functions. The way thefunctions work, their setting parameters, function blocks, input and output signalsand technical data are included for each function.

7.1 Configurable logic blocks (LLD)

7.1.1 IntroductionA high number of logic blocks and timers are available for user to adapt theconfiguration to the specific application needs.

7.1.2 Inverter function block (INV)

INVI001-

INPUT OUT

en04000404.vsd

Figure 89: INV function block

Table 107: Input signals for the INV (I001-) function block

Signal DescriptionINPUT Input

Table 108: Output signals for the INV (I001-) function block

Signal DescriptionOUT Output

7.1.3 OR function block (OR)The OR function is used to form general combinatory expressions with booleanvariables. The OR function block has six inputs and two outputs. One of the outputsis inverted.

Section 7Logic


183

ORO001-

INPUT1INPUT2INPUT3INPUT4INPUT5INPUT6

OUTNOUT

en04000405.vsd

Figure 90: OR function block

Table 109: Input signals for the OR (O001-) function block

Signal DescriptionINPUT1 Input 1 to OR gate

INPUT2 Input 2 to OR gate





Table 110: Output signals for the OR (O001-) function block

Signal DescriptionOUT Output from OR gate

NOUT Inverted output from OR gate

7.1.4 AND function block (AND)The AND function is used to form general combinatory expressions with booleanvariables.The AND function block has four inputs and two outputs. One of the inputsand one of the outputs are inverted.

ANDA001-

INPUT1INPUT2INPUT3INPUT4N

OUTNOUT

en04000406.vsd

Figure 91: AND function block

Section 7Logic


REB 670

Table 111: Input signals for the AND (A001-) function block

Signal DescriptionINPUT1 Input 1

INPUT2 Input 2

INPUT3 Input 3

INPUT4N Input 4 inverted

Table 112: Output signals for the AND (A001-) function block


NOUT Output inverted

7.1.5 Timer function block (Timer)The function block TIMER has drop-out and pick-up delayed outputs related to theinput signal. The timer has a settable time delay (parameter T).

TimerTM01-

INPUTT

ONOFF

en04000378.vsd

Figure 92: TM function block

Table 113: Input signals for the Timer (TM01-) function block

Signal DescriptionINPUT Input to timer

Table 114: Output signals for the Timer (TM01-) function block

Signal DescriptionON Output from timer , pick-up delayed

OFF Output from timer, drop-out delayed

Table 115: General settings for the Timer (TM01-) function

Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionT 0.000 - 90000.000 0.001 0.000 s Time delay of function

Section 7Logic


185

7.1.6 Pulse timer function block (PULSE)The pulse function can be used, for example, for pulse extensions or limiting ofoperation of outputs. The pulse timer TP has a settable length.

PulseTP01-

INPUT OUT

en04000407.vsd

Figure 93: PULSE function block

Table 116: Input signals for the Pulse (TP01-) function block

Signal DescriptionINPUT Input to pulse timer

Table 117: Output signals for the Pulse (TP01-) function block

Signal DescriptionOUT Output from pulse timer

Table 118: General settings for the Pulse (TP01-) function

Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionT 0.000 - 90000.000 0.001 0.010 s Time delay of function

7.1.7 Exclusive OR function block (XOR)The exclusive OR function XOR is used to generate combinatory expressions withboolean variables. The function block XOR has two inputs and two outputs. One ofthe outputs is inverted. The output signal is 1 if the input signals are different and 0if they are equal.

XORXO01-

INPUT1INPUT2

OUTNOUT

en04000409.vsd

Figure 94: XOR function block

Table 119: Input signals for the XOR (XO01-) function block

Signal DescriptionINPUT1 Input 1 to XOR gate

INPUT2 Input 2 to XOR gate

Section 7Logic


REB 670

Table 120: Output signals for the XOR (XO01-) function block

Signal DescriptionOUT Output from XOR gate

NOUT Inverted output from XOR gate

7.1.8 Set-reset with memory function block (SRM)The Set-Reset function SRM is a flip-flop with memory that can set or reset an outputfrom two inputs respectively. Each SRM function block has two outputs, where oneis inverted. The memory setting controls if the flip-flop after a power interruptionwill return the state it had before or if it will be reset.

SRMSM01-

SETRESET

OUTNOUT

en04000408.vsd

Figure 95: SM function block

Table 121: Input signals for the SRM (SM01-) function block

Signal DescriptionSET Set input

RESET Reset input

Table 122: Output signals for the SRM (SM01-) function block


NOUT Output inverted

Table 123: Parameter group settings for the SRM (SM01-) function

Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionMemory Off

On- Off - Operating mode of

the memory function

7.1.9 Controllable gate function block (GT)The GT function block is used for controlling if a signal should be able to pass fromthe input to the output or not depending on a setting.

Section 7Logic


187

GTGT01-

INPUT OUT

en04000410.vsd

Figure 96: GT function block

Table 124: Input signals for the GT (GT01-) function block

Signal DescriptionINPUT Input to gate

Table 125: Output signals for the GT (GT01-) function block

Signal DescriptionOUT Output from gate

Table 126: Parameter group settings for the GT (GT01-) function



7.1.10 Settable timer function block (TS)The function block TS timer has outputs for delayed input signal at drop-out and atpick-up. The timer has a settable time delay. It also has an Operation setting On, Offthat controls the operation of the timer.

TimerSetTS01-

INPUT ONOFF

en04000411.vsd

Figure 97: TS function block

Table 127: Input signals for the TimerSet (TS01-) function block

Signal DescriptionINPUT Input to timer

Table 128: Output signals for the TimerSet (TS01-) function block

Signal DescriptionON Output from timer, pick-up delayed

OFF Output from timer, drop-out delayed

Section 7Logic


REB 670

Table 129: Parameter group settings for the TimerSet (TS01-) function



t 0.000 - 90000.000 0.001 0.000 s Delay for settabletimer n


Table 130: Configurable logic blocks

Logic block Quantity with update rate Range or value Accuracyfast medium normal

LogicAND 90 90 100 - -

LogicOR 90 90 100 - -

LogicXOR 15 15 10 - -

LogicInverter 45 45 50 - -

LogicSRMemory 15 15 10 - -

LogicGate 15 15 10 - -

LogicTimer 15 15 10 (0.000–90000.000) s

± 0.5% ± 10ms

LogicPulseTimer 15 15 10 (0.000–90000.000) s

± 0.5% ± 10ms

LogicTimerSet 15 15 10 (0.000–90000.000) s

± 0.5% ± 10ms

LogicLoopDelay 15 15 10 (0.000–90000.000) s

± 0.5% ± 10ms

7.2 Fixed signal function block (FIXD)

7.2.1 IntroductionThe fixed signals function block generates a number of pre-set (fixed) signals thatcan be used in the configuration of an IED, either for forcing the unused inputs in theother function blocks to a certain level/value, or for creating a certain logic.

7.2.2 Principle of operationThere are eight outputs from the FIXD function block: OFF is a boolean signal, fixedto OFF (boolean 0) value; ON is a boolean signal, fixed to ON (boolean 1) value;INTZERO is an integer number, fixed to integer value 0; INTONE is an integernumber, fixed to integer value 1; REALZERO is a floating point real number, fixedto 0.0 value; STRNULL is a string, fixed to an empty string (null) value; ZEROSMPL

Section 7Logic


189

is a 32-bit integer, fixed to 0 value; GRP_OFF is a 32-bit integer, fixed to 0 value;The function does not allow any settings and therefore it’s not present in PCM 600.For examples on how to use each type of output in the configuration, please read theApplication Manual.


FixedSignalsFIXD-

OFFON

INTZEROINTONE

REALZEROSTRNULL

ZEROSMPLGRP_OFF

en05000445.vsd

Figure 98: FIXD function block


Table 131: Output signals for the FixedSignals (FIXD-) function block

Signal DescriptionOFF Boolean signal fixed off

ON Boolean signal fixed on

INTZERO Integer signal fixed zero

INTONE Integer signal fixed one

REALZERO Real signal fixed zero

STRNULL String signal with no characters

ZEROSMPL Channel id for zero sample

GRP_OFF Group signal fixed off


Section 7Logic


REB 670

Section 8 Monitoring

About this chapterThis chapter describes the functions that handle measurements, events anddisturbances. The way the functions work, their setting parameters, function blocks,input and output signals, and technical data are included for each function.

8.1 Measurements (MMXU)

Function block name: SVRx- IEC 60617 graphical symbol: ANSI number:

IEC 61850 logical node name:CVMMXU

Function block name: CPxx IEC 60617 graphical symbol: ANSI number:

IEC 61850 logical node name:CMMXU

Function block name: VPx- IEC 60617 graphical symbol: ANSI number:

IEC 61850 logical node name:VMMXU

Function block name: CSQx IEC 60617 graphical symbol: ANSI number:

IEC 61850 logical node name:CMSQI

Section 8Monitoring


191

Function block name: VSQx IEC 60617 graphical symbol: ANSI number:

IEC 61850 logical node name:VMSQI

8.1.1 IntroductionMeasurement functions is used for power system measurement, supervision andreporting to the local HMI, monitoring tool within PCM 600 or to station level (i.e.IEC61850). The possibility to continuously monitor measured values of active power,reactive power, currents, voltages, frequency, power factor etc. is vital for efficientproduction, transmission and distribution of electrical energy. It provides to thesystem operator fast and easy overview of the present status of the power system.Additionally it can be used during testing and commissioning of protection andcontrol IEDs in order to verify proper operation and connection of instrumenttransformers (i.e. CTs & VTs). During normal service by periodic comparison of themeasured value from the IED with other independent meters the proper operation ofthe IED analog measurement chain can be verified. Finally it can be used to verifyproper direction orientation for distance or directional overcurrent protectionfunction.

The available measured values of an IED are depending on the actualhardware (TRM) and the logic configuration made in PCM 600.

All measured values can be supervised with four settable limits, i.e. low-low limit,low limit, high limit and high-high limit. A zero clamping reduction is also supported,i.e the measured value below a settable limit is forced to zero which reduces the impactof noise in the inputs.

Dead-band supervision can be used to report measured signal value to station levelwhen change in measured value is above set threshold limit or time integral of allchanges since the last time value updating exceeds the threshold limit. Measure valuecan also be based on periodic reporting.

The measuring function, SVR, provides the following power system quantities:

• P, Q and S: three phase active, reactive and apparent power• PF: power factor• U: phase-to-phase voltage magnitude• I: phase current magnitude• F: power system frequency

The measuring functions CP and VP provides physical quantities:

Section 8Monitoring


REB 670

• I: phase currents (magnitude and angle)• U: phase-phase voltages (magnitude and angle)

It is possible to calibrate the measuring function above to get class 0.5 presentation.This is accomplished by angle and amplitude compensation at 5, 30 and 100% ofrated current and voltage.

The power system quantities provided, depends on the actualhardware, (TRM) and the logic configuration made in PCM 600.

The measuring functions CSQ and VSQ provides sequential quantities:

• I: sequence currents (positive, zero, negative sequence, magnitude and angle)• U: sequence voltages (positive, zero and negative sequence, magnitude and

angle).

The SVR function calculates three-phase power quantities by using fundamentalfrequency phasors (i.e. DFT values) of the measured current and voltage signals. Themeasured power quantities are available either as instantaneously calculatedquantities or averaged values over a period of time (i.e. low pass filtered) dependingon the selected settings.

The IED can be provided with up to 3 SVR-, 10 CP-, 5 VP-, 3 CSQ- and 3 VSQ-measurement functions.


8.1.2.1 Measurement supervision

The protection, control, and monitoring IEDs have functionality to measure andfurther process information for currents and voltages obtained from the pre-processing blocks. The number of processed alternate measuring quantities dependson the type of IED and built-in options.

The information on measured quantities is available for the user at different locations:

• Locally by means of the local HMI• Remotely using the monitoring tool within PCM 600 or over the station bus (IEC

61850-8)• Internally by connecting the analog output signals to the Disturbance Report

function

Phase angle referenceAll phase angles are presented in relation to a defined reference channel. Theparameter PhaseAngleRef defines the reference, see section "Analog inputs".

Section 8Monitoring


193

Zero point clampingMeasured value below zero point clamping limit is forced to zero. This allows thenoise in the input signal to be ignored. The zero point clamping limit is a generalsetting (XZeroDb where X equals S, P, Q, PF, U, I, F, IL1-3, UL12-31, I1, I2, 3I0,U1, U2 or 3U0).). Observe that this measurement supervision zero point clampingmight be overridden by the zero point clamping used for the service values withinSVR.

Continuous monitoring of the measured quantityUsers can continuously monitor the measured quantity available in each functionblock by means of four built-in operating thresholds, see figure 99. The monitoringhas two different modes of operating:

• Overfunction, when the measured current exceeds the High limit (XHiLim) orHigh-high limit (XHiHiLim) pre-set values

• Underfunction, when the measured current decreases under the Low limit(XLowLim) or Low-low limit (XLowLowLim) pre-set values.

X_RANGE is illustrated in figure 99.

en05000657.vsd

X_RANGE= 1

X_RANGE = 3

X_RANGE=0

Hysteresis

High-high limit

High limit

Low limit

Low-low limit

X_RANGE=2

X_RANGE=4

Y

tX_RANGE=0

Figure 99: Presentation of operating limits

Each analog output has one corresponding supervision level output (X_RANGE).The output signal is an integer in the interval 0-4 (0: Normal, 1: High limit exceeded,3: High-high limit exceeded, 2: below Low limit and 4: below Low-low limit). Theoutput may be connected to a measurement expander block (XP) to get measurementsupervision as binary signals.

The logical value of the functional output signals changes according to figure 99.

The user can set the hysteresis (XLimHyst), which determines the difference betweenthe operating and reset value at each operating point, in wide range for each measuring

Section 8Monitoring


REB 670

channel separately. The hysteresis is common for all operating values within onechannel.

Actual value of the measured quantityThe actual value of the measured quantity is available locally and remotely. Themeasurement is continuous for each measured separately, but the reporting of thevalue to the higher levels depends on the selected reporting mode. The followingbasic reporting modes are available:

• Cyclic reporting (Cyclic)• Amplitude dead-band supervision (Dead band)• Integral dead-band supervision (Int deadband)

Cyclic reportingThe cyclic reporting of measured value is performed according to chosen setting(XRepTyp). The measuring channel reports the value independent of amplitude orintegral dead-band reporting.

en05000500.vsd

Valu

e 1

Y

t

Valu

e 2

Valu

e 3

Valu

e 4

Value Reported(1st)

Value Reported

Valu

e 5

Value Reported

Y1

Y2

Y5

Value Reported Value Reported

Y3

Y4

(*)Set value for t: XDbRepInt

t (*) t (*) t (*) t (*)

Figure 100: Periodic reporting

Amplitude dead-band supervisionIf a measuring value is changed, compared to the last reported value, and the changeis larger than the ±ΔY predefined limits that are set by user (XZeroDb), then themeasuring channel reports the new value to a higher level, if this is detected by a newmeasured value. This limits the information flow to a minimum necessary.Figure 101 shows an example with the amplitude dead-band supervision. The pictureis simplified: the process is not continuous but the values are evaluated with a timeinterval of one execution cycle from each other.

Section 8Monitoring


195

99000529.vsd

Y

t

Value Reported(1st)

Value ReportedValue Reported

Y1

Y2

Y3

DYDY

DYDY

DYDY

Value Reported

Figure 101: Amplitude dead-band supervision reporting

After the new value is reported, the ±ΔY limits for dead-band are automatically setaround it. The new value is reported only if the measured quantity changes more thandefined by the ±ΔY set limits.

Integral dead-band reportingThe measured value is reported if the time integral of all changes exceeds the pre-setlimit (XZeroDb), figure 102, where an example of reporting with integral dead-bandsupervision is shown. The picture is simplified: the process is not continuous but thevalues are evaluated with a time interval of one execution cycle from each other.

The last value reported, Y1 in figure 102 serves as a basic value for furthermeasurement. A difference is calculated between the last reported and the newlymeasured value and is multiplied by the time increment (discrete integral). Theabsolute values of these integral values are added until the pre-set value is exceeded.This occurs with the value Y2 that is reported and set as a new base for the followingmeasurements (as well as for the values Y3, Y4 and Y5).

The integral dead-band supervision is particularly suitable for monitoring signals withsmall variations that can last for relatively long periods.

Section 8Monitoring


REB 670

99000530.vsd

Y

t

Value Reported(1st)

Y1

ValueReported

A1Y2

ValueReported

Y3

Y4

AValueReported

A2

Y5A3

A4A5 A7

A6

ValueReported

A2 >=pre-set value

A1 >=pre-set valueA >=

pre-set valueA3 + A4 + A5 + A6 + A7 >=pre-set value

Figure 102: Reporting with integral dead-band supervision

8.1.2.2 Service values (MMXU, SVR)

Mode of operationThe measurement function must be connected to three-phase current and three-phasevoltage input in the configuration tool (group signals), but it is capable to measureand calculate above mentioned quantities in nine different ways depending on theavailable VT inputs connected to the IED. The end user can freely select by aparameter setting, which one of the nine available measuring modes shall be usedwithin the function. Available options are summarized in the following table:

Set value forparameter“Mode”

Formula used for complex, three-phase power calculation

Formula used for voltage andcurrent magnitude calculation

Comment

1 L1, L2, L3* * *

1 1 2 2 3 3= × + × + ×L L L L L LS U I U I U I 1 2 3

1 2 3

( ) / 3

( ) / 3

= + +

= + +

L L L

L L L

U U U U

I I I I

Used whenthree phase-to-earthvoltages areavailable

2 Arone* *

1 2 1 2 3 3= × - ×L L L L L LS U I U I 1 2 2 3

1 3

( ) / 2

( ) / 2

= +

= +

L L L L

L L

U U U

I I I

Used whenthree twophase-to-phasevoltages areavailable

3 PosSeq*3= × ×PosSeq PosSeqS U I 3= ×

=

PosSeq

PosSeq

U U

I I

Used whenonlysymmetricalthree phasepower shallbe measured

4 L1L2* *

1 2 1 2( )= × -L L L LS U I I 1 2

1 2( ) / 2

=

= +

L L

L L

U U

I I I

Used whenonly UL1L2phase-to-phase voltageis available


Section 8Monitoring


197

Set value forparameter“Mode”

Formula used for complex, three-phase power calculation

Formula used for voltage andcurrent magnitude calculation

Comment

5 L2L3* *

2 3 2 3( )= × -L L L LS U I I 2 3

2 3( ) / 2

=

= +

L L

L L

U U

I I I


6 L3L1* *

3 1 3 1( )= × -L L L LS U I I 3 1

3 1( ) / 2

=

= +

L L

L L

U U

I I I


7 L1*

1 13= × ×L LS U I 1

1

3= ×

=

L

L

U U

I I

Used whenonly UL1phase-to-earth voltageis available

8 L2*

2 23= × ×L LS U I 2

2

3= ×

=

L

L

U U

I I


9 L3*

3 33= × ×L LS U I 3

3

3= ×

=

L

L

U U

I I


* means complex conjugated value

It shall be noted that only in the first two operating modes (i.e. 1 & 2) the measurementfunction calculates exact three-phase power. In other operating modes (i.e. from 3 to9) it calculates the three-phase power under assumption that the power system is fullysymmetrical. Once the complex apparent power is calculated then the P, Q, S, & PFare calculated in accordance with the following formulas:

Re( )=P S(Equation 26)

Im( )=Q S(Equation 27)

2 2= = +S S P Q(Equation 28)

cos PPF Sj= =(Equation 29)

Section 8Monitoring


REB 670

Additionally to the power factor value the two binary output signals from the functionare provided which indicates the angular relationship between current and voltagephasors. Binary output signal ILAG is set to one when current phasor is laggingbehind voltage phasor. Binary output signal ILEAD is set to one when current phasoris leading the voltage phasor.

Each analog output has a corresponding supervision level output (X_RANGE). Theoutput signal is an integer in the interval 0-4, see section "Measurementsupervision".

Calibration of analog inputsMeasured currents and voltages used in the SVR function can be calibrated to getclass 0.5 measuring accuracy. This is achieved by amplitude and angle compensationat 5, 30 and 100% of rated current and voltage. The compensation below 5% andabove 100% is constant and linear in between, see example in figure 103.

100305

IAmpComp5

IAmpComp30

IAmpComp100

-10

-10

Amplitude compensation% of Ir

Measured current

% of Ir0-5%: Constant5-30-100%: Linear>100%: Constant

100305

IAngComp5IAngComp30

IAngComp100

-10

-10

Angle compensation

Degrees

Measured current

% of Ir

en05000652.vsd

Figure 103: Calibration curves

The first current and voltage phase in the group signals will be used as reference andthe amplitude and angle compensation will be used for related input signals.

Low pass filteringIn order to minimize the influence of the noise signal on the measurement it is possibleto introduce the recursive, low pass filtering of the measured values for P, Q, S, U, I& power factor. This will make slower measurement response to the step changes in

Section 8Monitoring


199

the measured quantity. Filtering is performed in accordance with the followingrecursive formula:

(1 )Old CalculatedX k X k X= × + - ×(Equation 30)

where:

X is a new measured value (i.e. P, Q, S, U, I or PF) to be given out from the function

XOld is the measured value given from the measurement function in previous execution cycle

XCalculated is the new calculated value in the present execution cycle

k is settable parameter by the end user which influence the filter properties

Default value for parameter k is 0.00. With this value the new calculated value isimmediately given out without any filtering (i.e. without any additional delay). Whenk is set to value bigger than 0, the filtering is enabled. Appropriate value of k shall bedetermined separately for every application. Some typical value for k =0.14.

Zero point clampingIn order to avoid erroneous measurements when either current or voltage signal is notpresent, it is possible for the end user to set the magnitude IGenZeroDb level forcurrent and voltage measurement UGenZeroDb is forced to zero. When either currentor voltage measurement is forced to zero automatically the measured values for power(i.e. P, Q & S) and power factor are forced to zero as well. Since the measurementsupervision functionality, included in the SVR function, is using these values the zeroclamping will influence the subsequent supervision (observe the possibility to do zeropoint clamping within measurement supervision, see section "Measurementsupervision").

Compensation facilityIn order to compensate for small magnitude and angular errors in the completemeasurement chain (i.e. CT error, VT error, IED input transformer errors etc.) it ispossible to perform on site calibration of the power measurement. This is achievedby setting the complex constant which is then internally used within the function tomultiply the calculated complex apparent power S. This constant is set as magnitude(i.e. setting parameter PowAmpFact, default value 1.000) and angle (i.e. settingparameter PowAngComp, default value 0.0 degrees). Default values for these twoparameters are done in such way that they do not influence internally calculated value(i.e. complex constant has default value 1). In this way calibration, for specificoperating range (e.g. around rated power) can be done at site. However to performthis calibration it is necessary to have external power meter of the high accuracy classavailable.

DirectionalityIn CT earthing parameter is set as described in section "Analog inputs", active andreactive power will be measured always towards the protected object. This is shownin the following figure 104.

Section 8Monitoring


REB 670

Busbar

ProtectedObject

P Q

en05000373.vsd

Figure 104: Internal IED directionality convention for P & Q measurements

That practically means that active and reactive power will have positive values whenthey flow from the busbar towards the protected object and they will have negativevalues when they flow from the protected object towards the busbar.

In some application, like for example when power is measured on the secondary sideof the power transformer it might be desirable, from the end client point of view, tohave actually opposite directional convention for active and reactive powermeasurements. This can be easily achieved by setting parameter PowAngComp tovalue of 180.0 degrees. With such setting the active and reactive power will havepositive values when they flow from the protected object towards the busbar.

FrequencyFrequency is actually not calculated within measurement block. It is simply obtainedfrom the pre-processing block and then just given out from the measurement blockas an output.

8.1.2.3 Current Phasors (MMXU, CP)

The CP function must be connected to three-phase current input in the configurationtool to be operable. Currents handled in the function can be calibrated to get class 0.5measuring accuracy for internal use, on the outputs and IEC 61850. This is achievedby amplitude and angle compensation at 5, 30 and 100% of rated current. Thecompensation below 5% and above 100% is constant and linear in between, seefigure 103 above.

Phase currents (amplitude and angle) are available on the outputs and each amplitudeoutput has a corresponding supervision level output (ILx_RANG). The supervisionoutput signal is an integer in the interval 0-4, see section "Measurementsupervision".

Section 8Monitoring


201

8.1.2.4 Voltage phasors (MMXU, VP)

The VP function must be connected to three-phase voltage input in the configurationtool to be operable. Voltages are handled in the same way as currents when it comesto 0.5 calibrations, see above.

Phase to phase voltages (amplitude and angle) are available on the outputs and eachamplitude output has a corresponding supervision level output (ULxy_RANG). Thesupervision output signal is an integer in the interval 0-4, see section "Measurementsupervision".

8.1.2.5 Sequence quantities (MSQI, CSQ and VSQ)

The measurement functions must be connected to three-phase current (CSQ) orvoltage (VSQ) input in the configuration tool to be operable. No outputs, but XRANG,are calculated within the measuring block and it is not possible to calibrate the signals.Input signals are obtained from the pre-processing block and transferred tocorresponding output.

Positive, negative and three times zero sequence quantities are available on theoutputs (voltage and current, amplitude and angle). Each amplitude output has acorresponding supervision level output (XRANGE). The output signal is an integerin the interval 0-4, see section "Measurement supervision".

8.1.3 Function blockThe available function blocks of an IED are depending on the actual hardware (TRM)and the logic configuration made in PCM 600.

CVMMXUSVR1-

I3PU3P

SS_RANGE

P_INSTP

P_RANGEQ_INST

QQ_RANGE

PFPF_RANGE

ILAGILEAD

UU_RANGE

II_RANGE

FF_RANGE

en05000772.vsd

Figure 105: SVR function block

Section 8Monitoring


REB 670

CMMXUCP01-

I3P IL1IL1RANGIL1ANGL

IL2IL2RANGIL2ANGL

IL3IL3RANGIL3ANGL

en05000699.vsd

Figure 106: CP function block

en05000701.vsd

VMMXUVP01-

U3P UL12UL12RANG

UL23UL23RANG

UL31UL31RANG

Figure 107: VP function block

en05000703.vsd

CMSQICSQ1-

I3P 3I03I0RANG

I1I1RANG

I2I2RANG

Figure 108: CS function block

en05000704.vsd

VMSQIVSQ1-

U3P 3U03U0RANG

U1U1RANG

U2U2RANG

Figure 109: VS function block


Table 132: Input signals for the CVMMXU (SVR1-) function block


U3P Group signal for voltage input

Section 8Monitoring


203

Table 133: Output signals for the CVMMXU (SVR1-) function block

Signal DescriptionS Apparent Power magnitude of deadband value

S_RANGE Apparent Power range

P Active Power magnitude of deadband value

P_RANGE Active Power range

Q Active Power magnitude of deadband value

Q_RANGE Reactive Power range

PF Power Factor magnitude of deadband value

PF_RANGE Power Factor range

ILAG Current is lagging voltage

ILEAD Current is leading voltage

U Calculate voltage magnitude of deadband value

U_RANGE Calcuate voltage range

I Calculated current magnitude of deadband value

I_RANGE Calculated current range

F System frequency magnitude of deadband value

F_RANGE System frequency range

Table 134: Input signals for the CMMXU (CP01-) function block

Signal DescriptionI3P Group connection abstract block 1

Table 135: Output signals for the CMMXU (CP01-) function block

Signal DescriptionIL1 IL1 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value

IL1RANG IL1 Amplitude range

IL2 IL2 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value


IL3 IL3 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value


Table 136: Input signals for the VMMXU (VP01-) function block

Signal DescriptionU3P Group connection abstract block 2

Section 8Monitoring


REB 670

Table 137: Output signals for the VMMXU (VP01-) function block

Signal DescriptionUL12 UL12 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value

UL12RANG UL12 Amplitude range

UL23 UL23 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value


UL31 UL31 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value


Table 138: Input signals for the CMSQI (CSQ1-) function block

Signal DescriptionI3P Group connection abstract block 3

Table 139: Output signals for the CMSQI (CSQ1-) function block

Signal Description3I0 3I0 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value

3I0RANG 3I0 Amplitude range

I1 I1 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value

I1RANG I1 Amplitude range

I2 I2 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value

I2RANG I2 Amplitude range

Table 140: Input signals for the VMSQI (VSQ1-) function block

Signal DescriptionU3P Group connection abstract block 4

Table 141: Output signals for the VMSQI (VSQ1-) function block

Signal Description3U0 3U0 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value

3U0RANG 3U0 Amplitude range

U1 U1 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value

U1RANG U1 Amplitude range

U2 U2 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value

U2RANG U2 Amplitude range

Section 8Monitoring


205

8.1.5 Setting parametersThe available setting parameters of the measurement function (MMXU, MSQI) aredepending on the actual hardware (TRM) and the logic configuration made in PCM600.

Table 142: General settings for the CVMMXU (SVR1-) function

Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionSDbRepInt 1 - 300 1 10 s,%,

%sCycl: Report interval(s), Db: In % of range,Int Db: In %s

SZeroDb 0 - 100000 1 0 1/1000%

Zero point clamping in0,001% of range

SHiHiLim 0.000 -10000000000.000

0.001 900000000.000 VA High High limit(physical value)

SHiLim 0.000 -10000000000.000

0.001 800000000.000 VA High limit (physicalvalue)

SLowLim 0.000 -10000000000.000

0.001 0.000 VA Low limit (physicalvalue)

SLowLowLim 0.000 -10000000000.000

0.001 0.000 VA Low Low limit(physical value)

SMin 0.000 -10000000000.000

0.001 0.000 VA Minimum value

SMax 0.000 -10000000000.000

0.001 1000000000.000 VA Maximum value

SRepTyp CyclicDead bandInt deadband

- Cyclic - Reporting type

SLimHyst 0.000 - 100.000 0.001 5.000 % Hysteresis value in %of range (common forall limits)

PDbRepInt 1 - 300 1 10 s,%,%s

Cycl: Report interval(s), Db: In % of range,Int Db: In %s

PZeroDb 0 - 100000 1 0 1/1000%


PHiHiLim -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000

0.001 900000000.000 W High High limit(physical value)

PHiLim -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000

0.001 800000000.000 W High limit (physicalvalue)

PLowLim -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000

0.001 -800000000.000 W Low limit (physicalvalue)

PLowLowLim -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000

0.001 -900000000.000 W Low Low limit(physical value)

PMin -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000

0.001 -1000000000.000 W Minimum value


Section 8Monitoring


REB 670

Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionPMax -10000000000.00

0 -10000000000.000

0.001 1000000000.000 W Maximum value

PRepTyp CyclicDead bandInt deadband


PLimHyst 0.000 - 100.000 0.001 5.000 % Hysteresis value in %of range (common forall limits)

QDbRepInt 1 - 300 1 10 s,%,%s


QZeroDb 0 - 100000 1 0 1/1000%


QHiHiLim -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000

0.001 900000000.000 VAr High High limit(physical value)

QHiLim -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000

0.001 800000000.000 VAr High limit (physicalvalue)

QLowLim -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000

0.001 -800000000.000 VAr Low limit (physicalvalue)

QLowLowLim -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000

0.001 -900000000.000 VAr Low Low limit(physical value)

QMin -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000

0.001 -1000000000.000 VAr Minimum value

Operation OffOn

- On - Operation Off / On

QMax -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000

0.001 1000000000.000 VAr Maximum value

IBase 1 - 99999 1 3000 A Base setting forcurrent level in A

QRepTyp CyclicDead bandInt deadband


UBase 0.05 - 2000.00 0.05 400.00 kV Base setting forvoltage level in kV

QLimHyst 0.000 - 100.000 0.001 5.000 % Hysteresis value in %of range (common forall limits)

Mode L1, L2, L3AronePos SeqL1L2L2L3L3L1L1L2L3

- L1, L2, L3 - Selection ofmeasured current andvoltage


Section 8Monitoring


207

Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionPowAmpFact 0.000 - 6.000 0.001 1.000 - Amplitude factor to

scale powercalculations

PowAngComp -180.0 - 180.0 0.1 0.0 Deg Angle compensationfor phase shiftbetween measured I& U

k 0.00 - 1.00 0.01 0.00 - Low pass filtercoefficient for powermeasurement, U andI

PFDbRepInt 1 - 300 1 10 s,%,%s


PFZeroDb 0 - 100000 1 0 1/1000%


UGenZeroDb 1 - 100 1 5 % Zero point clamping in% of Ubase

PFHiHiLim -3.000 - 3.000 0.001 3.000 - High High limit(physical value)

IGenZeroDb 1 - 100 1 5 % Zero point clamping in% of Ibase

PFHiLim -3.000 - 3.000 0.001 2.000 - High limit (physicalvalue)

PFLowLim -3.000 - 3.000 0.001 -2.000 - Low limit (physicalvalue)

PFLowLowLim -3.000 - 3.000 0.001 -3.000 - Low Low limit(physical value)

PFMin -1.000 - 0.000 0.001 -1.000 - Minimum value

PFMax 0.000 - 1.000 0.001 1.000 - Maximum value

PFRepTyp CyclicDead bandInt deadband


PFLimHyst 0.000 - 100.000 0.001 5.000 % Hysteresis value in %of range (common forall limits)

UDbRepInt 1 - 300 1 10 s,%,%s


UZeroDb 0 - 100000 1 0 1/1000%


UHiHiLim -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000

0.001 460000.000 V High High limit(physical value)

UHiLim -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000

0.001 450000.000 V High limit (physicalvalue)

ULowLim -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000

0.001 380000.000 V Low limit (physicalvalue)


Section 8Monitoring


REB 670

Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionULowLowLim -10000000000.00

0 -10000000000.000

0.001 350000.000 V Low Low limit(physical value)

UMin -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000

0.001 0.000 V Minimum value

UMax -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000

0.001 400000.000 V Maximum value

URepTyp CyclicDead bandInt deadband


ULimHyst 0.000 - 100.000 0.001 5.000 % Hysteresis value in %of range (common forall limits)

IDbRepInt 1 - 300 1 10 s,%,%s


IZeroDb 0 - 100000 1 0 1/1000%


IHiHiLim -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000

0.001 900.000 A High High limit(physical value)

IHiLim -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000

0.001 800.000 A High limit (physicalvalue)

ILowLim -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000

0.001 -800.000 A Low limit (physicalvalue)

ILowLowLim -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000

0.001 -900.000 A Low Low limit(physical value)

IMin -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000

0.001 0.000 A Minimum value

IMax -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000

0.001 1000.000 A Maximum value

IRepTyp CyclicDead bandInt deadband


ILimHyst 0.000 - 100.000 0.001 5.000 % Hysteresis value in %of range (common forall limits)

FrDbRepInt 1 - 300 1 10 s,%,%s


FrZeroDb 0 - 100000 1 0 1/1000%


FrHiHiLim -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000

0.001 65.000 Hz High High limit(physical value)


Section 8Monitoring


209

Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionFrHiLim -10000000000.00

0 -10000000000.000

0.001 63.000 Hz High limit (physicalvalue)

FrLowLim -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000

0.001 47.000 Hz Low limit (physicalvalue)

FrLowLowLim -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000

0.001 45.000 Hz Low Low limit(physical value)

FrMin -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000

0.001 0.000 Hz Minimum value

FrMax -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000

0.001 70.000 Hz Maximum value

FrRepTyp CyclicDead bandInt deadband


FrLimHyst 0.000 - 100.000 0.001 5.000 % Hysteresis value in %of range (common forall limits)

UAmpComp5 -10.000 - 10.000 0.001 0.000 % Amplitude factor tocalibrate voltage at5% of Ur



IAmpComp5 -10.000 - 10.000 0.001 0.000 % Amplitude factor tocalibrate current at5% of Ir



IAngComp5 -10.000 - 10.000 0.001 0.000 Deg Angle calibration forcurrent at 5% of Ir



Section 8Monitoring


REB 670

Table 143: General settings for the CMMXU (CP01-) function

Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionIL1DbRepInt 1 - 300 1 10 s,%,


Operation OffOn

- On - Operation Mode On /Off

IL1ZeroDb 0 - 100000 1 0 1/1000%


IL1HiHiLim -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000


IBase 1 - 99999 1 3000 A Base setting forcurrent level in A


IL1HiLim -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000



IL1LowLim -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000



IL1LowLowLim -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000



IL1Min -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000



IL1Max -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000



IL1RepTyp CyclicDead bandInt deadband


IL1LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 0.001 5.000 % Hysteresis value in %of range and iscommon for all limits

IL1AngDbRepInt 1 - 300 1 10 s,%,%s



Section 8Monitoring


211

Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionIL1AngRepTyp Cyclic

Dead bandInt deadband


IL2DbRepInt 1 - 300 1 10 s,%,%s


IL2ZeroDb 0 - 100000 1 0 1/1000%


IL2HiHiLim -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000


IL2HiLim -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000


IL2LowLim -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000


IL2LowLowLim -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000


IL2Min -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000


IL2Max -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000







IL2AngRepTyp CyclicDead bandInt deadband


IL3DbRepInt 1 - 300 1 10 s,%,%s


IL3ZeroDb 0 - 100000 1 0 1/1000%


IL3HiHiLim -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000


IL3HiLim -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000


IL3LowLim -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000



Section 8Monitoring


REB 670

Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionIL3LowLowLim -10000000000.00

0 -10000000000.000


IL3Min -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000


IL3Max -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000







IL3AngRepTyp CyclicDead bandInt deadband


Table 144: General settings for the VMMXU (VP01-) function

Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionUL12DbRepInt 1 - 300 1 10 s,%,


Operation OffOn

- On - Operation Mode On /Off

UL12ZeroDb 0 - 100000 1 0 1/1000%


UL12HiHiLim -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000


UBase 0.05 - 2000.00 0.05 400.00 kV Base setting forvoltage level in kV


UL12HiLim -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000



UL12LowLim -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000



Section 8Monitoring


213

Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionUAmpComp100 -10.000 - 10.000 0.001 0.000 % Amplitude factor to

calibrate voltage at100% of Ur

UL12LowLowLim -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000


UL12Min -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000


UL12Max -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000


UL12RepTyp CyclicDead bandInt deadband


UL12LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 0.001 5.000 % Hysteresis value in %of range and iscommon for all limits

UL12AnDbRepInt 1 - 300 1 10 s,%,%s


UL12AngRepTyp CyclicDead bandInt deadband


UL23DbRepInt 1 - 300 1 10 s,%,%s


UL23ZeroDb 0 - 100000 1 0 1/1000%


UL23HiHiLim -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000


UL23HiLim -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000


UL23LowLim -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000


UL23LowLowLim -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000


UL23Min -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000


UL23Max -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000






Section 8Monitoring


REB 670

Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionUL23AnDbRepInt 1 - 300 1 10 s,%,




UL31DbRepInt 1 - 300 1 10 s,%,%s


UL31ZeroDb 0 - 100000 1 0 1/1000%


UL31HiHiLim -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000


UL31HiLim -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000


UL31LowLim -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000


UL31LowLowLim -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000


UL31Min -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000


UL31Max -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000





UL31AnDbRepInt 1 - 300 1 10 s,%,%s




Section 8Monitoring


215

Table 145: General settings for the CMSQI (CSQ1-) function

Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description3I0DbRepInt 1 - 300 1 10 s,%,


3I0ZeroDb 0 - 100000 1 0 1/1000%


3I0HiHiLim -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000


3I0HiLim -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000


3I0LowLim -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000


3I0LowLowLim -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000


3I0Min -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000


3I0Max -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000


3I0RepTyp CyclicDead bandInt deadband


3I0LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 0.001 5.000 % Hysteresis value in %of range and iscommon for all limits

Operation OffOn

- Off - Operation Mode On /Off

3I0AngDbRepInt 1 - 300 1 10 s,%,%s


3I0AngRepTyp CyclicDead bandInt deadband


I1DbRepInt 1 - 300 1 10 s,%,%s


I1ZeroDb 0 - 100000 1 0 1/1000%


I1HiHiLim -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000


I1HiLim -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000


I1LowLim -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000



Section 8Monitoring


REB 670

Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionI1LowLowLim -10000000000.00

0 -10000000000.000


I1Min -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000


I1Max -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000


I1RepTyp CyclicDead bandInt deadband


I1LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 0.001 5.000 % Hysteresis value in %of range and iscommon for all limits

I1AngDbRepInt 1 - 300 1 10 s,%,%s


I1AngRepTyp CyclicDead bandInt deadband


I2DbRepInt 1 - 300 1 10 s,%,%s


I2ZeroDb 0 - 100000 1 0 1/1000%


I2HiHiLim -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000


I2HiLim -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000


I2LowLim -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000


I2LowLowLim -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000


I2Min -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000


I2Max -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000


I2RepTyp CyclicDead bandInt deadband



Section 8Monitoring


217

Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionI2LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 0.001 5.000 % Hysteresis value in %

of range and iscommon for all limits

I2AngDbRepInt 1 - 300 1 10 s,%,%s


I2AngRepTyp CyclicDead bandInt deadband


Table 146: General settings for the VMSQI (VSQ1-) function

Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description3U0DbRepInt 1 - 300 1 10 s,%,


3U0ZeroDb 0 - 100000 1 0 1/1000%


3U0HiHiLim -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000


3U0HiLim -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000


3U0LowLim -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000


3U0LowLowLim -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000


3U0Min -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000


3U0Max -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000


3U0RepTyp CyclicDead bandInt deadband


3U0LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 0.001 5.000 % Hysteresis value in %of range and iscommon for all limits

Operation OffOn

- Off - Operation Mode On /Off

3U0AngDbRepInt 1 - 300 1 10 s,%,%s


3U0AngRepTyp CyclicDead bandInt deadband



Section 8Monitoring


REB 670

Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionU1DbRepInt 1 - 300 1 10 s,%,


U1ZeroDb 0 - 100000 1 0 1/1000%


U1HiHiLim -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000


U1HiLim -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000


U1LowLim -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000


U1LowLowLim -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000


U1Min -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000


U1Max -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000


U1RepTyp CyclicDead bandInt deadband


U1LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 0.001 5.000 % Hysteresis value in %of range and iscommon for all limits

U1AngDbRepInt 1 - 300 1 10 s,%,%s


U1AngRepTyp CyclicDead bandInt deadband


U2DbRepInt 1 - 300 1 10 s,%,%s


U2ZeroDb 0 - 100000 1 0 1/1000%


U2HiHiLim -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000


U2HiLim -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000


U2LowLim -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000


U2LowLowLim -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000



Section 8Monitoring


219

Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionU2Min -10000000000.00

0 -10000000000.000


U2Max -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000


U2RepTyp CyclicDead bandInt deadband


U2LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 0.001 5.000 % Hysteresis value in %of range and iscommon for all limits

U2AngDbRepInt 1 - 300 1 10 s,%,%s


U2AngRepTyp CyclicDead bandInt deadband



Table 147: Measurements (MMXU)

Function Range or value AccuracyFrequency (0.95-1.05) × fr ± 2.0 mHz

Connected current (0.2-4.0) × Ir ± 0.5% of Ir at I £ Ir± 0.5% of I at I > Ir

8.2 Event counter (GGIO)

Function block name: ECNx- IEC 60617 graphical symbol:

ANSI number:

IEC 61850 logical node name:CNTGGIO

8.2.1 IntroductionThe function consists of six counters which are used for storing the number of timeseach counter has been activated. It is also provided with a common blocking functionfor all six counters, to be used for example at testing. Every counter can separatelybe set on or off by a parameter setting.


Section 8Monitoring


REB 670

The function block has six inputs for increasing the counter values for each of the sixcounters respectively. The content of the counters are stepped one step for eachpositive edge of the input respectively. The maximum count up speed is 10 pulsesper second. The maximum counter value is 10 000. For counts above 10 000 thecounter will stop at 10 000 and no restart will take place.

To not risk that the flash memory is worn out due to too many writings, a mechanismfor limiting the number of writings per time period is included in the product. Thishowever gives as a result that it can take long time, up to several minutes, before anew value is stored in the flash memory. And if a new CNTGGIO value is not storedbefore auxiliary power interruption, it will be lost. The CNTGGIO stored values inflash memory will however not be lost at an auxiliary power interruption.

The function block also has an input BLOCK. At activation of this input all sixcounters are blocked. The input can for example be used for blocking the counters attesting.

All inputs are configured via PCM 600.

8.2.2.1 Reporting

The content of the counters can be read in the local HMI. Refer to “Operatorsmanual” for procedure.

Reset of counters can be performed in the local HMI and a binary input. Refer to“Operators manual” for procedure.

Reading of content and resetting of the counters can also be performed remotely, forexample PCM 600 or MicroSkada.

8.2.2.2 Design

The function block has six inputs for increasing the counter values for each of the sixcounters respectively. The content of the counters are stepped one step for eachpositive edge of the input respectively.

The function block also has an input BLOCK. At activation of this input all sixcounters are blocked.

The function block has an input RESET. At activation of this input all six countersare set to 0.

Section 8Monitoring


221


CNTGGIOCNT1-

BLOCKCOUNTER1COUNTER2COUNTER3COUNTER4COUNTER5COUNTER6RESET

en05000345.vsd

Figure 110: CNT function block

8.2.4 Input signals

Table 148: Input signals for the CNTGGIO (CNT1-) function block

Signal DescriptionBLOCK Block of function

COUNTER1 Input for counter1






RESET Reset of function



Table 149: Event counter (GGIO)

Function Range or value AccuracyCounter value 0-10000 -

Max. count up speed 10 pulses/s -

Section 8Monitoring


REB 670

8.3 Event function (EV)

8.3.1 IntroductionWhen using a Substation Automation system with LON or SPA communication,time-tagged events can be sent at change or cyclically from the IED to the stationlevel. These events are created from any available signal in the IED that is connectedto the Event function block. The event function block is used for LON and SPAcommunication.

Analog and double indication values are also transferred through the event block.

8.3.2 Principle of operationThe main purpose of the event function block is to generate events when the state orvalue of any of the connected input signals is in a state, or is undergoing a statetransition, for which event generation is enabled.

Each event function block has 16 inputs INPUT1 - INPUT16. Each input can be givena name from the CAP configuration tool. The inputs are normally used to create singleevents, but are also intended for double indication events.

The function also has an input BLOCK to block the generation of events.

The events that are sent from the IED can originate from both internal logical signalsand binary input channels. The internal signals are time-tagged in the main processingmodule, while the binary input channels are time-tagged directly on the input module.The time-tagging of the events that are originated from internal logical signals havea resolution corresponding to the execution cyclicity of the event function block. Thetime-tagging of the events that are originated from binary input signals have aresolution of 1 ms.

The outputs from the event function block are formed by the reading of status, eventsand alarms by the station level on every single input. The user-defined name for eachinput is intended to be used by the station level.

All events according to the event mask are stored in a buffer, which contains up to1000 events. If new events appear before the oldest event in the buffer is read, theoldest event is overwritten and an overflow alarm appears.

The events are produced according to the set-event masks. The event masks are treatedcommonly for both the LON and SPA communication. The event mask can be setindividually for each input channel. These settings are available:

Section 8Monitoring


223

• NoEvents• OnSet• OnReset• OnChange• AutoDetect

It is possible to define which part of the event function block that shall generate events.This can be performed individually for the LON and SPA communicationrespectively. For each communication type these settings are available:

• Off• Channel 1-8• Channel 9-16• Channel 1-16

For LON communication the events normally are sent to station level at change. It ispossibly also to set a time for cyclic sending of the events individually for each inputchannel.

To protect the SA system from signals with a high change rate that can easily saturatethe event system or the communication subsystems behind it, a quota limiter isimplemented. If an input creates events at a rate that completely consume the grantedquota then further events from the channel will be blocked. This block will beremoved when the input calms down and the accumulated quota reach 66% of themaximum burst quota. The maximum burst quota per input channel equals 3 timesthe configurable setting MaxEvPerSec.

Section 8Monitoring


REB 670


EventEV01-

BLOCKINPUT1INPUT2INPUT3INPUT4INPUT5INPUT6INPUT7INPUT8INPUT9INPUT10INPUT11INPUT12INPUT13INPUT14INPUT15INPUT16NAME1NAME2NAME3NAME4NAME5NAME6NAME7NAME8NAME9NAME10NAME11NAME12NAME13NAME14NAME15NAME16

en05000697.vsd


Table 150: Input signals for the Event (EV01-) function block


INPUT1 Input 1

INPUT2 Input 2

INPUT3 Input 3

INPUT4 Input 4

INPUT5 Input 5

INPUT6 Input 6

INPUT7 Input 7

INPUT8 Input 8

INPUT9 Input 9

INPUT10 Input 10

INPUT11 Input 11

INPUT12 Input 12

INPUT13 Input 13


Section 8Monitoring


225

Signal DescriptionINPUT14 Input 14

INPUT15 Input 15

INPUT16 Input 16

NAME1 User defined string for input 1

















Table 151: General settings for the Event (EV01-) function

Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionSPAChannelMask Off

Channel 1-8Channel 9-16Channel 1-16

- Off - SPA channel mask

LONChannelMask OffChannel 1-8Channel 9-16Channel 1-16

- Off - LON channel mask

EventMask1 NoEventsOnSetOnResetOnChangeAutoDetect

- AutoDetect - Reporting criteria forinput 1




Section 8Monitoring


REB 670

Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionEventMask3 NoEvents

OnSetOnResetOnChangeAutoDetect























Section 8Monitoring


227

Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionEventMask14 NoEvents

OnSetOnResetOnChangeAutoDetect






MinRepIntVal1 0 - 3600 1 2 s Minimum reportinginterval input 1
















8.4 Measured value expander block

Section 8Monitoring


REB 670

Function block name: XP IEC 60617 graphical symbol: ANSI number:

IEC 61850 logical node name:

8.4.1 IntroductionThe functions MMXU (SVR, CP and VP), MSQI (CSQ and VSQ) and MVGGIO(MV) are provided with measurement supervision functionality. All measured valuescan be supervised with four settable limits, i.e. low-low limit, low limit, high limitand high-high limit. The measure value expander block (XP) has been introduced tobe able to translate the integer output signal from the measuring functions to 5 binarysignals i.e. below low-low limit, below low limit, normal, above high-high limit orabove high limit. The output signals can be used as conditions in the configurablelogic.

8.4.2 Principle of operationThe input signal must be connected to the RANGE-output of a measuring functionblock (MMXU, MSQI or MVGGIO). The function block converts the input integervalue to five binary output signals according to table 152.

Table 152: Input integer value converted to binary output signals

Measured supervisedvalue is:

below low-lowlimit

between low‐low and lowlimit

between lowand high limit

between high-high and highlimit

above high-high limit

Output:LOWLOW High

LOW High

NORMAL High

HIGH High

HIGHHIGH High


RANGE_XPXP01-

RANGE HIGHHIGHHIGH

NORMALLOW

LOWLOW

en05000346.vsd

Figure 111: XP function block


Section 8Monitoring


229

Table 153: Input signals for the RANGE_XP (XP01-) function block

Signal DescriptionRANGE Measured value range

Table 154: Output signals for the RANGE_XP (XP01-) function block

Signal DescriptionHIGHHIGH Measured value is above high-high limit

HIGH Measured value is between high and high-high limit

NORMAL Measured value is between high and low limit

LOW Measured value is between low and low-low limit

LOWLOW Measured value is below low-low limit

8.5 Disturbance report (RDRE)

Function block name: DRP--, DRA1- – DRA4-,DRB1- – DRB6-


ANSI number:

IEC 61850 logical node name:ABRDRE

8.5.1 IntroductionComplete and reliable information about disturbances in the primary and/or in thesecondary system together with continuous event-logging is accomplished by thedisturbance report functionality.

The disturbance report, always included in the IED, acquires sampled data of allselected analogue input and binary signals connected to the function block i.e.maximum 40 analogue and 96 binary signals.

The disturbance report functionality is a common name for several functions:

• Event List (EL)• Indications (IND)• Event recorder (ER)• Trip Value recorder (TVR)• Disturbance recorder (DR)

The function is characterized by great flexibility regarding configuration, startingconditions, recording times and large storage capacity.

Section 8Monitoring


REB 670

A disturbance is defined as an activation of an input in the DRAx or DRBy functionblocks which is set to trigger the disturbance recorder. All signals from start of pre-fault time to the end of post-fault time, will be included in the recording.

Every disturbance report recording is saved in the IED in the standard Comtradeformat. The same applies to all events, which are continuously saved in a ring-buffer.The Local Human Machine Interface (LHMI) is used to get information about therecordings, but the disturbance report files may be uploaded to the PCM 600(Protection and Control IED Manager) and further analysis using the disturbancehandling tool.

8.5.2 Principle of operationThe disturbance report (DRP) is a common name for several facilities to supply theoperator, analysis engineer, etc. with sufficient information about events in thesystem.

The facilities included in the disturbance report are:

• General disturbance information• Indications (IND)• Event recorder (ER)• Event list (EL)• Trip values (phase values) (TVR)• Disturbance recorder (DR)

Figure ""Figure 112 shows the relations among Disturbance Report, includedfunctions and function blocks. EL, ER and IND uses information from the binaryinput function blocks (DRB1- 6). TVR uses analog information from the analog inputfunction blocks (DRA1-3). The DR function acquires information from both DRAxand DRBx.

Section 8Monitoring


231

Trip Value Rec

Event List

Event Recorder

Indications

DisturbanceRecorder

DRP- -

DRA1-- 4-

DRB1-- 6-

Disturbance Report

Binary signals

Analog signalsA4RADR

B6RBDR

RDRE

en05000160.vsd

Figure 112: Disturbance report functions and related function blocks

The whole disturbance report can contain information for a number of recordings,each with the data coming from all the parts mentioned above. The event list functionis working continuously, independent of disturbance triggering, recording time etc.All information in the disturbance report is stored in non-volatile flash memories.This implies that no information is lost in case of loss of auxiliary power. Each reportwill get an identification number in the interval from 1-65536.

en05000161.vsd

Disturbance report

Record no. N Record no. N+1 Record no. N+100

General dist.information Indications Trip

valuesEvent

recordingsDisturbance

recording Event list

Figure 113: Disturbance report structure

Up to 100 disturbance reports can be stored. If a new disturbance is to be recordedwhen the memory is full, the oldest disturbance report is over-written by the new one.The total recording capacity for the disturbance recorder is depending of samplingfrequency, number of analog and binary channels and recording time. The figure114 shows number of recordings vs total recording time tested for a typicalconfiguration, i.e. in a 50 Hz system it’s possible to record 100 where the average

Section 8Monitoring


REB 670

recording time is 3.4 seconds. The memory limit does not affect the rest of thedisturbance report (IND, ER, EL and TVR).

100

400 s350300

40

60

8040 analog96 binary

20 analog96 binary

3,4 s

6,3 s

6,3 s60 Hz

50 Hz

6,3 s

3,4 s

250

Total recording time

Number of recordings

en05000488.vsd

Figure 114: Number of recordings.

Disturbance informationDate and time of the disturbance, the indications, events, fault location and the tripvalues are available on the local human-machine interface (LHMI). To acquire acomplete disturbance report the use of a PC and PCM600 is required. The PC maybe connected to the IED-front, rear or remotely via the station bus (Ethernet ports).

Indications (IND)Indications is a list of signals that were activated during the total recording time ofthe disturbance (not time-tagged). (See section "Indications (RDRE)" for moredetailed information.)

Event recorder (ER)The event recorder may contain a list of up to 150 time-tagged events, which haveoccurred during the disturbance. The information is available via the LHMI or PCM600. (See section "Event recorder (RDRE)" for more detailed information.)

Event list (EL)The event list may contain a list of totally 1000 time-tagged events. The listinformation is continuously updated when selected binary signals change state. Theoldest data is overwritten. The logged signals may be presented via LHMI or PCM600. (See section "Event list (RDRE)" for more detailed information.)

Section 8Monitoring


233

Trip value recorder (TVR)The recorded trip values include phasors of selected analog signals before the faultand during the fault. (See section "Trip value recorder (RDRE)" for more detailedinformation.)

Disturbance recorder (DR)The disturbance recorder records analog and binary signal data before, during andafter the fault. (See section "Disturbance recorder (RDRE)" for more detailedinformation.)

Fault locator (FL)The fault location function calculates the distance to fault. (See section "" for moredetailed information)

Time taggingThe IED has a built-in real-time calendar and clock. This function is used for all timetagging within the disturbance report

Recording timesThe disturbance report (DRP) records information about a disturbance during asettable time frame. The recording times are valid for the whole disturbance report.The disturbance recorder (DR), the event recorder (ER) and indication functionregister disturbance data and events during tRecording, the total recording time.

The total recording time, tRecording, of a recorded disturbance is:

tRecording = PreFaultrecT + tFault + PostFaultrecT or PreFaultrecT + TimeLimit, depending on whichcriterion stops the current disturbance recording

PreFaultRecT

TimeLimit

PostFaultRecT

en05000487.vsd

1 2 3

Trig point

Figure 115: The recording times definition

PreFaultRecT, 1 Pre-fault or pre-trigger recording time. The time before the fault including the operatetime of the trigger. Use the setting PreFaultRecT to set this time.

tFault, 2 Fault time of the recording. The fault time cannot be set. It continues as long as anyvalid trigger condition, binary or analog, persists (unless limited by TimeLimit thelimit time).

PostFaultRecT, 3 Post fault recording time. The time the disturbance recording continues after allactivated triggers are reset. Use the setting PostFaultRecT to set this time.

Section 8Monitoring


REB 670

TimeLimit Limit time. The maximum allowed recording time after the disturbance recording wastriggered. The limit time is used to eliminate the consequences of a trigger that doesnot reset within a reasonable time interval. It limits the maximum recording time ofa recording and prevents subsequent overwriting of already storeddisturbances.Use the setting TimeLimit to set this time.

Analog signalsUp to 40 analog signals can be selected for recording by the Disturbance recorder andtriggering of the Disturbance report function. Out of these 40, 30 are reserved forexternal analog signals, i.e. signals from the analog input modules (TRM) and linedifferential communication module (LDCM) via preprocessing function blocks(SMAI) and summation block (Sum3Ph). The last 10 channels may be connected tointernally calculated analog signals available as function block output signals (mAinput signals, phase differential currents, bias currents etc.).

en05000653.vsd

DRA3-DRA2-

A3RADRA2RADR

DRA1-A1RADRSMAI

AI1AI2AI3AI4

AI3PAI1NAMEAI2NAMEAI3NAME

GRPNAME

AI4NAME

INPUT1INPUT2INPUT3INPUT4INPUT5INPUT6...

A4RADR

INPUT31INPUT32INPUT33INPUT34INPUT35INPUT36

...

INPUT40

PRxx-

T2Dx, T3Dx,REFx, HZDx,L3D, L6D,LT3D, LT6D

SVRx, CPxx, VP0x,CSQx, VSQx, MVxx

Internal analog signals

External analogsignals

AIN

TRM, LDCMSUxx

Figure 116: Analog input function blocks

The external input signals will be acquired, filtered and skewed and (afterconfiguration) available as an input signal on the DRAx- function block via the PRxxfunction block. The information is saved at the Disturbance report base sampling rate(1000 or 1200 Hz). Internally calculated signals are updated according to the cycletime of the specific function. If a function is running at lower speed than the basesampling rate, the Disturbance recorder will use the latest updated sample until a newupdated sample is available.

Section 8Monitoring


235

If the IED is preconfigured the only tool needed for analogue configuration of theDisturbance report is the Signal Matrix Tool (SMT, external signal configuration).In case of modification of a preconfigured IED or general internal configuration theApplication Configuration tool within PCM600 is used.

The preprocessor function block (PRxx) calculates the residual quantities in caseswhere only the three phases are connected (AI4-input not used). PRxx makes theinformation available as a group signal output, phase outputs and calculated residualoutput (AIN-output). In situations where AI4-input is used as a input signal thecorresponding information is available on the non-calculated output (AI4) on thePRxx-block. Connect the signals to the DRAx accordingly.

For each of the analog signals, Operation = On means that it is recorded by thedisturbance recorder. The trigger is independent of the setting of Operation, andtriggers even if operation is set to Off. Both undervoltage and overvoltage can be usedas trigger conditions. The same applies for the current signals.

The analog signals are presented only in the disturbance recording, but they affectthe entire disturbance report when being used as triggers.

Binary signalsUp to 96 binary signals can be selected to be handled by the disturbance report.Thesignals can be selected from internal logical and binary input signals. A binary signalis selected to be recorded when:

• the corresponding function block is included in the configuration• the signal is connected to the input of the function block

Each of the 96 signals can be selected as a trigger of the disturbance report(operation=ON/OFF). A binary signal can be selected to activate the red LED on thelocal HMI (setLED=On/Off).

The selected signals are presented in the event recorder, event list and the disturbancerecording. But they affect the whole disturbance report when they are used as triggers.The indications are also selected from these 96 signals with the LHMIIndicationMask=Show/Hide.

Trigger signalsThe trigger conditions affect the entire disturbance report, except the event list, whichruns continuously. As soon as at least one trigger condition is fulfilled, a completedisturbance report is recorded. On the other hand, if no trigger condition is fulfilled,there is no disturbance report, no indications, and so on. This implies the importanceof choosing the right signals as trigger conditions.

A trigger can be of type:

• Manual trigger• Binary-signal trigger• Analog-signal trigger (over/under function)

Section 8Monitoring


REB 670

Manual triggerA disturbance report can be manually triggered from the local HMI, from PCM600or via station bus (IEC61850). When the trigger is activated, the manual trigger signalis generated. This feature is especially useful for testing. Refer to “Operatorsmanual” for procedure.

Binary-signal triggerAny binary signal state (logic one or a logic zero) can be selected to generate a trigger(Triglevel = Trig on 0/Trig on 1).The binary signal must remain in a steady state forat least 15 ms to be valid. When a binary signal is selected to generate a trigger froma logic zero, the selected signal will not be listed in the indications list of thedisturbance report.

Analog-signal triggerAll analog signals are available for trigger purposes, no matter if they are recordedin the disturbance recorder or not. The settings are OverTrigOp, UnderTrigOp,OverTrigLe and UnderTrigLe.

The check of the trigger condition is based on peak-to-peak values. When this isfound, the absolute average value of these two peak values is calculated. If the averagevalue is above the threshold level for an overvoltage or overcurrent trigger, this triggeris indicated with a greater than (>) sign with the user-defined name.

If the average value is below the set threshold level for an undervoltage orundercurrent trigger, this trigger is indicated with a less than (<) sign with its name.The procedure is separately performed for each channel.

This method of checking the analog start conditions gives a function which isinsensitive to DC offset in the signal. The operate time for this start is typically in therange of one cycle, 20 ms for a 50 Hz network.

All under/over trig signal information is available on the LHMI and PCM600, seetable 155.

Post RetriggerThe disturbance report function does not respond to any new trig condition, during arecording. Under certain circumstances the fault condition may reoccur during thepost-fault recording, for instance by automatic reclosing to a still faulty power line.

In order to capture the new disturbance it is possible to allow retriggering (PostRetrig= On)during the post-fault time. In this case a new, complete recording will start and,during a period, run in parallel with the initial recording.

When the retrig parameter is disabled (PostRetrig = Off), a new recording will notstart until the post-fault (PostFaultrecT or TimeLimit) period is terminated. If a newtrig occurs during the post-fault period and lasts longer than the proceeding recordinga new complete recording will be fetched.

The disturbance report function can handle maximum 3 simultaneous disturbancerecordings.

Section 8Monitoring


237


en05000406.vsd

RDREDRP--

DRPOFFRECSTARTRECMADECLEARED

MEMUSED

Figure 117: DRP function block

en05000430.vsd

A1RADRDRA1-

INPUT1INPUT2INPUT3INPUT4INPUT5INPUT6INPUT7INPUT8INPUT9INPUT10NAME1NAME2NAME3NAME4NAME5NAME6NAME7NAME8NAME9NAME10

Figure 118: DRA1 function block, analog inputs, example for DRA1–DRA3

en05000431.vsd

A4RADRDRA4-

INPUT31INPUT32INPUT33INPUT34INPUT35INPUT36INPUT37INPUT38INPUT39INPUT40NAME31NAME32NAME33NAME34NAME35NAME36NAME37NAME38NAME39NAME40

Figure 119: DRA4 function block, derived analog inputs

Section 8Monitoring


REB 670

B1RBDRDRB1-

INPUT1INPUT2INPUT3INPUT4INPUT5INPUT6INPUT7INPUT8INPUT9INPUT10INPUT11INPUT12INPUT13INPUT14INPUT15INPUT16NAME1NAME2NAME3NAME4NAME5NAME6NAME7NAME8NAME9NAME10NAME11NAME12NAME13NAME14NAME15NAME16

en05000432.vsd

Figure 120: DRB1 function block, binary inputs, example for DRB1–DRB6


Table 155: Output signals for the RDRE (DRP--) function block

Signal DescriptionDRPOFF Disturbance report function turned off

RECSTART Disturbance recording started

RECMADE Disturbance recording made

CLEARED All disturbances in the disturbance report cleared

MEMUSED More than 80% of memory used

Table 156: Input signals for the A1RADR (DRA1-) function block, example for DRA1–DRA3

Signal DescriptionINPUT1 Group signal for input 1

INPUT2 Group signal for input 2





Section 8Monitoring


239

Signal DescriptionINPUT6 Group signal for input 6





NAME1 User define string for analogue input 1










Table 157: Input signals for the A4RADR (DRA4-) function block

Signal DescriptionINPUT31 Analogue channel 31

INPUT32 Analogue channel 32



















Section 8Monitoring


REB 670

Table 158: Input signals for the B1RBDR (DRB1-) function block, example for DRB1–DRB6

Signal DescriptionINPUT1 Binary channel 1

INPUT2 Binary channel 2















NAME1 User define string for binary input 1

















Section 8Monitoring


241

Table 159: General settings for the RDRE (DRP--) function

Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionOpModeTest Off

On- Off - Operation mode

during test mode

Operation OffOn

- Off - Operation Off/On

PreFaultRecT 0.05 - 0.30 0.01 0.10 s Pre-faultrecording time

PostFaultRecT 0.1 - 5.0 0.1 0.5 s Post-faultrecording time

TimeLimit 0.5 - 6.0 0.1 1.0 s Fault recordingtime limit

PostRetrig OffOn

- Off - Post-fault retrigenabled (On) ornot (Off)

ZeroAngleRef 1 - 30 1 1 Ch Trip valuerecorder, phasorreferencechannel

Table 160: General settings for the A1RADR (DRA1-) function

Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionOperation01 Off

On- Off - Operation On/Off

NomValue01 0.0 - 999999.9 0.1 0.0 - Nominal value foranaloguechannel 1

UnderTrigOp01 OffOn

- Off - Use under leveltrig for analoguecha 1 (on) or not(off)

UnderTrigLe01 0 - 200 1 50 % Under triggerlevel foranalogue cha 1in % of signal

OverTrigOp01 OffOn

- Off - Use over leveltrig for analoguecha 1 (on) or not(off)

OverTrigLe01 0 - 5000 1 200 % Over trigger levelfor analogue cha1 in % of signal

Operation02 OffOn

- Off - Operation On/Off


UnderTrigOp02 OffOn



Section 8Monitoring


REB 670

Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionUnderTrigLe02 0 - 200 1 50 % Under trigger

level foranalogue cha 2in % of signal

OverTrigOp02 OffOn



Operation03 OffOn



UnderTrigOp03 OffOn



OverTrigOp03 OffOn


OverTrigLe03 0 - 5000 1 200 % Overtrigger levelfor analogue cha3 in % of signal

Operation04 OffOn



UnderTrigOp04 OffOn



OverTrigOp04 OffOn



Operation05 OffOn



Section 8Monitoring


243

Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionNomValue05 0.0 - 999999.9 0.1 0.0 - Nominal value for

analoguechannel 5

UnderTrigOp05 OffOn



OverTrigOp05 OffOn



Operation06 OffOn



UnderTrigOp06 OffOn



OverTrigOp06 OffOn



Operation07 OffOn



UnderTrigOp07 OffOn



OverTrigOp07 OffOn



Section 8Monitoring


REB 670

Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionOverTrigLe07 0 - 5000 1 200 % Over trigger level

for analogue cha7 in % of signal

Operation08 OffOn



UnderTrigOp08 OffOn



OverTrigOp08 OffOn



Operation09 OffOn



UnderTrigOp09 OffOn



OverTrigOp09 OffOn



Operation10 OffOn



UnderTrigOp10 OffOn



Section 8Monitoring


245



OverTrigOp10 OffOn



Table 161: General settings for the A4RADR (DRA4-) function


On- Off - Operation On/off


UnderTrigOp31 OffOn



OverTrigOp31 OffOn



Operation32 OffOn

- Off - Operation On/off


UnderTrigOp32 OffOn



OverTrigOp32 OffOn



Section 8Monitoring


REB 670

Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionOverTrigLe32 0 - 5000 1 200 % Over trigger level

for analogue cha32 in % of signal

Operation33 OffOn



UnderTrigOp33 OffOn



OverTrigOp33 OffOn


OverTrigLe33 0 - 5000 1 200 % Overtrigger levelfor analogue cha33 in % of signal

Operation34 OffOn



UnderTrigOp34 OffOn



OverTrigOp34 OffOn



Operation35 OffOn



UnderTrigOp35 OffOn



Section 8Monitoring


247



OverTrigOp35 OffOn



Operation36 OffOn



UnderTrigOp36 OffOn



OverTrigOp36 OffOn



Operation37 OffOn



UnderTrigOp37 OffOn



OverTrigOp37 OffOn



Operation38 OffOn



Section 8Monitoring


REB 670

Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionNomValue38 0.0 - 999999.9 0.1 0.0 - Nominal value for

analoguechannel 38

UnderTrigOp38 OffOn



OverTrigOp38 OffOn



Operation39 OffOn



UnderTrigOp39 OffOn



OverTrigOp39 OffOn



Operation40 OffOn



UnderTrigOp40 OffOn



Section 8Monitoring


249



OverTrigOp40 OffOn



Setting parameters FUNCn and INFONOn (n=1-16) for the B1RBDR(DRB1-) function are only available in the LHMI.

Table 162: General settings for the B1RBDR (DRB1-) function


On- Off - Trigger operation

On/Off

TrigLevel01 Trig on 0Trig on 1

- Trig on 1 - Trig on positiv (1)or negative (0)slope for binaryinp 1

IndicationMa01 HideShow

- Hide - Indication maskfor binarychannel 1

SetLED01 OffOn

- Off - Set red-LED onHMI for binarychannel 1

Operation02 OffOn

- Off - Trigger operationOn/Off





SetLED02 OffOn


Operation03 OffOn





Section 8Monitoring


REB 670

Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionIndicationMa03 Hide

Show- Hide - Indication mask

for binarychannel 3

SetLED03 OffOn


Operation04 OffOn






SetLED04 OffOn


Operation05 OffOn






SetLED05 OffOn


Operation06 OffOn






SetLED06 OffOn


Operation07 OffOn







Section 8Monitoring


251

Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionSetLED07 Off

On- Off - Set red-LED on

HMI for binarychannel 7

Operation08 OffOn






SetLED08 OffOn


Operation09 OffOn






SetLED09 OffOn


Operation10 OffOn






SetLED10 OffOn


Operation11 OffOn






SetLED11 OffOn


Operation12 OffOn



Section 8Monitoring


REB 670

Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionTrigLevel12 Trig on 0

Trig on 1- Trig on 1 - Trig on positiv (1)

or negative (0)slope for binaryinp 12



SetLED12 OffOn

- Off - Set red-LED onHMI for binaryinput 12

Operation13 OffOn






SetLED13 OffOn


Operation14 OffOn






SetLED14 OffOn


Operation15 OffOn






SetLED15 OffOn


Operation16 OffOn





Section 8Monitoring


253

Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionIndicationMa16 Hide

Show- Hide - Indication mask

for binarychannel 16

SetLED16 OffOn


FUNCT1 0 - 255 1 0 FunT Function type forbinary channel 1(IEC-60870-5-103)









FUNCT10 0 - 255 1 0 FunT Function type forbinary channel10 (IEC-60870-5-103)




Section 8Monitoring


REB 670

Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionFUNCT13 0 - 255 1 0 FunT Function type for

binary channel13 (IEC-60870-5-103)




INFONO1 0 - 255 1 0 InfNo Informationnumber forbinary channel 1(IEC-60870-5-103)









Section 8Monitoring


255

Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionINFONO9 0 - 255 1 0 InfNo Information

number forbinary channel 9(IEC-60870-5-103)

INFONO10 0 - 255 1 0 InfNo Informationnumber forbinary channel10 (IEC-60870-5-103)








Table 163: Disturbance report (RDRE)

Function Range or value AccuracyPre-fault time (0.05–0.30) s -

Post-fault time (0.1–5.0) s -

Limit time (0.5–6.0) s -

Maximum number of recordings 100 -

Time tagging resolution 1 ms See table26


Section 8Monitoring


REB 670

Function Range or value AccuracyMaximum number of analoginputs

30 + 10 (external + internallyderived)

-

Maximum number of binary inputs 96 -

Maximum number of phasors inthe Trip Value recorder perrecording

30 -

Maximum number of indications ina disturbance report

96 -

Maximum number of events in theEvent recording per recording

150 -

Maximum number of events in theEvent list

1000, first in - first out -

Maximum total recording time (3.4s recording time and maximumnumber of channels, typical value)

340 seconds (100 recordings) at50 Hz, 280 seconds (80recordings) at 60 Hz

-

Sampling rate 1 kHz at 50 Hz1.2 kHz at 60 Hz

-

Recording bandwidth (5-300) Hz -

8.6 Event list (RDRE)

8.6.1 IntroductionContinuous event-logging is useful for monitoring of the system from an overviewperspective and is a complement to specific disturbance recorder functions.

The event list logs all binary input signals connected to the Disturbance reportfunction. The list may contain of up to 1000 time-tagged events stored in a ring-buffer.

The event list information is available in the IED and is reported to higher controlsystems via the station bus together with other logged events in the IED. In absenceof any software tool the information seeker may use the local HMI to view the eventlist.

8.6.2 Principle of operationWhen a binary signal, connected to the disturbance report function, changes status,the event list function stores input name, status and time in the event list inchronological order. The list can contain up to 1000 events from both internal logicsignals and binary input channels. If the list is full, the oldest event is overwrittenwhen a new event arrives.

The list can be configured to show oldest or newest events first with a setting on theLHMI.

Section 8Monitoring


257

The event list function runs continuously, in contrast to the event recorder function,which is only active during a disturbance.

The name of the binary input signal that appears in the event recording is the user-defined name assigned when the IED is configured. The same name is used in thedisturbance recorder function (DR), indications (IND) and the event recorder function(ER).

The event list is stored and managed separate from the disturbance report information(ER, DR, IND, TVR and FL).

8.6.3 Function blockThe object has no function block of it’s own. It is included in the DRP- block anduses information from the DRBx- block.

8.6.4 Input signalsThe event list logs the same binary input signals as configured for the DisturbanceReport function.


Table 164: Event list (RDRE)

Function ValueBuffer capacity Maximum number of events in the list 1000

Resolution 1 ms

Accuracy Depending on timesynchronizing

8.7 Indications (RDRE)

8.7.1 IntroductionTo get fast, condensed and reliable information about disturbances in the primaryand/or in the secondary system it is important to know e.g. binary signals that havechanged status during a disturbance. This information is used in the short perspectiveto get information via the LHMI in a straightforward way.

There are three LEDs on the LHMI (green, yellow and red), which will display statusinformation about the IED and the Disturbance Report function (trigged).

The Indication list function shows all selected binary input signals connected to theDisturbance Report function that have changed status during a disturbance.

Section 8Monitoring


REB 670

The indication information is available for each of the recorded disturbances in theIED and the user may use the Local Human Machine Interface (LHMI) to get theinformation.

8.7.2 Principle of operationThe LED indications display this information:

Green LED:

Steady light In Service

Flashing light Internal fail

Dark No power supply

Yellow LED:

Steady light A disturbance report is triggered

Flashing light The IED is in test mode or in configuration mode

Red LED:

Steady light Trigged on binary signal N with SetLEDN=On

Indication list:

The possible indicated signals are the same as the ones chosen for the disturbancereport function and disturbance recorder

The indication function tracks 0 to 1 changes of binary signals during the recordingperiod of the collection window. This means that constant logic zero, constant logicone or state changes from logic one to logic zero will not be visible in the list ofindications. Signals are not time tagged. In order to be recorded in the list ofindications the:

• the signal must be connected to binary input (DRB1-6) function block• the DRP parameter Operation must be set On• the DRP must be trigged (binary or analogue)• the input signal must change state from logical 0 to 1 during the recording time.

Indications are selected with the indication mask (IndicationMask) when configuringthe binary inputs.

The name of the binary input signal that appears in the Indication function is the user-defined name assigned at configuration of the IED. The same name is used in

Section 8Monitoring


259

disturbance recorder function (DR), indications (IND) and event recorder function(ER).


8.7.4 Input signalsThe indication function may log the same binary input signals as the DisturbanceReport function.


Table 165: Indications

Function ValueBuffer capacity Maximum number of indications

presented for single disturbance96

Maximum number of recordeddisturbances

100

8.8 Event recorder (RDRE)

8.8.1 IntroductionQuick, complete and reliable information about disturbances in the primary and/or inthe secondary system is vital e.g. time tagged events logged during disturbances. Thisinformation is used for different purposes in the short term (e.g. corrective actions)and in the long term (e.g. Functional Analysis).

The event recorder logs all selected binary input signals connected to the DisturbanceReport function. Each recording can contain up to 150 time-tagged events.

The event recorder information is available for the disturbances locally in the IED.

The information may be uploaded to the PCM 600 (Protection and Control IEDManager) and further analysed using the Disturbance Handling tool.

The event recording information is an integrated part of the disturbance record(Comtrade file).

Section 8Monitoring


REB 670

8.8.2 Principle of operationWhen one of the trig conditions for the disturbance report is activated, the eventrecorder logs every status change in the 96 selected binary signals. The events can begenerated by both internal logical signals and binary input channels. The internalsignals are time-tagged in the main processor module, while the binary input channelsare time-tagged directly in each I/O module. The events are collected during the totalrecording time (pre-, post-fault and limit time), and are stored in the disturbance reportflash memory at the end of each recording.

In case of overlapping recordings, due to PostRetrig = On and a new trig signalappears during post-fault time, events will be saved in both recording files.

The name of the binary input signal that appears in the event recording is the user-defined name assigned when configuring the IED. The same name is used in thedisturbance recorder function (DR), indications (IND) and event recorder function(ER).

The event record is stored as a part of the disturbance report information (ER, DR,IND, TVR and FL) and managed via the LHMI or PCM 600.


8.8.4 Input signalsThe event recorder function logs the same binary input signals as the DisturbanceReport function.


Table 166: Event recorder (RDRE)

Function ValueBuffer capacity Maximum number of events in disturbance report 150

Maximum number of disturbance reports 100

Resolution 1 ms

Accuracy Depending ontimesynchronizing

Section 8Monitoring


261

8.9 Trip value recorder (RDRE)

8.9.1 IntroductionInformation about the pre-fault and fault values for currents and voltages are vital forthe disturbance evaluation.

The Trip value recorder calculates the values of all selected analogue input signalsconnected to the Disturbance report function. The result is magnitude and phase anglebefore and during the fault for each analogue input signal.

The trip value recorder information is available for the disturbances locally in theIED.

The information may be uploaded to the PCM 600 (Protection and Control IEDManager) and further analysed using the Disturbance Handling tool.

The trip value recorder information is an integrated part of the disturbance record(Comtrade file).

8.9.2 Principle of operationThe trip value recorder (TVR) calculates and presents both fault and pre-faultamplitudes as well as the phase angles of all the selected analog input signals. Theparameter ZeroAngleRef points out which input signal is used as the angle reference.The calculated data is input information to the fault locator (FL).

When the disturbance report function is triggered the sample for the fault interceptionis searched for, by checking the non-periodic changes in the analog input signals. Thechannel search order is consecutive, starting with the analog input with the lowestnumber.

When a starting point is found, the Fourier estimation of the pre-fault values of thecomplex values of the analog signals starts 1.5 cycle before the fault sample. Theestimation uses samples during one period. The post-fault values are calculated usingthe Recursive Least Squares (RLS) method. The calculation starts a few samples afterthe fault sample and uses samples during 1/2 - 2 cycles depending on the shape of thesignals.

If no starting point is found in the recording, the disturbance report trig sample is usedas the start sample for the Fourier estimation. The estimation uses samples during onecycle before the trig sample. In this case the calculated values are used both as pre-fault and fault values.

The name of the analog input signal that appears in the Trip value recorder functionis the user-defined name assigned when the IED is configured. The same name isused in the Disturbance recorder function (DR).

Section 8Monitoring


REB 670

The trip value record is stored as a part of the disturbance report information (ER,DR, IND, TVR and FLOC) and managed in via the LHMI or PCM 600.


8.9.4 Input signalsThe trip value recorder function uses analog input signals connected to DRA1-3 (notDRA4).


Table 167: Trip value recorder (RDRE)

Function ValueBuffer capacity

Maximum number of analog inputs 30


8.10 Disturbance recorder (RDRE)

8.10.1 IntroductionThe Disturbance Recorder function supplies fast, complete and reliable informationabout disturbances in the power system. It facilitates understanding system behaviorand related primary and secondary equipment during and after a disturbance.Recorded information is used for different purposes in the short perspective (e.g.corrective actions) and long perspective (e.g. Functional Analysis).

The Disturbance Recorder acquires sampled data from all selected analogue inputand binary signals connected to the Disturbance Report function (maximum 40 analogand 96 binary signals). The binary signals are the same signals as available under theevent recorder function.

The function is characterized by great flexibility and is not dependent on the operationof protection functions. It can record disturbances not detected by protectionfunctions.

The disturbance recorder information for the last 100 disturbances are saved in theIED and the Local Human Machine Interface (LHMI) is used to view the list ofrecordings.

Section 8Monitoring


263

The disturbance recording information can be uploaded to the PCM 600 (Protectionand Control IED Manager) and further analysed using the Disturbance Handling tool.

8.10.2 Principle of operationDisturbance recording (DR) is based on the acquisition of binary and analog signals.The binary signals can be either true binary input signals or internal logical signalsgenerated by the functions in the IED. The analog signals to be recorded are inputchannels from the Transformer Input Module (TRM), Line Differentialcommunication Module (LDCM) through the Signal Matrix Analog Input (SMAI)and possible summation (Sum3Ph) function blocks and some internally derivedanalog signals. For details, refer to section "Disturbance report (RDRE)".

DR collects analog values and binary signals continuously, in a cyclic buffer. Thepre-fault buffer operates according to the FIFO principle; old data will continuouslybe overwritten as new data arrives when the buffer is full. The size of this buffer isdetermined by the set pre-fault recording time.

Upon detection of a fault condition (triggering), the disturbance is time tagged andthe data storage continues in a post-fault buffer. The storage process continues as longas the fault condition prevails - plus a certain additional time. This is called the post-fault time and it can be set in the disturbance report.

The above mentioned two parts form a disturbance recording. The whole memory,intended for disturbance recordings, acts as a cyclic buffer and when it is full, theoldest recording is overwritten. The last 100 recordings are stored in the IED.

The time tagging refers to the activation of the trigger that starts the disturbancerecording. A recording can be trigged by, manual start, binary input and/or fromanalog inputs (over-/underlevel trig).

A user-defined name for each of the signals can be set. These names are common forall functions within the disturbance report functionality.

8.10.2.1 Memory and storage

When a recording is completed, a post recording processing occurs.

This post-recording processing comprises:

• Saving the data for analog channels with corresponding data for binary signals• Add relevant data to be used by the Disturbance Handling tool (part of PCM 600)• Compression of the data, which is performed without losing any data accuracy• Storing the compressed data in a non-volatile memory (flash memory)

The recorded disturbance is now ready for retrieval and evaluation.

The recording files comply with the Comtrade standard IEC 60255-24 and are dividedinto three files; a header file (HDR), a configuration file (CFG) and a data file (DAT).

Section 8Monitoring


REB 670

The header file (optional in the standard) contains basic information about thedisturbance i.e. information from the Disturbance Report functions (ER, TVR). TheDisturbance Handling tool use this information and present the recording in a user-friendly way.

General:

• Station name, object name and unit name• Date and time for the trig of the disturbance• Record number• Sampling rate• Time synchronization source• Recording times• Activated trig signal• Active setting group

Analog:

• Signal names for selected analog channels• Information e.g. trig on analog inputs• Primary and secondary instrument transformer rating• Over- or Undertrig: level and operation• Over- or Undertrig status at time of trig• CT direction

Binary:

• Signal names• Status of binary input signals

The configuration file is a mandatory file containing information needed to interpretthe data file. For example sampling rate, number of channels, system frequency,channel info etc.

The data file, which also is mandatory, containing values for each input channel foreach sample in the record (scaled value). The data file also contains a sequencenumber and time stamp for each set of samples.

8.10.2.2 IEC 60870-5-103

The communication protocol IEC 60870-5-103 may be used to poll disturbancerecordings from the IED to a master (i.e. station HSI). The standard describes howto handle 8 disturbance recordings, 8 analog channels (4 currents and 4 voltages)using the public range and binary signals.

The last 8 recordings, out of maximum 100, are available for transfer to the master.When the last one is transferred and acknowledged new recordings in the IED willappear, in the master points of view (even if they already where stored in the IED).

Section 8Monitoring


265

To be able to report 40 analog channels from the IED using IEC 60870-5-103 the first8 channels are placed in the public range and the next 32 are placed in the privaterange. To comply the standard the first 8 must be configured according totable 168.

Table 168: Configuration of analog channels

Signal Disturbance recorderIL1 DRA1 INPUT1

IL2 DRA1 INPUT2

IL3 DRA1 INPUT3

IN DRA1 INPUT4

UL1 DRA1 INPUT5

UL2 DRA1 INPUT6

UL3 DRA1 INPUT7

UN DRA1 INPUT8

The binary signals connected to DRB1-DRB6 are reported by polling. The functionblocks include function type and information number.

8.10.3 Function blockThe object has no function block of it’s own. It is included in the DRP-, DRAx andDRBx- block.

8.10.4 Input and output signalsFor signals see section, in Disturbance report, "Input and output signals".

8.10.5 Setting parametersFor Setting parameters see table 159 - table 162.


Table 169: Disturbance recorder (RDRE)

Function ValueBuffer capacity Maximum number of analog inputs 40

Maximum number of binary inputs 96


Maximum total recording time (3.4 s recording time and maximum number ofchannels, typical value)

340 seconds (100recordings) at 50Hz 280 seconds(80 recordings) at60 Hz

Section 8Monitoring


REB 670

Section 9 Station communication

About this chapterThis chapter describes the functions and protocols used on the interfaces to thesubstation automation and substation monitoring buses. The way these work, theirsetting parameters, function blocks, input and output signals and technical data areincluded for each function.

9.1 Overview

Each IED is provided with a communication interface, enabling it to connect to oneor many substation level systems or equipment, either on the Substation Automation(SA) bus or Substation Monitoring (SM) bus.

Following communication protocols are available:

• IEC 61850-8-1 communication protocol• LON communication protocol• SPA or IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol

Theoretically, several protocols can be combined in the same IED.

9.2 IEC 61850-8-1 communication protocol

9.2.1 IntroductionSingle or double optical Ethernet ports for the new substation communicationstandard IEC61850-8-1 for the station bus are provided. IEC61850-8-1 allowsintelligent devices (IEDs) from different vendors to exchange information andsimplifies SA engineering. Peer- to peer communication according to GOOSE is partof the standard. Disturbance files uploading is provided.

When double Ethernet ports are activated, make sure that the two portsare connected to different subnets. For example: Port 1 has IP-address138.227.102.10 with subnet mask 255.255.255.0 and port 2 has IP-address 138.227.103.10 with subnet mask 255.255.255.0

Section 9Station communication


267

9.2.2 Generic single point function block (SPGGIO)


The SPGGIO function block is used to send one single logical signal to other systemsor equipment in the substation.


Upon receiving a signal at its input, the SPGGIO function block will send the signalover IEC 61850-8-1 (via its non-transparent-to-CAP user output) to the equipmentor system that requests this signal. To be able to get the signal, one must use othertools, described in the Application Manual, Chapter 2: “Engineering of the IED” anddefine which function block in which equipment or system should receive thisinformation.


SPGGIOSP01-

IN

en05000409.vsd

Figure 121: SP function block

SP16GGIOMP01-

BLOCKIN1IN2IN3IN4IN5IN6IN7IN8IN9IN10IN11IN12IN13IN14IN15IN16

en06000632.vsd

Figure 122: MP function block


Table 170: Input signals for the SPGGIO (SP01-) function block

Signal DescriptionIN Input status



REB 670

Table 171: Input signals for the SP16GGIO (MP01-) function block


IN1 Input 1 status

IN2 Input 2 status

IN3 Input 3 status

IN4 Input 4 status

IN5 Input 5 status

IN6 Input 6 status

IN7 Input 7 status

IN8 Input 8 status

IN9 Input 9 status

IN10 Input 10 status








The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or Protection andControl IED Manager (PCM 600)

9.2.3 Generic measured values function block (MVGGIO)


The MVGGIO function block is used to send the instantaneous value of an analogoutput to other systems or equipment in the substation. It can also be used inside thesame IED, to attach a “RANGE” aspect to an analog value and to permit measurementsupervision on that value.


Upon receiving an analog signal at its input, the MVGGIO block will give theinstantaneous value of the signal and the range, as output values. In the same time, itwill send over IEC61850-8-1 (through two not-visible-to-CAP user outputs) the valueand the deadband, to other equipment or systems in the substation.



269


MVGGIOMV01-

IN VALUERANGE

en05000408.vsd

Figure 123: MV function block


Table 172: Input signals for the MVGGIO (MV01-) function block

Signal DescriptionIN Analogue input value

Table 173: Output signals for the MVGGIO (MV01-) function block

Signal DescriptionVALUE Magnitude of deadband value

RANGE Range


Table 174: General settings for the MVGGIO (MV01-) function

Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionMV db 1 - 300 1 10 - Deadband value

in % of range (in%s if integral isused)

MV zeroDb 0 - 100000 1 500 - Values less thanthis are forced tozero in 0,001% ofrange

MV hhLim -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000


MV hLim -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000

0.001 80.000 - High limit

MV lLim -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000

0.001 -80.000 - Low limit

MV llLim -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000

0.001 -90.000 - Low Low limit




REB 670

Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionMV min -10000000000.00

0 -10000000000.000

0.001 -100.000 - Minimum value

MV max -10000000000.000 -10000000000.000


MV dbType CyclicDead bandInt deadband


MV limHys 0.000 - 100.000 0.001 5.000 - Hysteresis valuein % of range andis common for alllimits


Table 175: IEC 61850-8-1 communication protocol

Function ValueProtocol IEC 61850-8-1

Communication speed for the IEDs 100BASE-FX

9.3 LON communication protocol

9.3.1 IntroductionAn optical network can be used within the Substation Automation system. Thisenables communication with the IED through the LON bus from the operator’sworkplace, from the control center and also from other terminals.

The LON protocol is specified in LonTalkProtocol Specification Version 3 fromEchelon Corporation and is designed for communication in control networks. Thesenetworks are characterized by high speed for data transfer, short messages (fewbytes), peer-to-peer communication, multiple communication media, lowmaintenance, multivendor equipment, and low support costs. LonTalk supports theneeds of applications that cover a range of requirements. The protocol follows thereference model for open system interconnection (OSI) designed by the InternationalStandardization Organization (ISO).

In this document the most common addresses for commands and events are available.Other addresses can be found in a separate document, refer to section "Relateddocuments".

It is assumed that the reader is familiar with the LON communication protocol ingeneral.



271

9.3.2 Principle of operationThe speed of the network depends on the medium and transceiver design. Withprotection and control devices, fiber optic media is used, which enables the use of themaximum speed of 1.25 Mbits/s. The protocol is a peer-to-peer protocol where allthe devices connected to the network can communicate with each other. The ownsubnet and node number are identifying the nodes (max. 255 subnets, 127 nodes perone subnet).

The LON bus links the different parts of the protection and control system. Themeasured values, status information, and event information are spontaneously sentto the higher-level devices. The higher-level devices can read and write memorizedvalues, setting values, and other parameter data when required. The LON bus alsoenables the bay level devices to communicate with each other to deliver, for example,interlocking information among the terminals without the need of a bus master.

The LonTalk protocol supports two types of application layer objects: networkvariables and explicit messages. Network variables are used to deliver short messages,such as measuring values, status information, and interlocking/blocking signals.Explicit messages are used to transfer longer pieces of information, such as eventsand explicit read and write messages to access device data.

The benefits achieved from using the LON bus in protection and control systemsinclude direct communication among all terminals in the system and support formulti-master implementations. The LON bus also has an open concept, so that theterminals can communicate with external devices using the same standard of networkvariables.

Introduction of LON protocolFor more information see ‘LON bus, LonWorks Network in Protection and Control,User’s manual and Technical description, 1MRS 750035-MTD EN’.

LON protocol

Configuration of LONLon Network Tool (LNT 505) is a multi-purpose tool for LonWorks networkconfiguration. All the functions required for setting up and configuring a LonWorksnetwork is easily accessible on a single tool program. For details see the “Operatorsmanual”.

Activate LONCommunicationActivate LON communication in the PST Parameter Setting Tool under Settings ->General settings – > Communication – > SLM configuration – > Rear optical LON,where ADE should be set to ON.

Add LON Device Types LNTA new device is added to LON Network Tool from the Device menu or by installingthe device from the ABB LON Device Types package for LNT 505, with the SLDTIED 670 package version 1p2 r03.



REB 670

LON net addressTo be able to establish a LON connection with the 670IEDs, the IED has to be givena unique net address. The net address consists of a subnet and node number. This isaccomplished with the LON Network Tool by creating one device for each IED.

Vertical communicationVertical communication describes communication between the monitoring devicesand protection and control IEDs. This communication includes sending of changedprocess data to monitoring devices as events and transfer of commands, parameterdata and disturbance recorder files. This communication is implemented usingexplicit messages.

Events and indicationsEvents sent to the monitoring devices are using explicit messages (message code 44H)with unacknowledged transport service of the LonTalk protocol. When a signal ischanged in the 670IED, one message with the value, quality and time is transmittedfrom terminal.

Binary eventsBinary events are generated in event function blocks EV01 to EV20 in the 670IEDs.The event function blocks have predefined LON addresses. table 176 shows the LONaddresses to the first input on the event function blocks. The addresses to the otherinputs on the event function block are consecutive after the first input. For example,input 15 on event block EV17 has the address 1280 + 14 (15-1) = 1294.

For double indications only the first eight inputs 1–8 must be used. Inputs 9–16 canbe used for other type of events at the same event block.

As basic, 3 event function blocks EV01-EV03 running with a fast loop time (3 ms)is available in the 670IEDS. The remaining event function blocks EV04-EV09 runswith a loop time on 8 ms and EV10-EV20 runs with a loop time on 100 ms. The eventblocks are used to send binary signals, integers, real time values like analogue datafrom measuring functions and mA input modules as well as pulse counter signals.

16 pulse counter value function blocks PC01 to PC16 and 24 mA input service valuesfunction blocks SMMI1_In1 to 6 – SMMI4_In1 to 6 are available in the 670IEDs.

The first LON address in every event function block is found in table 176

Table 176: LON adresses for Event functions

Function block First LON address infunction block

EV01 1024

EV02 1040

EV03 1056

EV04 1072

EV05 1088

EV06 1104

EV07 1120




273

Function block First LON address infunction block

EV08 1136

EV09 1152

EV10 1168

EV11 1184

EV12 1200

EV13 1216

EV14 1232

EV15 1248

EV16 1264

EV17 1280

EV18 1296

EV19 1312

EV20 1328

Event masksThe event mask for each input can be set individually from the Parameter SettingTool (PST) Under: Settings – > General Settings –> Monitoring –> Event functionas.

• No events• OnSet, at pick-up of the signal• OnReset, at drop-out of the signal• OnChange, at both pick-up and drop-out of the signal• AutoDetect, event system itself make the reporting decision, (reporting criteria

for integers has no semantic, prefer to be set by the user)

The following type of signals from application functions can be connected to the eventfunction block.

Single indicationDirectly connected binary IO signal via binary input function block (SMBI) is alwaysreported on change, no changed detection is done in the event function block. OtherBoolean signals, for example a start or a trip signal from a protection function is eventmasked in the event function block.

Double indicationsDouble indications can only be reported via switch-control (SCSWI) functions, theevent reporting is based on information from switch-control, no change detection isdone in the event function block.

Directly connected binary IO signal via binary input function block (SMBI) is notpossible to handle as double indication. Double indications can only be reported forthe first 8 inputs on an event function block.



REB 670

• 00 generates an intermediate event with the read status 0• 01 generates an open event with the read status 1• 10 generates a close event with the read status 2• 11 generates an undefined event with the read status 3

Analog valueAll analog values are reported cyclic, the reporting interval is taken from theconnected function if there is a limit supervised signal, otherwise it is taken from theevent function block.

Figure 124: Connection of protection signals for event handling.

Command handlingCommands are transferred using transparent SPA-bus messages. The transparentSPA-bus message is an explicit LON message, which contains an ASCII charactermessage following the coding rules of the SPA-bus protocol. The message is sentusing explicit messages with message code 41H and using acknowledged transportservice.

Both the SPA-bus command messages (R or W) and the reply messages (D, A or N)are sent using the same message code. It is mandatory that one device sends out onlyone SPA-bus message at a time to one node and waits for the reply before sendingthe next message.



275

For commands from the operator workplace to the IED for apparatus control, i.e. thefunction blocks type SCSWI 1 to 32, SXCBR 1 to 18and SXSWI 1 to 28; the SPAaddresses are according to table 177

Horizontal communicationNetwork variables are used for communication between REx 5xx and 670IEDs. Thesupported network variable type is SNVT_state (NV type 83). SNVT_state is usedto communicate the state of a set of 1 to 16 Boolean values.

The multiple command send function block (MTxx) is used to pack the informationto one value. This value is transmitted to the receiving node and presented for theapplication by a multiple command function block (CMxx). At horizontalcommunication the input BOUND on the event function block (MTxx) must be setto 1. There are 10 MT and 60 CM function blocks available. The MT and CM functionblocks are connected using Lon Network Tool (LNT 505). This tool also defines theservice and addressing on LON.

This is an overview description how to configure the network variables for 670IEDs.

Configuration of LON network variablesConfigure the Network variables according to your application from the LONnetwork Tool. For more details see “LNT 505” in “Operators manual”. The followingis an example of how to configure network variables concerning e.g. interlockingbetween two 670IEDs.

MT07

BAY E1

CM09

BAY E3

LON

BAY E4

CM09

en05000718.vsd

Figure 125: Examples connections between MT and CM function blocks in threeterminals.

The network variable connections are done from the NV Connection window. FromLNT window select Connections -> NVConnections -> New



REB 670

en05000719.vsd

Figure 126: The network variables window in LNT.

There are two ways of downloading NV connections. Either you use the drag-and-drop method where you select all nodes in the device window, drag them to theDownload area in the bottom of the program window and drop them there. Or thetraditional menu selection, Configuration -> Download...



277

en05000720.vsd

Figure 127: The download configuration window in LNT.

Communication portsThe serial communication module (SLM) is used for SPA or IEC 60870-5-103 andLON communication. This module is a mezzanine module, and can be placed on theMain Processing Module (NUM). The serial communication module can haveconnectors for two plastic fiber cables (snap-in) or two glass fiber cables (ST,bayonet) or a combination of plastic and glass fiber. Three different types are availabledepending on type of fiber. The incoming optical fiber is connected to the RX receiverinput, and the outgoing optical fiber to the TX transmitter output. When the fiber opticcables are laid out, pay special attention to the instructions concerning the handling,connection, etc. of the optical fibers. The module is identified with a number on thelabel on the module.

Table 177: SPA addresses for commands from the operator workplace to the IED for apparatuscontrol

Name Functionblock

SPAaddress

Description

BL_CMD SCSWI01 1 I 5115 SPA parameters for block command












REB 670

Name Functionblock

SPAaddress

Description
























CANCEL SCSWI01 1 I 5107 SPA parameters for cancelcommand













279

Name Functionblock

SPAaddress

Description


























REB 670

Name Functionblock

SPAaddress

Description

SELECTOpen=00,SELECTClose=01,SELOpen+ILO=10,SELClose+ILO=11,SELOpen+SCO=20,SELClose+SCO=21,SELOpen+ILO+SCO=30,SELClose+ILO+SCO=31

SCSWI01 1 I 5105 SPA parameters for select (Open/Close) commandNote: Send select command beforeoperate command

SELECTOpen=00,SELECTClose=01, etc.

SCSWI02 1 I 5129 SPA parameters for select (Open/Close) command












































281

Name Functionblock

SPAaddress

Description





















ExcOpen=00,ExcClose=01,ExcOpen+ILO=10,ExcClose+ILO=11,ExcOpen+SCO=20,ExcClose+SCO=21,ExcOpen+ILO+SCO=30,ExcClose+ILO+SCO=31

SCSWI01 1 I 5106 SPA parameters for operate (Open/Close) commandNote: Send select command beforeoperate command

ExcOpen=00,ExcClose=01, etc.

SCSWI02 1 I 5130 SPA parameters for operate (Open/Close) command
























REB 670

Name Functionblock

SPAaddress

Description









































Sub Value SXCBR01 2 I 7854 SPA parameter for position to besubstitutedNote: Send the value before Enable

Sub Value SXCBR02 2 I 7866 SPA parameter for position to besubstituted






283

Name Functionblock

SPAaddress

Description















Sub Value SXSWI01 3 I 196 SPA parameter for position to besubstituted













REB 670

Name Functionblock

SPAaddress

Description



















Sub Enable SXCBR01 2 I 7855 SPA parameter for substitute enablecommandNote: Send the Value before Enable

Sub Enable SXCBR02 2 I 7865 SPA parameter for substitute enablecommand








285

Name Functionblock

SPAaddress

Description













Sub Enable SXSWI01 3 I 197 SPA parameter for substitute enablecommand










Sub Enable SXSWI11 3I 379 SPA parameter for substitute enablecommand





REB 670

Name Functionblock

SPAaddress

Description

















Update Block SXCBR01 2 I 7853 SPA parameter for update blockcommand











287

Name Functionblock

SPAaddress

Description











Update Block SXSWI01 3 I 198 SPA parameter for update blockcommand

















REB 670

Name Functionblock

SPAaddress

Description
















Table 178: General settings for the NVLON (NV---) function


On- Off - Operation

Table 179: General settings for the LON (ADE1-) function


On- Off - Operation

TimerClass SlowNormalFast

- Slow - Timer class



289


Table 180: LON communication protocol

Function ValueProtocol LON

Communication speed 1.25 Mbit/s

9.4 SPA communication protocol

9.4.1 IntroductionIn this section the most common addresses for commands and events are available.Other addresses can be found in a separate document, refer to section "Relateddocuments".

It is assumed that the reader is familiar with the SPA communication protocol ingeneral.

9.4.2 Principle of operationThe SPA bus uses an asynchronous serial communications protocol (1 start bit, 7 databits + even parity, 1 stop bit) with data transfer rate up to 38400 bit/s. Recommendedbaud rate for each type of terminal will be found in the “Technical referencemanual”. Messages on the bus consist of ASCII characters.

Introduction of SPA protocolThe basic construction of the protocol assumes that the slave has no self-initiatedneed to talk to the master but the master is aware of the data contained in the slavesand, consequently, can request required data. In addition, the master can send data tothe slave. Requesting by the master can be performed either by sequenced polling(e.g. for event information) or only on demand.

The master requests slave information using request messages and sends informationto the slave in write messages. Furthermore, the master can send all slaves in commona broadcast message containing time or other data. The inactive state of bus transmitand receive lines is a logical "1".

SPA protocolThe tables below specify the SPA addresses for reading data from and writing datato an IED 670 with the SPA communication protocol implemented.

The SPA addresses for the mA input service values (MI03-MI16) are found intable181



REB 670

Table 181: SPA addresses for the MIM (MI03-MI16) function

Function block SPA addressMI03-CH1 4-O-6508

MI03-CH2 4-O-6511

MI03-CH3 4-O-6512

MI03-CH4 4-O-6515

MI03-CH5 4-O-6516

MI03-CH6 4-O-6519

MI04-CH1 4-O-6527

MI04-CH2 4-O-6530

MI04-CH3 4-O-6531

MI04-CH4 4-O-6534

MI04-CH5 4-O-6535

MI04-CH6 4-O-6538

MI05-CH1 4-O-6546

MI05-CH2 4-O-6549

MI05-CH3 4-O-6550

MI05-CH4 4-O-6553

MI05-CH5 4-O-6554

MI05-CH6 4-O-6557

MI06-CH1 4-O-6565

MI06-CH2 4-O-6568

MI06-CH3 4-O-6569

MI06-CH4 4-O-6572

MI06-CH5 4-O-6573

MI06-CH6 4-O-6576

MI07-CH1 4-O-6584

MI07-CH2 4-O-6587

MI07-CH3 4-O-6588

MI07-CH4 4-O-6591

MI07-CH5 4-O-6592

MI07-CH6 4-O-6595

MI08-CH1 4-O-6603

MI08-CH2 4-O-6606

MI08-CH3 4-O-6607

MI08-CH4 4-O-6610

MI08-CH5 4-O-6611

MI08-CH6 4-O-6614

MI09-CH1 4-O-6622

MI09-CH2 4-O-6625




291


MI09-CH4 4-O-6629

MI09-CH5 4-O-6630

MI09-CH6 4-O-6633

MI10-CH1 4-O-6641

MI10-CH2 4-O-6644

MI10-CH3 4-O-6645

MI10-CH4 4-O-6648

MI10-CH5 4-O-6649

MI10-CH6 4-O-6652

MI11-CH1 4-O-6660

MI11-CH2 4-O-6663

MI11-CH3 4-O-6664

MI11-CH4 4-O-6667

MI11-CH5 4-O-6668

MI11-CH6 4-O-6671

MI12-CH1 4-O-6679

MI12-CH2 4-O-6682

MI12-CH3 4-O-6683

MI12-CH4 4-O-6686

MI12-CH5 4-O-6687

MI12-CH6 4-O-6690

MI13-CH1 4-O-6698

MI13-CH2 4-O-6701

MI13-CH3 4-O-6702

MI13-CH4 4-O-6705

MI13-CH5 4-O-6706

MI13-CH6 4-O-6709

MI14-CH1 4-O-6717

MI14-CH2 4-O-6720

MI14-CH3 4-O-6721

MI14-CH4 4-O-6724

MI14-CH5 4-O-6725

MI14-CH6 4-O-6728

MI15-CH1 4-O-6736

MI15-CH2 4-O-6739

MI15-CH3 4-O-6740

MI15-CH4 4-O-6743

MI15-CH5 4-O-6744




REB 670


MI16-CH1 4-O-6755

MI16-CH2 4-O-6758

MI16-CH3 4-O-6759

MI16-CH4 4-O-6762

MI16-CH5 4-O-6763

MI16-CH6 4-O-6766

The SPA addresses for the pulse counter values PC01 – PC16 are found in table 182

Table 182: SPA addresses for the PCGGIO (PC01-PC16 function

Function block SPA addressPC01-CNT_VAL 3-O-5834

PC02-CNT_VAL 3-O-5840















I/O modulesTo read binary inputs, the SPA-addresses for the outputs of the I/O-module functionblock are used, i.e. the addresses for BI1 – BI16. The SPA addresses are found in aseparate document, refer to section "Related documents".

Storage of settings in FLASHSettings that do not belong to a setting group are usually written to FLASH oncommand.

One example is for the limits of the mA-input modules (MIxx), where 0 value mustbe written to the 10V43 address. Addresses for other settings that must be stored on



293

command, can be found in a separate document, refer to section "Relateddocuments".

Single command functionThe IEDs may be provided with a function to receive signals either from a substationautomation system or from the local human-machine interface, HMI. That receivingfunction block has 16 outputs that can be used, for example, to control high voltageapparatuses in switchyards. For local control functions, the local HMI can also beused.

The single command function consists of three function blocks; CD01 – CD03 for16 binary output signals each.

The signals can be individually controlled from the operator station, remote-controlgateway, or from the local HMI on the IED. The SPA addresses for the singlecommand function (CD) are shown in Table 3. For the single command functionblock, CD01 to CD03, the address is for the first output. The other outputs followconsecutively after the first one. For example, output 7 on the CD02 function blockhas the 70O718 address.

The SPA addresses for the single command functions CD01 – CD03 are found intable 183

Table 183: SPA addresses for the SingleCmd (CD01-CD03) function

Function block SPA addressCD01-CmdInput1 4-S-4639

CD01-CmdInput2 4-S-4640






















REB 670

Function block SPA addressCD02-CmdInput5 4-S-4676




























Table 183 SPA addresses for the controllable signals on the single command functions

Figure 128 shows an application example of how the user can, in a simplified way,connect the command function via the configuration logic circuit in a protectionterminal for control of a circuit breaker.

A pulse via the binary outputs of the terminal normally performs this type of commandcontrol. The SPA addresses to control the outputs OUT1 – OUT16 in CD01 are shownin table 183



295

Figure 128: Application example showing a simplified logic diagram for control ofa circuit breaker.

The MODE input defines if the output signals from CD01 shall be steady or pulsedsignals (1 = steady, 2 = pulsed).

Event functionThis event function is intended to send time-tagged events to the station level (e.g.operator workplace) over the station bus. The events are there presented in an eventlist. The events can be created from both internal logical signals and binary inputchannels, and all of them must be tied to the 6 DR function blocks. All internal signalsare time tagged in the main processing module, while the binary input channels aretime tagged directly on each I/O module. The events are produced according to theset event masks. The event masks are treated commonly for both the LON and SPAchannels. All events according to the event mask are stored in a buffer, which containsup to 1000 events. If new events appear before the oldest event in the buffer is read,the oldest event is overwritten and an overflow alarm appears.

Two special signals for event registration purposes are available in the terminal,Terminal Restarted (0E50) and Event buffer overflow (0E51).

The input parameters can be set individually from the Parameter Setting Tool (PST)under EVENT MASKS/Binary Events as:

• No events (event mask 0)• OnSet, at pick-up of the signal (event mask 1)• OnReset, at drop-out of the signal (event mask 2)• OnChange, at both pick-up and drop-out of the signal (event mask 3)

Double indications are used to handle a combination of two inputs at a time, forexample, one input for the open and one for the close position of a circuit breaker ordisconnector. The double indication consists of an odd and an even input number.When the odd input is defined as a double indication, the next even input is consideredto be the other input. The odd inputs has a suppression timer to suppress events at 00states. To be used as double indications the odd inputs are individually set from thePST under EVENT MASKS/Binary Events as:



REB 670

• Double indication (event mask 4)• Double indication with midposition suppression (event mask 5)

Here, the settings of the corresponding even inputs have no meaning. These states ofthe inputs generate events.

The status is read by the station HMI on the status indication for the odd input:

• 00 generates an intermediate event with the read status 0• 01 generates a close event with the read status 1• 10 generates an open event with the read status 2• 11 generates an undefined event with the read status 3

No analog events are available for SPA.

The Status and event codes for the Event functions are found in table 184



297

Table 184: Status and event codes

Single indication1) Double indication 2)

Event block Status Set event Reset event Intermediate 00

Closed 01 Open 10 Undefined11

EV01Input 1Input 2Input 3Input 4Input 5Input 6Input 7Input 8Input 9Input 10Input 11Input 12Input 13Input 14Input 15Input 16EV01 3)

2201220222032204220522062207220822092210221122122213221422152216

22E3322E3522E3722E3922E4122E4322E4522E4722E4922E5122E5322E5522E5722E5922E6122E63

22E3222E3422E3622E3822E4022E4222E4422E4622E4822E5022E5222E5422E5622E5822E60

22E0 22E4 22E8 22E12 22E16 22E20 22E24 22E28

22E1 22E5 22E9 22E13 22E17 22E21 22E25 22E29

22E2 22E6 22E10 22E14 22E18 22E22 22E26 22E30

22E3 22E7 22E11 22E15 22E19 22E23 22E27 22E31

EV02EV03---EV20

230..240..---410..

23E..24E..---41E..

23E..24E..---41E..

23E..24E..---41E..

23E..23E..---41E..

23E..24E..---41E..

23E..24E..---41E..

1) These values are only applicable if the Event mask is masked 0, 1, 2 or 3.

2) These values are only applicable if the Event mask is masked 4 or 5.

3) This status value contains a value with all the 16 inputs combined to a hex-value(0-FFF).

Example

The master requests the slave (no. 2) for latest events by addressing data categoryL:>2RL:CCcr



REB 670

The slave sends the recent events from the buffer starting from the oldest event. If allrecent events do not fit into one message, rest of recent events will not be sent untilduring the next request.

When events are requested from the slave and the buffer of the slave is empty, theslave responds with an empty data message: If<2D::CCcrlf.

Connection of signals as eventsSignals coming from different protection and control functions and shall be sent asevents to the station level over the SPA-bus (or LON-bus) are connected to the Eventfunction block according to figure 129

Figure 129: Connection of protection signals for event handling.

Note that corresponding Event mask must be set to an applicable value via theParameter Setting Tool (PST).



299

9.4.2.1 Communication ports

The serial communication module (SLM) is used for SPA or IEC 60870-5-103 andLON communication. This module is a mezzanine module, and can be placed on theAnalog/Digital conversion module (ADM). The serial communication module canhave connectors for two plastic fiber cables (snap-in) or two glass fiber cables (ST,bayonet) or a combination of plastic and glass fiber. Three different types are availabledepending on type of fiber.

The incoming optical fiber is connected to the RX receiver input, and the outgoingoptical fiber to the TX transmitter output. When the fiber optic cables are laid out,pay special attention to the instructions concerning the handling, connection, etc. ofthe optical fibers. The module is identified with a number on the label on the module.

The procedure to set the transfer rate and slave number can be found in the Installationand commissioning manual for respective IED.

9.4.3 DesignWhen communicating locally with a Personal Computer (PC) in the station, using therear SPA port, the only hardware needed for a station monitoring system is:

• Optical fibres• Opto/electrical converter for the PC• PC

When communicating remotely with a PC using the rear SPA port, the same hardwareis needed plus telephone modems.

The software needed in the PC, either local or remote, is PCM 600.

When communicating between the LHMI and a PC, the only hardware required is afront-connection cable.


Table 185: General settings for the SPA (SPA1-) function

Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionSlaveAddress 1 - 899 1 30 - Slave address

BaudRate 300 Bd1200 Bd4800 Bd9600 Bd19200 Bd38400 Bd57600 Bd

- 9600 Bd - Baudrate onserial line



REB 670

Table 186: General settings for the SPAviaSLM (SPA1-) function


BaudRate 300 Bd1200 Bd4800 Bd9600 Bd19200 Bd38400 Bd


Table 187: General settings for the SPAviaLON (SPA4-) function


On- Off - Operation

SlaveAddress 1 - 899 1 30 - Slave address


Table 188: SPA communication protocol

Function ValueProtocol SPA

Communication speed 300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200 or38400 Bd

Slave number 1 to 899

9.5 IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol

9.5.1 IntroductionThe IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol is mainly used when a protectionterminal communicates with a third party control or monitoring system. This systemmust have software that can interpret the IEC 60870-5-103 communication messages.


9.5.2.1 General

The IEC 60870-5-103 is an unbalanced (master-slave) protocol for coded-bit serialcommunication exchanging information with a control system, and with a datatransfer rate up to 38400 bit/s. In IEC terminology a primary station is a master anda secondary station is a slave. The communication is based on a point-to-point



301

principle. The master must have software that can interpret the IEC 60870-5-103communication messages.

Introduction of IEC 60870–5–103 protocolThe IEC 60870-5-103 protocol implementation in IED 670 consists of thesefunctions:

• Event handling• Report of analog service values (measurements)• Fault location• Command handling

• Autorecloser ON/OFF• Teleprotection ON/OFF• Protection ON/OFF• LED reset• Characteristics 1 - 4 (Setting groups)

• File transfer (disturbance files)• Time synchronization

For detailed information about IEC 60870-5-103, refer to the IEC60870 standard part5: Transmission protocols, and to the section 103: Companion standard for theinformative interface of protection equipment.

IEC 60870-5-103The tables in the following sections specify the information types supported by theIED 670 products with the communication protocol IEC 60870-5-103 implemented.

To support the information, corresponding functions must be included in theprotection and control IED.

Commands in control directionTerminal commands in control direction, I103IEDCMDCommand block in control direction with defined terminal signals.

Number of instances: 1

Command block use PARAMETER as FUNCTION TYPE.

INFORMATION NUMBER is defined for each output signals.

Info. no Message Supported19 LED Reset Yes

23 Activate setting group 1 Yes




Function commands in control direction, pre-defined I103CMD



REB 670

Function command block in control direction with defined output signals.


FUNCTION TYPE parameter for each block.

INFORMATION NUMBER is defined for each output signals.

Info. no. Message Supported16 Auto-recloser on/off Yes

17 Teleprotection on/off Yes

18 Protection on/off Yes

Function commands in control direction, user-defined, I103UserCMDFunction command blocks in control direction with user-defined output signals.


FUNCTION TYPE parameter for each block in private range. Default values aredefined in private range 1 - 4. One for each instance.

INFORMATION NUMBER is required for each output signal. Default values are 1- 8.

Info. no. Message Supported1 Output signal 01 Yes

2 Output signal 02 Yes







StatusTerminal status indications in monitor direction, I103IEDIndication block for status in monitor direction with defined terminal functions.


Indication block use PARAMETER as FUNCTION TYPE.

INFORMATION NUMBER is defined for each input signals.



303

Info. no. Message Supported19 LED reset Yes

23 Setting group 1 active Yes




21 Test mode active Yes

Function status indications in monitor direction, user-defined, I103UserDefFunction indication blocks in monitor direction with user-defined input signals.


FUNCTION TYPE parameter for each block in private range. Default values aredefined in private range 5 - 24. One for each instance.

INFORMATION NUMBER is required for each input signal. Default values aredefined in range 1 - 8

Info. no. Message Supported1 Input signal 01 Yes

2 Input signal 02 Yes







Supervision indications in monitor direction, I103SupervIndication block for supervision in monitor direction with defined functions.



INFORMATION NUMBER is defined for output signals.

Info. no. Message Supported32 Measurand supervision I Yes

33 Measurand supervision U Yes

37 I>>back-up operation Yes

38 VT fuse failure Yes

46 Group warning Yes

47 Group alarm Yes



REB 670

Earth fault indications in monitor direction, I103EFIndication block for earth fault in monitor direction with defined functions.



INFORMATION NUMBER is defined for each output signal.

Info. no. Message Supported51 Earth fault forward Yes

52 Earth fault reverse Yes

Fault indications in monitor direction, type 1, I103FltDisFault indication block for faults in monitor direction with defined functions.

The instance type is suitable for distance protection function.


INFORMATION NUMBER is defined for each input signal.


Info. no. Message Supported64 Start L1 Yes

65 Start L2 Yes

66 Start L3 Yes

67 Start IN Yes

84 General start Yes

69 Trip L1 Yes

70 Trip L2 Yes

71 Trip L3 Yes

68 General trip Yes

74 Fault forward/line Yes

75 Fault reverse/busbar Yes

78 Zone 1 Yes

79 Zone 2 Yes

80 Zone 3 Yes

81 Zone 4 Yes

82 Zone 5 Yes

76 Signal transmitted Yes

77 Signal received Yes

73 SCL, Fault location in ohm Yes



305

Fault indications in monitor direction, type 2, I103FltStdFault indication block for faults in monitor direction with defined functions.

The instance type is suitable for linediff, transformerdiff, overcurrent and earthfaultprotection functions.

FUNCTION TYPE setting for each block.

INFORMATION NUMBER is defined for each input signal.


Info. no. Message Supported64 Start L1 Yes

65 Start L2 Yes

66 Start L3 Yes

67 Start IN Yes

84 General start Yes

69 Trip L1 Yes

70 Trip L2 Yes

71 Trip L3 Yes

68 General trip Yes

74 Fault forward/line Yes

75 Fault reverse/busbar Yes

85 Breaker failure Yes

86 Trip measuring system L1 Yes



89 Trip measuring system N Yes

90 Over current trip I> Yes

91 Over current trip I>> Yes

92 Earth fault trip IN> Yes

93 Earth fault trip IN>> Yes

Autorecloser indications in monitor direction, I103ARIndication block for autorecloser in monitor direction with defined functions.



INFORMATION NUMBER is defined for each output signal.



REB 670

Info. no. Message Supported16 Autorecloser active Yes

128 CB on by Autorecloser Yes

130 Autorecloser blocked Yes

MeasurandsFunction blocks in monitor direction for input measurands. Typically connected tomonitoring function, for example to power measurement CVMMXU.

Measurands in public range, I103MeasNumber of instances: 1

The IED will report all valid measuring types depending on connected signals.

Upper limit for measured currents, active/reactive-power is 2.4 times rated value.

Upper limit for measured voltages and frequency is 1.2 times rated value.

Info. no. Message Supported148 IL1 Yes

144, 145,148

IL2 Yes

148 IL3 Yes

147 IN, Neutral current Yes

148 UL1 Yes

148 UL2 Yes

148 UL3 Yes

145, 146 UL1-UL2 Yes

147 UN, Neutral voltage Yes

146, 148 P, active power Yes

146, 148 Q, reactive power Yes

148 f, frequency Yes

Measurands in private range, I103MeasUsrNumber of instances: 3

FUNCTION TYPE parameter for each block in private range. Default values aredefined in private range 25 – 27. One for each instance.

INFORMATION NUMBER parameter for each block. Default value 1.

Info. no. Message Supported- Meas1 Yes

- Meas2 Yes

- Meas3 Yes




307

Info. no. Message Supported- Meas4 Yes

- Meas5 Yes

- Meas6 Yes

- Meas7 Yes

- Meas8 Yes

- Meas9 Yes

Disturbance recordingsThe following elements are used in the ASDUs (Application Service Data Units)defined in the standard.

Analog signals, 40-channels: the channel number for each channel has to be specified.Channels used in the public range are 1 to 8 and with:

• IL1 connected to channel 1 on disturbance function block DRA1• IL2 connected to channel 2 on disturbance function block DRA1• IL3 connected to channel 3 on disturbance function block DRA1• IN connected to channel 4 on disturbance function block DRA1• VL1E connected to channel 5 on disturbance function block DRA1• VL2E connected to channel 6 on disturbance function block DRA1• VL3E connected to channel 7 on disturbance function block DRA1• VEN connected to channel 8 on disturbance function block DRA1

Channel number used for the remaining 32 analog signals are numbers in the privaterange 64 to 95.

Binary signals, 96-channels: for each channel the user can specify a FUNCTIONTYPE and an INFORMATION NUMBER.

Disturbance Upload

All analog and binary signals that are recorded with disturbance recorder will bereported to the master. The last eight disturbances that are recorded are available fortransfer to the master. A successfully transferred disturbance (acknowledged by themaster) will not be reported to the master again.

When a new disturbance is recorded by the IED a list of available recordeddisturbances will be sent to the master, an updated list of available disturbances willbe sent whenever something has happened to disturbances in this list. I.e. when adisturbance is deleted (by other client e.g. SPA) or when a new disturbance has beenrecorded or when the master has uploaded a disturbance.

Deviations from the standard



REB 670

Information sent in the disturbance upload is specified by the standard; however,some of the information are adapted to information available in disturbance recorderin Rex67x.

This section describes all data that is not exactly as specified in the standard.

ASDU23

In ‘list of recorded disturbances’ (ASDU23) an information element named SOF(status of fault) exists. This information element consists of 4 bits and indicateswhether:

• Bit TP: the protection equipment has tripped during the fault• Bit TM: the disturbance data are currently being transmitted• Bit TEST: the disturbance data have been recorded during normal operation or

test mode.• Bit OTEV: the disturbance data recording has been initiated by another event

than start/pick-up

The only information that is easily available is test-mode status. The other informationis always set (hard coded) to:

TP Recorded fault with trip. [1]

TM Disturbance data waiting for transmission [0]

OTEV Disturbance data initiated by other events [1]

Another information element in ASDU23 is the FAN (fault number). According tothe standard this is a number that is incremented when a protection function takesaction. In Rex67x FAN is equal to disturbance number, which is incremented for eachdisturbance.

ASDU26

When a disturbance has been selected by the master; (by sending ASDU24), theprotection equipment answers by sending ASDU26, which contains an informationelement named NOF (number of grid faults). This number should indicate faultnumber in the power system, i.e. a fault in the power system with several trip andauto-reclosing has the same NOF (while the FAN should be incremented). NOF is inRex67x, just as FAN, equal to disturbance number.

To get INF and FUN for the recorded binary signals there are parameters on thedisturbance recorder for each input. The user must set these parameters to whateverhe connects to the corresponding input.



309

Interoperability, physical layer

SupportedElectrical Interface

EIA RS-485 No

number of loads No

Optical interface

glass fibre Yes

plastic fibre Yes

Transmission speed

96000 bit/s Yes

19200 bit/s Yes

Link Layer

DFC-bit used Yes

Connectors

connector F-SMA No

connector BFOC/2.5 Yes

Interoperability, application layer

SupportedSelection of standard ASDUs in monitoring direction

ASDU Yes

1 Time-tagged message Yes

2 Time-tagged message with rel. time Yes

3 Measurands I Yes

4 Time-tagged message with rel. time Yes

5 Identification Yes

6 Time synchronization Yes

8 End of general interrogation Yes

9 Measurands II Yes

10 Generic data No

11 Generic identification No

23 List of recorded disturbances Yes

26 Ready for transm. of disturbance data Yes

27 Ready for transm. of a channel Yes

28 Ready for transm of tags Yes

29 Transmission of tags Yes

30 Transmission fo disturbance data Yes

31 End of transmission Yes

Selection of standard ASDUs in control direction




REB 670

SupportedASDU Yes

6 Time synchronization Yes

7 General interrogation Yes

10 Generic data No

20 General command Yes

21 Generic command No

24 Order for disturbance data transmission Yes

25 Acknowledgement for distance data transmission Yes

Selection of basic application functions

Test mode No

Blocking of monitoring direction Yes

Disturbance data Yes

Private data Yes

Generic services No

9.5.2.2 Communication ports

The serial communication module (SLM) is used for SPA or IEC 60870-5-103 andLON communication. This module is a mezzanine module, and can be placed on theAnalog/Digital conversion module (ADM). The serial communication module canhave connectors for two plastic fiber cables (snap-in) or two glass fiber cables (ST,bayonet) or a combination of plastic and glass fiber. Three different types are availabledepending on type of fiber.

The incoming optical fiber is connected to the RX receiver input, and the outgoingoptical fiber to the TX transmitter output. When the fiber optic cables are laid out,pay special attention to the instructions concerning the handling, connection, etc. ofthe optical fibers. The module is identified with a number on the label on the module.


I103IEDCMDICMA-

BLOCK 19-LEDRS23-GRP124-GRP225-GRP326-GRP4

en05000689.vsd

I103CMDICMD-

BLOCK 16-AR17-DIFF

18-PROT

en05000684.vsd



311

I103UserCMDICM1-

BLOCK OUTPUT1OUTPUT2OUTPUT3OUTPUT4OUTPUT5OUTPUT6OUTPUT7OUTPUT8

en05000693.vsd

I103IEDIEV1-

BLOCK19_LEDRS23_GRP124_GRP225_GRP326_GRP421_TESTM

en05000688.vsd

I103UsrDefIS01-

BLOCKINPUT1INPUT2INPUT3INPUT4INPUT5INPUT6INPUT7INPUT8

en05000694.vsd

I103SupervISU1-

BLOCK32_MEASI33_MEASU37_IBKUP38_VTFF46_GRWA47_GRAL

en05000692.vsd

I103EFISEF-

BLOCK51_EFFW52_EFREV

en05000685.vsd



REB 670

I103FltDisIZ01-

BLOCK64_STL165_STL266_STL367_STIN84_STGEN69_TRL170_TRL271_TRL368_TRGEN74_FW75_REV78_ZONE179_ZONE280_ZONE381_ZONE482_ZONE576_TRANS77_RECEV73_SCLFLTLOCARINPROG

en05000686.vsd

I103FltStdIFL1-

BLOCK64_STL165_STL266_STL367_STIN84_STGEN69_TRL170_TRL271_TRL368_TRGEN74_FW75_REV85_BFP86_MTRL187_MTRL288_MTRL389_MTRN90_IOC91_IOC92_IEF93_IEFARINPROG

en05000687.vsd

I103ARIAR1-

BLOCK16_ARACT128_CBON130_UNSU

en05000683.vsd



313

I103MeasIMM1-

BLOCKIL1IL2IL3INUL1UL2UL3UL1L2UNPQF

en05000690.vsd

I103MeasUsrIMU1-

BLOCKINPUT1INPUT2INPUT3INPUT4INPUT5INPUT6INPUT7INPUT8INPUT9

en05000691.vsd


Table 189: General settings for the I103StatFltStd (IFL1-) function

Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionFUNTYPE 1 - 255 1 1 FunT Function type

(1-255)

Table 190: Input signals for the I103IEDCMD (ICMA-) function block

Signal DescriptionBLOCK Block of commands

Table 191: Input signals for the I103FuncCMD (ICMD-) function block


Table 192: Input signals for the I103IED (IEV1-) function block

Signal DescriptionBLOCK Block of status reporting

19_LEDRS Information number 19, reset LEDs

23_GRP1 Information number 23, setting group 1 is active




REB 670

Signal Description24_GRP2 Information number 24, setting group 2 is active



21_TESTM Information number 21, test mode is active

Table 193: Input signals for the I103FuncUserCM (ICM1-) function block


Table 194: Input signals for the I103UsrDef (IS01-) function block


INPUT1 Binary signal Input 1

INPUT2 Binary signal input 2







Table 195: Input signals for the I103Superv (ISU1-) function block


32_MEASI Information number 32, measurand supervision of I

33_MEASU Information number 33, measurand supervision of U

37_IBKUP Information number 37, I high-high back-up protection

38_VTFF Information number 38, fuse failure VT

46_GRWA Information number 46, group warning

47_GRAL Information number 47, group alarm

Table 196: Input signals for the I103StatEF (ISEF-) function block


51_EFFW Information number 51, earth-fault forward

52_EFREV Information number 52, earth-fault reverse



315

Table 197: Input signals for the I103StatFltDis (IZ01-) function block


64_STL1 Information number 64, start phase L1



67_STIN Information number 67, start residual current IN

84_STGEN Information number 84, start general

69_TRL1 Information number 69, trip phase L1



68_TRGEN Information number 68, trip general

74_FW Information number 74, forward/line

75_REV Information number 75, reverse/bus

78_ZONE1 Information number 78, zone 1





76_TRANS Information number 76, signal transmitted

77_RECEV Information number 77, signal recevied

73_SCL Information number 73, fault location in ohm

FLTLOC Faultlocator faultlocation valid (LMBRFLO-CALCMADE)

ARINPROG Autorecloser in progress (SMBRREC- INPROGR)

Table 198: Input signals for the I103StatFltStd (IFL1-) function block





67_STIN Information number 67, start residual curent IN

84_STGEN Information number 84, start general




68_TRGEN Information number 68, trip general

74_FW Information number 74, forward/line

75_REV Information number 75, reverse/bus

85_BFP Information number 85, breaker failure




REB 670

Signal Description86_MTRL1 Information number 86, trip measuring system phase L1

87_MTRL2 Information number 87, trip measuring system phase L2

88_MTRL3 Information number 88, trip measuring system phase L3

89_MTRN Information number 89, trip measuring system neutral N

90_IOC Information number 90, over current trip, stage low

91_IOC Information number 91, over current trip, stage high

92_IEF Information number 92, earth-fault trip, stage low

93_IEF Information number 93, earth-fault trip, stage high

ARINPROG Autorecloser in progress (SMBRREC- INPROGR)

Table 199: Input signals for the I103MeasUsr (IMU1-) function block

Signal DescriptionBLOCK Block of service value reporting

INPUT1 Service value for measurement on input 1









Table 200: Input signals for the I103Meas (IMM1-) function block

Signal DescriptionBLOCK Block of service value reporting

IL1 Service value for current phase L1



IN Service value for residual current IN

UL1 Service value for voltage phase L1



UL1L2 Service value for voltage phase-phase L1-L2

UN Service value for residual voltage UN

P Service value for active power

Q Service value for reactive power

F Service value for system frequency



317

Table 201: Output signals for the I103FuncCMD (ICMD-) function block

Signal Description16-AR Information number 16, block of autorecloser

17-DIFF Information number 17, block of differential protection

18-PROT Information number 18, block of protection

Table 202: Output signals for the I103IEDCMD (ICMA-) function block

Signal Description19-LEDRS Information number 19, reset LEDs

23-GRP1 Information number 23, activate setting group 1




Table 203: Output signals for the I103FuncUserCM (ICM1-) function block

Signal DescriptionOUTPUT1 Command output 1

OUTPUT2 Command output 2








Table 204: General settings for the I103viaSLM (IOW1-) function


BaudRate 9600 Bd19200 Bd


RevPolarity OffOn

- On - Invert polarity

CycMeasRepTime

1.0 - 3600.0 0.1 5.0 - Cyclic reportingtime ofmeasurments



REB 670

Table 205: General settings for the I103_SLM_ABS (IECC-) function


BaudRate 9600 Bd19200 Bd


RevPolarity OffOn

- On - Invert polarity

CycMeasRepTime

1.0 - 3600.0 0.1 5.0 - Cyclic reportingtime ofmeasurments

Table 206: General settings for the I103FuncCMD (ICMD-) function


(1-255)

Table 207: General settings for the I103IEDCMD (ICMA-) function


(1-255)

Table 208: General settings for the I103FuncUserCM (ICM1-) function

Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionPULSEMOD 0 - 1 1 1 Mode Pulse mode

0=Steady,1=Pulsed

T 0.200 - 60.000 0.001 0.400 s Pulse length

FUNTYPE 1 - 255 1 1 FunT Function type(1-255)

INFNO_1 1 - 255 1 1 InfNo Informationnumber foroutput 1 (1-255)








319

Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionINFNO_6 1 - 255 1 6 InfNo Information

number foroutput 6 (1-255)



Table 209: General settings for the I103Meas (IMM1-) function

Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionRatedIL1 1 - 99999 1 3000 A Rated current

phase L1

RatedIL2 1 - 99999 1 3000 A Rated currentphase L2

RatedIL3 1 - 99999 1 3000 A Rated currentphase L3

RatedIN 1 - 99999 1 3000 A Rated residualcurrent IN

RatedUL1 0.05 - 2000.00 0.05 230.00 kV Rated voltage forphase L1



RatedUL1-UL2 0.05 - 2000.00 0.05 400.00 kV Rated voltage forphase-phase L1-L2

RatedUN 0.05 - 2000.00 0.05 230.00 kV Rated residualvoltage UN

RatedP 0.00 - 2000.00 0.05 1200.00 MW Rated value foractive power

RatedQ 0.00 - 2000.00 0.05 1200.00 MVA Rated value forreactive power

RatedF 50.0 - 60.0 10.0 50.0 Hz Rated systemfrequency

FUNTYPE 1 - 255 1 1 FunT Function type(1-255)



REB 670

Table 210: General settings for the I103MeasUsr (IMU1-) function


(1-255)

INFNO 1 - 255 1 1 InfNo Informationnumber formeasurands(1-255)

RatedMeasur1 0.05 -10000000000.00

0.05 1000.00 - Rated value formeasurement oninput 1

RatedMeasur2 0.05 -10000000000.00


RatedMeasur3 0.05 -10000000000.00


RatedMeasur4 0.05 -10000000000.00


RatedMeasur5 0.05 -10000000000.00


RatedMeasur6 0.05 -10000000000.00


RatedMeasur7 0.05 -10000000000.00


RatedMeasur8 0.05 -10000000000.00


RatedMeasur9 0.05 -10000000000.00


Table 211: General settings for the I103StatEF (ISEF-) function


(1-255)

Table 212: General settings for the I103StatFltDis (IZ01-) function


(1-255)



321

Table 213: General settings for the I103IED (IEV1-) function


(1-255)

Table 214: General settings for the I103Superv (ISU1-) function


(1-255)

Table 215: General settings for the I103UsrDef (IS01-) function


(1-255)

INFNO_1 1 - 255 1 1 InfNo Informationnumber forbinary input 1(1-255)











REB 670

Table 216: IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol

Function ValueProtocol IEC 60870-5-103

Communication speed 9600, 19200 Bd

9.6 Single command, 16 signals (CD)

9.6.1 IntroductionThe IEDs can receive commands either from a substation automation system or fromthe local human-machine interface, LHMI. The command function block has outputsthat can be used, for example, to control high voltage apparatuses or for other userdefined functionality.

9.6.2 Principle of operationThe single command function consists of a function block CD for 16 binary outputsignals. The outputs can be individually controlled from a substation automationsystem or from the local HMI. Each output signal can be given a name with amaximum of 13 characters from the CAP configuration tool.

The output signals can be of the types Off, Steady, or Pulse. This configuration settingis done via the LHMI or PCM 600 and is common for the whole function block. Thelength of the output pulses are 100 ms. In steady mode the function block has amemory to remember the output values at power interruption of the IED. Also aBLOCK input is available used to block the updating of the outputs.

The output signals, here OUT1 to OUT16, are then available for configuration tobuilt-in functions or via the configuration logic circuits to the binary outputs of theIED.



323


SingleCmdCD01-

BLOCK OUT1OUT2OUT3OUT4OUT5OUT6OUT7OUT8OUT9

OUT10OUT11OUT12OUT13OUT14OUT15OUT16NAME1NAME2NAME3NAME4NAME5NAME6NAME7NAME8NAME9

NAME10NAME11NAME12NAME13NAME14NAME15NAME16

en05000698.vsd


Table 217: Output signals for the SingleCmd (CD01-) function block

Signal DescriptionOUT1 Single command output 1

OUT2 Single command output 2
















REB 670

Signal DescriptionOUT15 Single command output 15


NAME1 User defined string for single command output 1
















Table 218: Input signals for the SingleCmd (CD01-) function block

Signal DescriptionBLOCK Block single command function


Table 219: General settings for the SingleCmd (CD01-) function

Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionMode Off

SteadyPulsed

- Off - Operation mode



325

9.7 Multiple command (CM) and Multiple transmit(MT)

9.7.1 IntroductionThe IED may be provided with a function to send and receive signals to and fromother IEDs via the interbay bus. The send and receive function blocks has 16 outputs/inputs that can be used, together with the configuration logic circuits, for controlpurposes within the IED or via binary outputs. When it is used to communicate withother IEDs, these IEDs have a corresponding Multiple transmit function block with16 outputs to send the information received by the command block.

9.7.2 Principle of operationTwo multiple transmit function blocks MT01-MT02 and 8 slow multiple transmitfunction blocks MT03-MT10 are available in IED 670.

Sixteen signals can be connected and they will then be sent to the multiple commandblock in the other IED. The connections are set with the LON Network Tool (LNT).

Twelve multiple command function block CM12 with fast execution time and 48multiple command function blocks CM13-CM60 with slower execution time areavailable in the IED 670s.

The multiple command function block has 16 outputs combined in one block, whichcan be controlled from other IEDs.

The output signals, here OUT1 to OUT16, are then available for configuration tobuilt-in functions or via the configuration logic circuits to the binary outputs of theterminal.

The command function also has a supervision function, which sets the output VALIDto 0 if the block did not receive data within set maximum time.

9.7.3 Design

9.7.3.1 General

The output signals can be of the types Off, Steady, or Pulse. The setting is done onthe MODE settings, common for the whole block, from the PCM 600 setting tool.

• 0 = Off sets all outputs to 0, independent of the values sent from the station level,that is, the operator station or remote-control gateway.

• 1 = Steady sets the outputs to a steady signal 0 or 1, depending on the values sentfrom the station level.

• 2 = Pulse gives a pulse with one execution cycle duration, if a value sent fromthe station level is changed from 0 to 1. That means that the configured logic



REB 670

connected to the command function blocks may not have a cycle time longerthan the execution cycle time for the command function block.


MultiCmdCM01-

BLOCK ERRORNEWDATAOUTPUT1OUTPUT2OUTPUT3OUTPUT4OUTPUT5OUTPUT6OUTPUT7OUTPUT8OUTPUT9

OUTPUT10OUTPUT11OUTPUT12OUTPUT13OUTPUT14OUTPUT15OUTPUT16

VALID

en06000007.vsd

Figure 130: CM function block

MultiTransmMT01-

BLOCKINPUT1INPUT2INPUT3INPUT4INPUT5INPUT6INPUT7INPUT8INPUT9INPUT10INPUT11INPUT12INPUT13INPUT14INPUT15INPUT16

ERROR

en06000008.vsd

Figure 131: MT function block


Table 220: Input signals for the MultiCmd (CM01-) function block




327

Table 221: Input signals for the MultiTransm (MT01-) function block


INPUT1 Input 1

INPUT2 Input 2

INPUT3 Input 3

INPUT4 Input 4

INPUT5 Input 5

INPUT6 Input 6

INPUT7 Input 7

INPUT8 Input 8

INPUT9 Input 9

INPUT10 Input 10

INPUT11 Input 11

INPUT12 Input 12

INPUT13 Input 13

INPUT14 Input 14

INPUT15 Input 15

INPUT16 Input 16

Table 222: Output signals for the MultiCmd (CM01-) function block

Signal DescriptionERROR MultiReceive error

NEWDATA New data is received

OUTPUT1 Output 1

OUTPUT2 Output 2

OUTPUT3 Output 3

OUTPUT4 Output 4

OUTPUT5 Output 5

OUTPUT6 Output 6

OUTPUT7 Output 7

OUTPUT8 Output 8

OUTPUT9 Output 9

OUTPUT10 Output 10

OUTPUT11 Output 11

OUTPUT12 Output 12

OUTPUT13 Output 13

OUTPUT14 Output 14




REB 670

Signal DescriptionOUTPUT15 Output 15

OUTPUT16 Output 16

VALID Output data is valid

Table 223: Output signals for the MultiTransm (MT01-) function block

Signal DescriptionERROR MultiSend error


Table 224: General settings for the MultiCmd (CM01-) function

Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptiontMaxCycleTime 0.050 - 200.000 0.001 11.000 s Maximum cycle time

between receptions ofinput data

tMinCycleTime 0.000 - 200.000 0.001 0.000 s Minimum cycle timebetween receptions ofinput data

Mode SteadyPulsed

- Steady - Mode for outputsignals

tPulseTime 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.200 s Pulse length for multicommand outputs

Table 225: General settings for the MultiTransm (MT01-) function

Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptiontMaxCycleTime 0.000 - 200.000 0.001 5.000 s Maximum time

interval betweentransmission of outputdata

tMinCycleTime 0.000 - 200.000 0.001 0.000 s Minimum time intervalbetween transmissionof output data



329

330

Section 10 Remote communication

About this chapterThis chapter describes the Binary signal transfer function and associated hardwarefunctionality. The way the functions work, their setting parameters, function blocks,input and output signals, and technical data are included for each function.

10.1 Binary signal transfer to remote end

Function block name: BRx--;BTx-- IEC 60617 graphical symbol: ANSI number:

IEC 61850 logical node name: BSTGGIO

10.1.1 IntroductionThe remote end data communication is used either for the transmission of currentvalues together with maximum 8 binary signals in the line differential protection inRED670, or for transmission of only binary signals, up to 192 signals, in the other600 series IEDs. The binary signals are freely configurable and can thus be used forany purpose e.g. communication scheme related signals, transfer trip and/or otherbinary signals between IEDs.

Communication between two IEDs requires that each IED is equipped with anLDCMs (Line Data Communication Module). The LDCMs are then interfaces to a64 kbit/s communication channel for duplex communication between the IEDs.

Each IED can be equipped with up to four LDCMs, thus enabling communicationwith four remote IEDs.

10.1.2 Principle of operationThe communication is made on standard ITU (CCITT) PCM digital 64 kbit/schannels. It is a two-way communication where telegrams are sent every 5 ms (samein 50 Hz and 60 Hz), exchanging information between two IEDs. The format used isC37.94 and one telegram consists of start and stop flags, address, data to betransmitted, Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) and Yellow bit (which is associatedwith C37.94).

Section 10Remote communication


331

en01000134.vsd

Startflag Information CRC Stop

flag

8 bits n x 16 bits 8 bits16 bits

Figure 132: Data message structure

The start and stop flags are the 0111 1110 sequence (7E hexadecimal), defined in theHDLC standard. The CRC is designed according to the standard CRC16 definition.The optional address field in the HDLC frame is not used instead a separate addressingis included in the data field.

The address field is used for checking that the received message originates from thecorrect equipment. There is always a risk that multiplexers occasionally mixe themessages up. Each terminal in the system is given a number. The terminal is thenprogrammed to accept messages from a specific terminal number. If the CRC functiondetects a faulty message, the message is thrown away and not used in the evaluation.

When the communication is used for line differential purpose, the transmitted dataconsists of three currents, clock information, trip-, block- and alarm-signals and eightbinary signals which can be used for any purpose. The three currents are representedas sampled values.

When the communication is used exclusively for binary signals, the full data capacityof the communication channel is used for the binary signal purpose which gives thecapacity of 192 signals.


LDCMRecBinStatCRB1-

COMFAILYBIT

NOCARRNOMESS

ADDRERRLNGTHERR

CRCERRORREMCOMFLOWLEVEL

en05000451.vsd

Figure 133: CRB function block




REB 670

Table 226: Output signals for the LDCMRecBinStat (CRB1-) function block

Signal DescriptionCOMFAIL Detected error in the differential communication

YBIT Detected error in remote end with incoming message

NOCARR No carrier is detected in the incoming message

NOMESS No start and stop flags identified for the incoming message

ADDRERR Incoming message from a wrong terminal

LNGTHERR Wrong length of the incoming message

CRCERROR Identified error by CRC check in incoming message

REMCOMF Remote terminal indicates problem with received message

LOWLEVEL Low signal level on the receive link


Table 227: Basic general settings for the LDCMRecBinStat (CRM1-) function

Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionChannelMode Off

OnOutOfService

- On - Channel mode ofLDCM, 0=OFF,1=ON,2=OutOfService

TerminalNo 0 1 0 - 255 - Terminal numberused for linedifferentialcommunication

RemoteTermNo 0 1 0 - 255 - Terminal number onremote terminal

DiffSync EchoGPS

- Echo - Diff Synchronizationmode of LDCM,0=ECHO, 1=GPS

GPSSyncErr BlockEcho

- Block - Operation modewhen GPSsynchroniation signalis lost

CommSync SlaveMaster

- Slave - Com Synchronizationmode of LDCM,0=Slave, 1=Master

OptoPower LowPowerHighPower

- LowPower - Transmission powerfor LDCM, 0=Low,1=High

TransmCurr CT-GRP1CT-GRP2CT-SUMCT-DIFF1CT-DIFF2

- CT-GRP1 - Summation mode fortransmitted currentvalues

ComFailAlrmDel 5 - 500 5 100 ms Time delay beforecommunication errorsignal is activated




333

Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionComFailResDel 5 - 500 5 100 ms Reset delay before

communication errorsignal is reset

RedChSwTime 5 - 500 5 5 ms Time delay beforeswitching inredundant channel

RedChRturnTime 5 - 500 5 100 ms Time delay beforeswitching back fromredundant channel

AsymDelay -20.00 - 20.00 0.01 0.00 ms Asymmetric delaywhen communicationuse echo synch.

MaxTransmDelay 0 - 40 1 20 ms Max allowedtransmission delay

CompRange 0-10kA0-25kA0-50kA0-150kA

- 0-25kA - Compression range

MaxtDiffLevel 200 - 2000 1 600 us Maximum time diff forECHO back-up

DeadbandtDiff 200 - 1000 1 300 us Deadband for t Diff

InvertPolX21 OffOn

- Off - Invert polarization forX21 communication

Table 228: Basic general settings for the LDCMRecBinStat (CRM2-) function


OnOutOfService




DiffSync EchoGPS

- Echo - Diff Synchronizationmode of LDCM,0=ECHO, 1=GPS

GPSSyncErr BlockEcho

- Block - Operation modewhen GPSsynchroniation signalis lost



OptoPower LowPowerHighPower

- LowPower - Transmission powerfor LDCM, 0=Low,1=High




REB 670

Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionTransmCurr CT-GRP1

CT-GRP2CT-SUMCT-DIFF1CT-DIFF2RedundantChannel

- CT-GRP1 - Summation mode fortransmitted currentvalues


ComFailResDel 5 - 500 5 100 ms Reset delay beforecommunication errorsignal is reset

RedChSwTime 5 - 500 5 5 ms Time delay beforeswitching inredundant channel

RedChRturnTime 5 - 500 5 100 ms Time delay beforeswitching back fromredundant channel

AsymDelay -20.00 - 20.00 0.01 0.00 ms Asymmetric delaywhen communicationuse echo synch.

MaxTransmDelay 0 - 40 1 20 ms Max allowedtransmission delay

CompRange 0-10kA0-25kA0-50kA0-150kA

- 0-25kA - Compression range

MaxtDiffLevel 200 - 2000 1 600 us Maximum time diff forECHO back-up

DeadbandtDiff 200 - 1000 1 300 us Deadband for t Diff

InvertPolX21 OffOn


Table 229: Basic general settings for the LDCMRecBinStat (CRB1-) function


OnOutOfService









335

Parameter Range Step Default Unit DescriptionOptoPower LowPower

HighPower- LowPower - Transmission power

for LDCM, 0=Low,1=High


ComFailResDel 5 - 500 5 100 ms Reset delay beforecommunication errorsignal is reset

InvertPolX21 OffOn




REB 670

Section 11 Hardware

About this chapterThis chapter includes descriptions of the different hardware modules. It includesdiagrams from different elevations indicating the location of connection terminalsand modules.

11.1 Overview

11.1.1 Variants of case- and HMI display size

xx04000458.eps

Figure 134: 1/2 19” case with medium HMI display.

Section 11Hardware


337

xx04000459.eps

Figure 135: 1/2 19” case with small HMI display.

xx04000460.eps

Figure 136: 1/1 19” case with medium HMI display.

xx04000461.eps

Figure 137: 1/1 19” case with small HMI display.

Section 11Hardware


REB 670

11.1.2 Case from the rear side

Table 230: Designations for 1/2 x 19” casing with 1 TRM slot

Module Rear Positions

PSM X11

BIM, BOM orIOM

X31 and X32 etc. to X51 andX52

GSM X51

SLM X301:A, B, C, D

OEM X311:A, B, C, D

LDCM X312:A, B

LDCM X313:A, B

TRM X401

Table 231: Designations for 1/1 x 19” casing with 2 TRM slots

Module Rear Positions

PSM X11

BIM, BOM orIOM

X31 and X32 etc. to X131 andX132

MIM X31, X41, etc. or X131

GSM X131

SLM X301:A, B, C, D

OEM X311:A, B, C, D

LDCM X312:A, B

LDCM X313:A, B

TRM 1 X401

TRM 2 X411

Section 11Hardware


339

11.2 Hardware modules

11.2.1 OverviewTable 232: Basic modules, always included

Module DescriptionCombined backplane module (CBM) A backplane PCB that carries all internal signals

between modules in an IED. Only the TRM is notconnected directly to this board.

Universal backplane module (UBM) A backplane PCB that forms part of the IEDbackplane with connectors for TRM, ADM etc.

Power supply module (PSM) Including a regulated DC/DC converter thatsupplies auxiliary voltage to all static circuits.

• An internal fail alarm output is available.

Numerical module (NUM) Module for overall application control. Allinformation is processed or passed through thismodule, such as configuration, settings andcommunication.

Local Human machine interface (LHMI) The module consists of LED:s, an LCD, a pushbutton keyboard and an ethernet connector used toconnect a PC to the IED.

Transformer input module (TRM) Transformer module that galvanically separates theinternal circuits from the VT and CT circuits. It has12 analog inputs.

Analog digital conversion module (ADM) Slot mounted PCB with A/D conversion.

Table 233: Application specific modules

Module DescriptionBinary input module (BIM) Module with 16 optically isolated binary inputs

Binary output module (BOM) Module with 24 single outputs or 12 double-polecommand outputs including supervision function

Binary I/O module (IOM) Module with 8 optically isolated binary inputs, 10outputs and 2 fast signalling outputs.

Line data communication modules (LDCM), shortrange, medium range, longrange, X21

Modules used for digital communication to remoteterminal.

Serial SPA/LON/IEC 60870-5-103communication modules (SLM)

Used for SPA/LON/IEC 60870–5–103communication

Optical ethernet module (OEM) PMC board for IEC 61850 based communication.

GPS time synchronization module (GSM) Used to provide the IED with GPS timesynchronization.

Section 11Hardware


REB 670

11.2.2 Combined backplane module (CBM)


The combined backplane module (CBM) carries signals between modules in an IED.

11.2.2.2 Functionality

The Compact PCI makes 3.3V or 5V signaling in the backplane possible. The CBMbackplane and connected modules are 5V PCI-compatible.

Some pins on the Compact PCI connector are connected to the CAN bus, to be ableto communicate with CAN based modules.

If a modules self test discovers an error it informs other modules using the InternalFail signal IRF.

11.2.2.3 Design

There are two basic versions of the CBM:

• with 3 Compact PCI connectors and a number of euro connectors depending onthe IED case size. One Compact PCI connector is used by NUM and two areused by other PCI modules, for example two ADMs in IEDs with two TRMs.See figure 139

• with 2 Compact PCI connectors and a number of euro connectors depending onthe IED case size. One Compact PCI connector is used by NUM and one is usedby for example an ADM in IEDs with one TRM. See figure 138

Each PCI connector consists of 2 compact PCI receptacles. The euro connectors areconnected to the CAN bus and used for I/O modules and power supply.

en05000516.vsd

1 2

Figure 138: CBM for 1 TRM.

Pos Description1 CAN slots

Section 11Hardware


341

2 CPCI slots

1 2

en05000755.vsd

Figure 139: CBM for 2 TRM.

Pos Description1 CAN slots

2 CPCI slots

1

en05000756.vsd

Figure 140: CBM position, rear view.

Pos Description1 CBM

Section 11Hardware


REB 670

11.2.3 Universal backplane module (UBM)


The Universal Backplane Module (UBM) is part of the IED backplane and is mountedabove the CBM. It connects the Transformer input module (TRM) to the Analogdigital conversion module (ADM) and the Numerical module (NUM).


The Universal Backplane Module connects the CT and VT analogue signals from thetransformer input module to the analogue digital converter module. The Numericalprocessing module (NUM) is also connected to the UBM. The ethernet contact onthe front panel as well as the internal ethernet and D-sub contacts are connected tothe UBM which provides the signal path to the NUM board.

11.2.3.3 Design

It connects the Transformer input module (TRM) to the Analog digital conversionmodule (ADM) and the Numerical module (NUM).

The UBM exists in 2 versions.

• for IEDs with two TRM and two ADM. It has four 48 pin euro connectors andone 96 pin euro connector, see figure 142

• for IEDs with one TRM and one ADM. It has two 48 pin euro connectors andone 96 pin euro connector, see figure 143.

The 96 pin euro connector is used to connect the NUM board to the backplane. The48 pin connectors are used to connect the TRM and ADM.

Section 11Hardware


343

en05000489.vsd

TRM

X1X3

LHMIFront

connection port

X10

NUM

RS485

Ethernet

Ethernet X5

ADM

X2X4

AD Data

X10

Figure 141: UBM block diagram.

en05000757.vsd

Figure 142: UBM for 1 TRM.

en05000758.vsd

Figure 143: UBM for 2 TRM.

Section 11Hardware


REB 670

1

en05000759.vsd

Figure 144: UBM position, rear view.

Pos Description1 UBM

11.2.4 Power supply module (PSM)


The power supply module is used to provide the correct internal voltages and fullisolation between the terminal and the battery system. An internal fail alarm outputis available.

11.2.4.2 Design

There are two types of the power supply module. They are designed for different DCinput voltage ranges see table 234. The power supply module contains a built-in, self-regulated DC/DC converter that provides full isolation between the terminal and theexternal battery system.

Section 11Hardware


345

Block diagram

99000516.vsd

Bac

kpla

ne c

onne

ctor

Inpu

t con

nect

orPowersupplyFilter

Supervision

Figure 145: PSM Block diagram.


Table 234: PSM - Power supply module

Quantity Rated value Nominal rangeAuxiliary dc voltage, EL (input) EL = (24 - 60) V

EL = (90 - 250) VEL ± 20%EL ± 20%

Power consumption 50 W typically -

Auxiliary DC power in-rush < 5 A during 0.1 s -

11.2.5 Numeric processing module (NUM)


The Numeric processing module (NUM), is a CPU-module that handles all protectionfunctions and logic.

For communication with high speed modules, e.g. analog input modules and highspeed serial interfaces, the NUM is equipped with a Compact PCI bus. The NUM isthe compact PCI system card i.e. it controls bus mastering, clock distribution andreceives interrupts.

Section 11Hardware


REB 670


The NUM, Numeric processing module is a high performance, standard off-the-shelfcompact-PCI CPU module. It is 6U high and occupies one slot. Contact with thebackplane is via two compact PCI connectors and an euro connector.

The NUM has one PMC slot (32-bit IEEE P1386.1 compliant) and two PCMIP slotsonto which mezzanine cards such as OEM or LDCM can be mounted.

To reduce bus loading of the compact PCI bus in the backplane the NUM has oneinternal PCI bus for internal resources and the PMC slot and external PCI accessesthrough the backplane are buffered in a PCI/PCI bridge.

The application code and configuration data are stored in flash memory using a flashfile system. During power up the application code is moved to and then executed fromthe DRAM. The code is stored in the flash memory because it is nonvolatile andexecuted in DRAM because of the higher performance of DRAM.

The NUM is equipped with a real time clock. It uses a capacitor for power backup ofthe real time clock.

No forced cooling is used on this standard module because of the low powerdissipation.

Section 11Hardware


347

11.2.5.3 Block diagram

en04000473.vsd

LogicCompact

Flash

North bridge

CPU

Memory

PC-MIP

PMC connector

UB

M

conn

ecto

r

Ethernet

Back

plan

e co

nnec

torPCI-PCI-

bridge

Figure 146: Numeric processing module block diagram

11.2.6 Local human-machine interface (LHMI)Refer to Chapter "Local human-machine interface" for information.

11.2.7 Transformer input module (TRM)


The transformer input module is used to galvanically separate and transform thesecondary currents and voltages generated by the measuring transformers. Themodule has twelve inputs in different combinations.

Section 11Hardware


REB 670

11.2.7.2 Design

The transformer module has 12 input transformers. There are several versions of themodule, each with a different combination of voltage and current input transformers.

Basic versions:

• 6 current channels and 6 voltage channels• 9 current channels and 3 voltage channels• 12 current channels• 6 current channels

The rated values of the current inputs are selected at order.

The TRM is connected to the ADM and NUM via the UBM.

Configuration of the input and output signals, please refer to section "Signal matrixfor analog inputs (SMAI)".


Table 235: TRM - Energizing quantities, rated values and limits

Quantity Rated value Nominal rangeCurrent Ir = 1 or 5 A (0.2-40) × Ir

Operative range (0-100) x Ir

Permissive overload 4 × Ir cont.100 × Ir for 1 s *)

Burden < 150 mVA at Ir = 5 A< 20 mVA at Ir = 1 A

Burden < 20 mVA at 110 V

Frequency fr = 50/60 Hz ± 5%

*) max. 350 A for 1 s when COMBITEST test switch is included.

11.2.8 Analog digital conversion module, with time synchronization(ADM)


The Analog/Digital module has twelve analogue inputs, 2 PCMIP slots and 1 PMCslot. The PCMIP slot is used for the LDCM card and the PMC slot for the SLM andOEM modules. The OEM card should always be mounted on the NUM board if onlyone card is needed. In cases where two cards are needed then the PCM slot on theADM may be used for the second OEM. The UBM connects the ADM to thetransformer input module (TRM).

Section 11Hardware


349

11.2.8.2 Design

The Analog digital conversion module input signals are voltage and current from thetransformer module. Shunts are used to adapt the current signals to the electronicvoltage level. To gain dynamic range for the current inputs, two shunts with separateA\D channels are used for each input current. In this way a 20 bit dynamic range isobtained with a 16 bit A\D converter.

Input signals are sampled with a sampling freqency of 5 kHz at 50 Hz systemfrequency and 6 kHz at 60 Hz system frequency.

The A\D converted signals go through a filter with a cut off frequency of 500 Hz andare reported to the numerical module (NUM) with 1 kHz at 50 Hz system frequencyand 1,2 kHz at 60 Hz system frequency.

Section 11Hardware


REB 670

PMC

PCI to PCI

PC-MIP

PC-MIP

AD3

AD1

AD2

AD4

Channel 1Channel 2Channel 3Channel 4Channel 5Channel 6Channel 7Channel 8Channel 9Channel 10Channel 11Channel 12

1.2v

2.5v

level shift

en05000474.vsd

Figure 147: The ADM layout

Section 11Hardware


351

11.2.9 Binary input module (BIM)


The binary input module has 16 optically isolated inputs and is available in twoversions, one standard and one with enhanced pulse counting capabilities on the inputsto be used with the pulse counter function. The binary inputs are freely programmableand can be used for the input of logical signals to any of the functions. They can alsobe included in the disturbance recording and event-recording functions. This enablesextensive monitoring and evaluation of operation of the IED and for all associatedelectrical circuits.

11.2.9.2 Design

The Binary input module contains 16 optical isolated binary inputs. The voltage levelof the binary input is selected at order.

For configuration of the input signals, please refer to section "Signal matrix for binaryinputs (SMBI)".

A signal discriminator detects and blocks oscillating signals. When blocked, ahysteresis function may be set to release the input at a chosen frequency, making itpossible to use the input for pulse counting. The blocking frequency may also be set.

Figure 148 shows the operating characteristics of the binary inputs of the four voltagelevels.

The standard version of binary inputs gives an improved capability to withstanddisturbances and should generally be used when pulse counting is not required.

Section 11Hardware


REB 670

300

176144

8872383219

18

24/30VRL24

48/60VRL48

110/125VRL110

220/250VRL220

[V]

xx99000517.vsd

Figure 148: Voltage dependence for the binary inputs

Guaranteed operation Operation uncertain No operation

This binary input module communicates with the Numerical module (NUM) via theCAN-bus on the backplane.

The design of all binary inputs enables the burn off of the oxide of the relay contactconnected to the input, despite the low, steady-state power consumption, which isshown in figure 149 and 150.

Section 11Hardware


353

en03000108.vsd

30

135 70 [ms]

[mA]

Figure 149: Approximate binary input inrush current for the standard version ofBIM.

en05000455.vsd

30

13.5 7.0 [ms]

[mA]

Figure 150: Approximate binary input inrush current for the BIM version withenhanced pulse counting capabilities.

Section 11Hardware


REB 670

Back

plan

e co

nnec

tor

Proc

ess

conn

ecto

rPr

oces

s co

nnec

tor

Micro-controller

Memory

CAN

Opto isolated input

Opto isolated input

Opto isolated input

Opto isolated input

Opto isolated input

Opto isolated input

Opto isolated input

Opto isolated input

Opto isolated input

Opto isolated input

Opto isolated input

Opto isolated input

Opto isolated input

Opto isolated input

Opto isolated input

Opto isolated input

99000503.vsd

Figure 151: Block diagram of the Binary input module.


Table 236: BIM - Binary input module

Quantity Rated value Nominal rangeBinary inputs 16 -

DC voltage, RL RL24 (24/40) VRL48 (48/60) VRL110 (110/125) VRL220 (220/250) V

RL ± 20%RL ± 20%RL ± 20%RL ± 20%

Power consumptionRL24 = (24/40) VRL48 = (48/60) VRL110 = (110/125) VRL220 = (220/250) V

max. 0.05 W/inputmax. 0.1 W/inputmax. 0.2 W/inputmax. 0.4 W/input

-

Counter input frequency 10 pulses/s max -

Oscillating signal discriminator Blocking settable 1–40 HzRelease settable 1–30 Hz

Section 11Hardware


355

Table 237: BIM - Binary input module with enhanced pulse counting capabilities

Quantity Rated value Nominal rangeBinary inputs 16 -

DC voltage, RL RL24 (24/40) VRL48 (48/60) VRL110 (110/125) VRL220 (220/250) V

RL ± 20%RL ± 20%RL ± 20%RL ± 20%



-

Counter input frequency 10 pulses/s max -

Balanced counter input frequency 40 pulses/s max -

Oscillating signal discriminator Blocking settable 1–40 HzRelease settable 1–30 Hz

11.2.10 Binary output modules (BOM)


The binary output module has 24 independent output relays and is used for trip outputor any signalling purpose.

11.2.10.2 Design

The binary output module (BOM) has 24 software supervised output relays. Eachpair of relays have a common power source input to the contacts, see figure 152. Thisshould be considered when connecting the wiring to the connection terminal on theback of the IED.

The high closing and carrying current capability allows connection directly to breakertrip and closing coils. If breaking capability is required to manage fail of the breakerauxiliary contacts normally breaking the trip coil current, a parallel reinforcement isrequired.

For configuration of the output signals, please refer to section "Signal matrix forbinary outputs (SMBO)".

Section 11Hardware


REB 670

xx00000299.vsd

2

1

3

Output module

Figure 152: Relay pair example

1 Output connection from relay 1

2 Output signal power source connection

3 Output connection from relay 2

Section 11Hardware


357

Back

plan

e co

nnec

tor

Proc

ess

conn

ecto

rPr

oces

s co

nnec

tor

Micro-controller

MemoryC

AN

Rel

ayRelayRelay

RelayRelay

RelayRelay

RelayRelay

RelayRelay

RelayRelay

RelayRelay

RelayRelay

RelayRelay

RelayRelay

Rel

ay

Rel

ay

Rel

ay

99000505.vsd

Figure 153: Block diagram of the Binary Output Module


Table 238: BOM - Binary output module contact data (reference standard: IEC 61810-2)

Function or quantity Trip and Signal relaysBinary outputs 24

Max system voltage 250 V AC, DC

Test voltage across open contact, 1 min 1000 V rms

Current carrying capacityContinuous1 s

8 A10 A


Section 11Hardware


REB 670

Function or quantity Trip and Signal relaysMaking capacity at inductive load with L/R>10 ms0.2 s1.0 s

30 A10 A

Breaking capacity for AC, cos j>0.4 250 V/8.0 A

Breaking capacity for DC with L/R < 40 ms 48 V/1 A110 V/0.4 A220 V/0.2 A250 V/0.15 A

11.2.11 Binary input/output module (IOM)


The binary input/output module is used when only a few input and output channelsare needed. The ten standard output channels are used for trip output or any signallingpurpose. The two high speed signal output channels are used for applications whereshort operating time is essential. Eight optically isolated binary inputs cater forrequired binary input information.

11.2.11.2 Design

Inputs are designed to allow oxide burn-off from connected contacts, and increasethe disturbance immunity during normal protection operate times. This is achievedwith a high peak inrush current while having a low steady-state current, see figure149. Inputs are debounced by software.

Well defined input high and input low voltages ensures normal operation at batterysupply earth faults, see figure 148.

The voltage level of the inputs is selected when ordering.

I/O events are time stamped locally on each module for minimum time deviance andstored by the event recorder if present.

The binary I/O module, IOM, has eight optically isolated inputs and ten output relays.One of the outputs has a change-over contact. The nine remaining output contacts areconnected in two groups. One group has five contacts with a common and the othergroup has four contacts with a common, to be used as single-output channels, seefigure 154.

The binary I/O module also has two high speed output channels where a reed relayis connected in parallel to the standard output relay.

For configuration of the input and output signals, please refer to sections "Signalmatrix for binary inputs (SMBI)" and "Signal matrix for binary outputs (SMBO)".

Section 11Hardware


359

The making capacity of the reed relays are limited.

Figure 154: Binary in/out module (IOM), input contacts named XA correspondsto rear position X31, X41, etc. and output contacts named XB to rearposition X32, X42, etc.


Section 11Hardware


REB 670

Table 239: IOM - Binary input/output module

Quantity Rated value Nominal range

Binary inputs 8 -

DC voltage, RL RL24 = (24/40) VRL48 = (48/60) VRL110 = (110/125) VRL220 = (220/250) V

RL ± 20%RL ± 20%RL ± 20%RL ± 20%



-

Table 240: IOM - Binary input/output module contact data (reference standard: IEC 61810-2)

Function or quantity Trip and signal relays Fast signal relays (parallel reedrelay)

Binary outputs 10 2

Max system voltage 250 V AC, DC 250 V AC, DC

Test voltage across open contact,1 min

1000 V rms 800 V DC

Current carrying capacityContinuous1 s

8 A10 A

8 A10 A

Making capacity at inductive loadwith L/R>10 ms0.2 s1.0 s

30 A10 A

0.4 A0.4 A

Breaking capacity for AC, cos φ >0.4

250 V/8.0 A 250 V/8.0 A

Breaking capacity for DC with L/R< 40 ms

48 V/1 A110 V/0.4 A220 V/0.2 A250 V/0.15 A

48 V/1 A110 V/0.4 A220 V/0.2 A250 V/0.15 A

Maximum capacitive load - 10 nF

11.2.12 Line data communication module (LDCM)


The line data communication module (LDCM) is used for communication betweenthe IEDs or from the IED to optical to electrical converter with G.703 interface locatedon a distances <3 km away. The LDCM module sends and receives data, to and fromanother LDCM module. The IEEE/ANSI C37.94 standard format is used.

The line data communication module is used for binary signal transfer. Each modulehas one optical port, one for each remote end to which the IED communicates.

Section 11Hardware


361

Alternative cards for Short range (900 nm multi mode) are available.

Class 1 laser product. Take adequate measures to protect the eyes.Never look into the laser beam.

11.2.12.2 Design

The LDCM is a PCMIP type II single width format module. The LDCM can bemounted on:

• the ADM• the NUM

ST

IO-c

onne

ctor

16.0

00M

Hz

ID

ST

32,7

68M

Hz

en05000473.vsd

Figure 155: The SR-LDCM layout. PCMIP type II single width format with two PCIconnectors and one I/O ST type connector

32

X1C

PCI9054TQ176FPGA

256 FBGA

ADN2841

DS3904

MAX

3645

2.5VID

DS3904

en06000393.vsd

Figure 156: The MR-LDCM and LR-LDCM layout. PCMIP type II single widthformat with two PCI connectors and one I/O FC/PC type connector

Section 11Hardware


REB 670


Table 241: Line data communication modules (LDCM)

Characteristic Range or valueType of LDCM Short range (SR) Medium range (MR) Long range (LR)Type of fibre Graded-index

multimode62.5/125 mm or50/125 mm

Singlemode 8/125mm

Singlemode 8/125 mm

Wave length 820 nm 1310 nm 1550 nm

Optical budgetGraded-index multimode62.5/125 mm, Graded-index multimode50/125 mm

11 dB (typicaldistance about 2mile/3 km *)7 dB (typicaldistance about 1mile/2 km *)

20 dB (typicaldistance 50 mile/80 km *)

26 dB (typical distance 75mile/120 km *)

Optical connector Type ST Type FC/PC Type FC/PC

Protocol C37.94 C37.94implementation **)

C37.94 implementation **)

Data transmission Synchronous Synchronous Synchronous

Transmission rate 64 kbit/s 64 kbit/s 64 kbit/s

Clock source Internal or derivedfrom receivedsignal

Internal or derivedfrom receivedsignal

Internal or derived fromreceived signal

*) depending on optical budget calculation**) C37.94 originally defined just for multimode; using same header, configuration and data format asC37.94

11.2.13 Serial SPA/IEC 60870-5-103 and LON communicationmodule (SLM)


The serial communication module (SLM) is used for SPA or IEC 60870-5-103 andLON communication. The module has two communication ports, one for serialcommunication and one dedicated for LON communication.

11.2.13.2 Design

The SLM is a PMC card and it is factory mounted as a mezzanine card on the NUMmodule. Three variants of the SLM is available with different combinations of opticalfibre connectors, see figure 157. The plastic fibre connectors are of snap-in type andthe glass fibre connectors are of ST type.

Section 11Hardware


363

Figure 157: The SLM variants

A Snap in connector for plastic fibre

B ST connector for glass fibre

1 LON port

2 SPA/IEC 60870-5-103 port

Figure 158: The SLM layout overview

1 Receiver, LON

2 Transmitter, LON

3 Receiver, SPA/IEC 60870-5-103

4 Transmitter, SPA/IEC 60870-5-103

Section 11Hardware


REB 670


Table 242: SLM – LON port

Quantity Range or valueOptical connector Glass fibre: type ST

Plastic fibre: type HFBR snap-in

Fibre, optical budget Glass fibre: 11 dB (1000 m typically *)Plastic fibre: 7 dB (10 m typically *)

Fibre diameter Glass fibre: 62.5/125 mmPlastic fibre: 1 mm

*) depending on optical budget calculation

Table 243: SLM – SPA/IEC 60870-5-103 port

Quantity Range or valueOptical connector Glass fibre: type ST

Plastic fibre: type HFBR snap-in

Fibre, optical budget Glass fibre: 11 dB (1000 m typically *)Plastic fibre: 7 dB (25 m typically *)

Fibre diameter Glass fibre: 62.5/125 mmPlastic fibre: 1 mm

*) depending on optical budget calculation

11.2.14 Optical ethernet module (OEM)


The optical fast-ethernet module is used to connect an IED to the communicationbuses (like the station bus) that use the IEC 61850-8-1 protocol. The module has oneor two optical ports with ST connectors.


The Optical Ethernet module (OEM) is used when communication systems accordingto IEC61850–8–1 have been implemented. Refer to section "Line datacommunication module (LDCM)" for further information.

11.2.14.3 Design

The Optical Ethernet module (OEM) is a PCM card and mounted as a mezzanine cardon the NUM. If a second OEM is needed it is mounted on the NUM. The OEM is a100base Fx module and available as a single channel or double channel unit.

Section 11Hardware


365

en04000472.vsd

PCI - PCI Bridge

Ethernet Controller

Ethernet Controller

100Base-FXTransmitter

PCI - bus Connector

ST fiber opticconnectors

ST fiber opticconnectors

EEPROM

EEPROM

ID chip

IO - bus Connector

100Base-FXReceiver

100Base-FXTransmitter

100Base-FXReceiver

Figure 159: OEM block diagram.

PCI b

usIO

bus

PCI to PCIbridge

Ethernet cont.

Ethernet cont.

ID chip

25MHz oscillator

25MHz oscillator

LED

LED

Receiver

Transmitter

Receiver

Transmitter

en05000472.vsd

Figure 160: OEM layout, standard PCM format


Quantity Rated valueNumber of channels 1 or 2

Standard IEEE 802.3u 100BASE-FX

Type of fibre 62.5/125 mm multimode fibre

Wave length 1300 nm

Optical connector Type ST

Communication speed Fast Ethernet 100 MB

Section 11Hardware


REB 670

11.2.15 GPS time synchronization module (GSM)


This module includes the GPS receiver used for time synchronization. The GPS hasone SMA contact for connection to an antenna.

11.2.15.2 Design

The GPS time synchronization module is 6U high and occupies one slot. The slotclosest to the NUM shall always be used.

The GSM consists of

• CAN carrier module (CCM)• GPS clock module (GCM)• GPS receiver unit

The CCM is a carrier board for the GCM mezzanine PCM card and GPS unit, seefigure 162. There is a cable between the external antenna input on the back of theGCM and the GPS-receiver. This is a galvanic connection vulnerable to electro-magnetic interference. The connector is shielded and directly attached to a groundedplate to reduce the risk. The second cable is a flat cable that connects the GPS andthe GCM. It is used for communication between the GCM and the GPS-receiver. Allcommunication between the GCM and the NUM is via the CAN-bus.

The CMPPS signal is sent from the GCM to the rest of the time system to provide1µs accuracy at sampling level.

en05000675.vsd

GPS clockmodule

GPSreceiver

PMC

GPS antenna

Back

plan

e C

ANco

nnec

torCAN

controller CAN

CMPPS

Figure 161: GSM block diagram

Section 11Hardware


367

C

xx05000471.vsd

1

2

3

4

Figure 162: A CCM with the GCM and GPS mounted with cables

1 GPS receiver

2 GPS Clock module (GCM)

3 CAN carrier module (CCM)

4 Antenna connector


Table 244: GPS time synchronization module (GSM)

Function Range or value AccuracyReceiver – ±1µs relative UTC

Time to reliable time reference with antenna in newposition or after power loss longer than 1 month

<30 minutes –

Time to reliable time reference after a power loss longerthan 48 hours

<15 minutes –

Time to reliable time reference after a power loss shorterthan 48 hours

<5 minutes –

Section 11Hardware


REB 670

11.2.16 GPS antenna


In order to receive GPS signals from the satellites orbiting the earth a GPS antennawith applicable cable must be used.

11.2.16.2 Design

The antenna with a console for mounting on a horizontal or vertical flat surface or onan antenna mast. See figure 163

xx04000155.vsd

1

2

4

3

5

6

7

Figure 163: Antenna with console

where:

1 GPS antenna

2 TNC connector

3 Console, 78x150 mm

4 Mounting holes 5.5 mm

5 Tab for securing of antenna cable

6 Vertical mounting position

7 Horizontal mounting position

Always position the antenna and its console so that a continuous clear line-of-sightvisibility to all directions is obtained, preferably more than 75%. A minimum of 50%clear line-of-sight visibility is required for un-interrupted operation.

Section 11Hardware


369

A

99001046.vsd

Figure 164: Antenna line-of-sight

Antenna cableUse a 50 ohm coaxial cable with a male TNC connector in the antenna end and a maleSMA connector in the receiver end to connect the antenna to GSM. Choose cabletype and length so that the total attenuation is max. 26 dB at 1.6 GHz.

Make sure that the antenna cable is not charged when connected tothe antenna or to the receiver. Short-circuit the end of the antennacable with some metal device, when first connected to the antenna.When the antenna is connected to the cable, connect the cable to thereceiver. REx670 must be switched off when the antenna cable isconnected.


Table 245: GPS – Antenna and cable

Function ValueMax antenna cable attenuation 26 db @ 1.6 GHz

Antenna cable impedance 50 ohm

Lightning protection Must be provided externally

Antenna cable connector SMA in receiver endTNC in antenna end

Section 11Hardware


REB 670

11.3 Case dimensions

11.3.1 Case without rear cover

xx04000448.vsd

CB

D

E

A

Figure 165: Case without rear cover xx04000464.vsd

JG

F

K

H

Figure 166: Case without rear coverwith 19” rack mountingkit

Case size A B C D E F G H J K6U, 1/2 x 19” 265.9 223.7 201.1 252.9 205.7 190.5 203.7 - 187.6 -

6U, 1/1 x 19” 265.9 448.3 201.1 252.9 430.3 190.5 428.3 465.1 187.6 482.6

The H and K dimensions are defined by the 19” rack mounting kit

(mm)

11.3.2 Case with rear cover

Section 11Hardware


371

xx05000501.vsd

B

D

E

A

C

Figure 167: Case with rear cover.

xx05000502.vsd

JG

F

K

H

Figure 168: Case with rear coverand 19” rack mountingkit.

xx05000503.vsd

Figure 169: Rear cover case withdetails.

Case size A B C D E F G H J K6U, 1/2 x 19” 265.9 223.7 242.1 255.8 205.7 190.5 203.7 - 228.6 -

6U, 1/1 x 19” 265.9 448.3 242.1 255.8 430.3 190.5 428.3 465.1 228.6 482.6

The H and K dimensions are defined by the 19” rack mounting kit. All dimensions are in millimeters.

Section 11Hardware


REB 670

11.3.3 Flush mounting dimensions

CA

B

ED

xx04000465.vsd

Figure 170: Flush mounting

Case sizeTolerance

Cut-outdimensions (mm)

A+/-1

B+/-1

C

D

6U, 1/2 x 19” 210.1 254.3 4.0-10.0 12.5

6U, 3/4 x 19” 322.4 254.3 4.0-10.0 12.5

6U, 1/1 x 19” 434.7 254.3 4.0-10.0 12.5

E = 188.6 mm without rear protection cover, 229.6 mm with rear protection cover

Section 11Hardware


373

11.3.4 Side-by-side flush mounting dimensions

xx06000182.vsd

Figure 171: A 1/2 x 19” size IED 670 side-by-side with RHGS6.

xx05000505.vsd

B

A

C

G

D

E

F

Figure 172: Panel-cut out dimensions for side-by-side flush mounting

Section 11Hardware


REB 670

Case size(mm)Tolerance

A±1

B±1

C±1

D±1

E±1

F±1

G±1

6U, 1/2 x19”

214.0 259.3 240.4 190.5 34.4 13.2 6.4 diam

6U, 3/4 x19”

326.4 259.3 352.8 190.5 34.4 13.2 6.4 diam

6U, 1/1 x19”

438.7 259.3 465.1 190.5 34.4 13.2 6.4 diam

11.3.5 Wall mounting dimensions

en04000471.vsd

E

A

B

CD

Figure 173: Wall mounting

Case size (mm) A B C D E6U, 1/2 x 19” 292.0 267.1 272.8 390.0 243.0

6U, 1/1 x 19” 516.0 491.1 272.8 390.0 243.0

Section 11Hardware


375

11.3.6 External current transformer unit

57 [2

.24]

89 [3

.5]

xx06000233.vsd

482.6 [19]

Dimensionmm [inches]

Figure 174: Dimension drawing of summation current transformers

11.4 Mounting alternatives

11.4.1 Flush mounting

11.4.1.1 Overview

All IED sizes, 1/2 x 19” and 1/1 x 19” and RHGS6 6U 1/4 x 19”, cases, can be flushmounted. Only a single case can be mounted in each cut-out on the cubicle panel, forclass IP54 protection.

The flush mounting kit are utilized for IEDs of sizes: 1/2 x 19” and 1/1 x 19” and arealso suitable for mounting of RHGS6, 6U 1/4 x 19” cases.

Flush mounting cannot be used for side-by-side mounted IEDs whenIP54 class must be fulfilled. Only IP20 class can be obtained whenmounting two cases side-by-side in one (1) cut-out.

To obtain IP54 class protection, an additional factory mounted sealingmust be ordered when ordering the IED.

Section 11Hardware


REB 670

11.4.1.2 Mounting procedure for flush mounting

1

35

xx06000246.vsd

4

2

6

7

Figure 175: Flush mounting details.

PosNo Description Quantity Type

1 Sealing strip, used toobtain IP54 class. Thesealing strip is factorymounted between thecase and front plate.

- -

2 Fastener 4 -

3 Groove - -

4 Screw, self tapping 4 2,9x9,5 mm

5 Joining point of sealingstrip (rear view)

- -

6 Panel - -

7 Screw 4 M5x25

11.4.2 19” panel rack mounting

11.4.2.1 Overview

All IED sizes can be mounted in a standard 19” cubicle rack by using the for eachsize suited mounting kit which consists of two mounting angles and fastening screws

Section 11Hardware


377

for the angles. The mounting angles are reversible which enables mounting of IEDsize 1/2 x 19” either to the left or right side of the cubicle.

Please note that the separately ordered rack mounting kit for side-by-side mounted IEDs, or IEDs together with RHGS cases, is to beselected so that the total size equals 19”.

When mounting the mounting angles, be sure to use screws thatfollows the recommended dimensions. Using screws with otherdimensions than the original may damage the PCBs inside the IED.

11.4.2.2 Mounting procedure for 19” panel rack mounting

xx04000452.vsd

1a

2

1b

Figure 176: 19” panel rack mounting details


1a, 1b Mounting angels, which can be mounted, either to theleft or right side of the case.

2 -

2 Screw 8 M4x6

Section 11Hardware


REB 670

11.4.3 Wall mounting

11.4.3.1 Overview

All case sizes, 1/2 x 19” and 1/1 x 19”, can be wall mounted. It is also possible tomount the IED on a panel or in a cubicle.

When mounting the side plates, be sure to use screws that follows therecommended dimensions. Using screws with other dimensions thanthe original may damage the PCBs inside the IED.

If fiber cables are bent too much, the signal can be weakened. Wallmounting is therefore not recommended for communication moduleswith fiber connection; Serial SPA/IEC 60870-5-103 and LONcommunication module (SLM), Optical Ethernet module (OEM) andLine data communication module (LDCM).

11.4.3.2 Mounting procedure for wall mounting

xx04000453.vsd

1

2

3

4

5

6

Figure 177: Wall mounting details.

Section 11Hardware


379


1 Bushing 4 -

2 Screw 8 M4x10

3 Screw 4 M6x12 orcorresponding

4 Mounting bar 2 -

5 Screw 6 M5x8

6 Side plate 2 -

11.4.3.3 How to reach the rear side of the IED

The IED can be equipped with a rear protection cover which is recommended to usewith this type of mounting. See figure 178.

To reach the rear side of the IED, a free space of 80 mm is required on the unhingedside.

80 mm

View from above

1

en06000135.vsd

3

2

Figure 178: How to reach the connectors on the rear side of the IED.

PosNo Description Type

1 Screw M4x10

2 Screw M5x8

3 Rear protection cover -

Section 11Hardware


REB 670

11.4.4 Side-by-side 19” rack mounting

11.4.4.1 Overview

IED case sizes, 1/2 x 19” and RHGS cases, can be mounted side-by-side up to amaximum size of 19”. For side-by-side rack mounting, the side-by-side mounting kittogether with the 19” rack panel mounting kit must be used. The mounting kit has tobe ordered separately.

When mounting the plates and the angles on the IED, be sure to usescrews that follows the recommended dimensions. Using screws withother dimensions than the original may damage the PCBs inside theIED.

11.4.4.2 Mounting procedure for side-by-side rack mounting

xx04000456.vsd

3

4

1

2

Figure 179: Side-by-side rack mounting details.


1 Mounting plate 2 -

2, 3 Screw 16 M4x6

4 Mounting angle 2 -

11.4.4.3 IED 670 mounted with a RHGS6 case

An 1/2 x 19” size IED can be mounted with a RHGS (6 or 12 depending on IED size)case. The RHGS case can be used for mounting a test switch of type RTXP 24. It alsohas enough space for a terminal base of RX 2 type for mounting of, for example, aDC-switch or two trip relays.

Section 11Hardware


381

xx06000180.vsd

8 88

7

5

6

3

4

2

7

5

6

7

5

6

3

4

2

3

4

2

1

1

1

2

1 1

1

8

7

5

6

3

4

2

2

2

1

Figure 180: IED 670 (1/2 x 19”) mounted with a RHGS6 case containing a testswitch module equipped with only a test switch and a RX2 terminalbase.

11.4.5 Side-by-side flush mounting

11.4.5.1 Overview

It is not recommended to flush mount side by side mounted cases if IP54 is required.If your application demands side-by-side flush mounting, the side-by-side mountingdetails kit and the 19” panel rack mounting kit must be used. The mounting kit hasto be ordered separately. The maximum size of the panel cut out is 19”.

With side-by-side flush mounting installation, only IP class 20 isobtained. To reach IP class 54, it is recommended to mount the IEDsseparately. For cut out dimensions of separately mounted IEDs, seesection "Flush mounting".

When mounting the plates and the angles on the IED, be sure to usescrews that follows the recommended dimensions. Using screws withother dimensions than the original may damage the PCBs inside theIED.

Section 11Hardware


REB 670

11.4.5.2 Mounting procedure for side-by-side flush mounting

xx06000181.vsd

1 2

3

4

Figure 181: Side-by-side flush mounting details (RHGS6 side-by-side with 1/2 x19” IED).


1 Mounting plate 2 -

2, 3 Screw 16 M4x6

4 Mounting angle 2 -

11.5 Technical data

11.5.1 Enclosure

Table 246: Case

Material Steel sheet

Front plate Steel sheet profile with cut-out for HMI

Surface treatment Aluzink preplated steel

Finish Light grey (RAL 7035)

Section 11Hardware


383

Table 247: Water and dust protection level according to IEC 60529

Front IP40 (IP54 with sealing strip)

Rear, sides, top andbottom

IP20

Table 248: Weight

Case size Weight6U, 1/2 x 19” £ 10 kg

6U, 1/1 x 19” £ 18 kg

11.5.2 Connection system

Table 249: CT circuit connectors

Connector type Rated voltage and current Maximum conductor areaTerminal blocks of feed throughtype

250 V AC, 20 A 4 mm2

Table 250: Binary I/O connection system

Connector type Rated voltage Maximum conductor areaScrew compression type 250 V AC 2.5 mm2

2 × 1 mm2

11.5.3 Influencing factors

Table 251: Temperature and humidity influence

Parameter Reference value Nominal range InfluenceAmbient temperature,operate value

+20 °C -10 °C to +55 °C 0.02% /°C

Relative humidityOperative range

10%-90%0%-95%

10%-90% -

Storage temperature -40 °C to +70 °C - -

Section 11Hardware


REB 670

Table 252: Auxiliary DC supply voltage influence on functionality during operation

Dependence on Reference value Within nominal range InfluenceRipple, in DC auxiliary voltageOperative range

max. 2%Full wave rectified

12% of EL 0.01% /%

Auxiliary voltage dependence, operatevalue

± 20% of EL 0.01% /%

Interrupted auxiliary DC voltage

24-60 V DC ± 20%90-250 V DC ± 20%

Interruption interval0–50 ms

No restart

0–∞ s Correctfunction

Restart time <140 s

Table 253: Frequency influence (reference standard: IEC 60255–6)

Dependence on Within nominal range InfluenceFrequency dependence, operatevalue

fr ± 2.5 Hz for 50 Hzfr ± 3.0 Hz for 60 Hz

± 1.0% / Hz

Frequency dependence fordifferential protection

fr ± 2.5 Hz for 50 Hzfr ± 3.0 Hz for 50 Hz

± 2.0% / Hz

Harmonic frequency dependence(20% content)

2nd, 3rd and 5th harmonic of fr ± 1.0%

Harmonic frequency dependencefor differential protection (10%content)

2nd, 3rd and 5th harmonic of fr ± 6.0%

11.5.4 Type tests according to standard

Table 254: Electromagnetic compatibility

Test Type test values Reference standards1 MHz burst disturbance 2.5 kV IEC 60255-22-1, Class III

100 kHz disturbance 2.5 kV IEC 61000-4-12, Class III

Electrostatic dischargeDirect applicatonIndirect application

15 kV air discharge8 kV contact discharge8 kV contact discharge

IEC 60255-22-2, Class IV IEC 61000-4-2, Class IV

Fast transient disturbance 4 kV IEC 60255-22-4, Class A

Surge immunity test 1-2 kV, 1.2/50 mshigh energy

IEC 60255-22-5

Power frequency immunity test 150-300 V,50 Hz

IEC 60255-22-7, Class A

Power frequency magnetic field test 1000 A/m, 3 s IEC 61000-4-8, Class V

Radiated electromagnetic fielddisturbance

20 V/m, 80-1000 MHz IEC 60255-22-3

Radiated electromagnetic fielddisturbance

20 V/m, 80-2500 MHz EN 61000-4-3


Section 11Hardware


385

Test Type test values Reference standardsRadiated electromagnetic fielddisturbance

35 V/m26-1000 MHz

IEEE/ANSI C37.90.2

Conducted electromagnetic fielddisturbance

10 V, 0.15-80 MHz IEC 60255-22-6

Radiated emission 30-1000 MHz IEC 60255-25

Conducted emission 0.15-30 MHz IEC 60255-25

Table 255: Insulation

Test Type test values Reference standardDielectric test 2.0 kV AC, 1 min. IEC 60255-5

Impulse voltage test 5 kV, 1.2/50 ms, 0.5 J

Insulation resistance >100 MW at 500 VDC

Table 256: Environmental tests

Test Type test value Reference standardCold test Test Ad for 16 h at -25°C IEC 60068-2-1

Storage test Test Ad for 16 h at -40°C IEC 60068-2-1

Dry heat test Test Bd for 16 h at +70°C IEC 60068-2-2

Damp heat test, steady state Test Ca for 4 days at +40 °C andhumidity 93%

IEC 60068-2-3

Damp heat test, cyclic Test Db for 6 cycles at +25 to +55 °Cand humidity 93 to 95% (1 cycle = 24hours)

IEC 60068-2-30

Table 257: CE compliance

Test According toImmunity EN 61000-6-2

Emissivity EN 61000-6-4

Low voltage directive EN 50178

Table 258: Mechanical tests

Test Type test values Reference standardsVibration Class I IEC 60255-21-1

Shock and bump Class I IEC 60255-21-2

Seismic Class I IEC 60255-21-3

Section 11Hardware


REB 670

Section 12 Labels

About this chapterThis chapter includes descriptions of the different labels and where to find them onthe IED.

12.1 Different labels

1

2

3

4

5

6

56

7xx06000574.eps

Section 12Labels


387

1

Product type, description and serial number

2 Order number, dc supply voltage and ratedfrequency

3 Optional, customer specific information

4 Manufacturer

5 Transformer input module, rated currentsand voltages

6 Transformer designations

7

Ordering and serial number

Section 12Labels


REB 670

1

2

3

4

en06000573.eps

1 Warning label

2 Caution label

3 Class 1 laser product label

4 Warning label

Section 12Labels


389

390

Section 13 Connection diagrams

This chapter includes diagrams of the IED with all slot, terminal block and opticalconnector designations. It is a necessary guide when making electrical and opticalconnections to the IED.

Section 13Connection diagrams


391



REB 670



393



REB 670



395



REB 670



397



REB 670



399



REB 670



401



REB 670



403



REB 670



405



REB 670



407

408

Section 14 Time inverse characteristics

About this chapterThis chapter describes current dependant time delay functionality. Both ANSI andIEC Inverse time curves and tables are included.

14.1 Application

In order to assure time selectivity between different overcurrent protections indifferent points in the network different time delays for the different relays arenormally used. The simplest way to do this is to use definite time delay. In moresophisticated applications current dependent time characteristics are used. Bothalternatives are shown in a simple application with three overcurrent protectionsconnected in series.

xx05000129.vsd

I> I> I>

Figure 182: Three overcurrent protections connected in series

en05000130.vsd

Time

Fault pointposition

Stage 1

Stage 2

Stage 3

Stage 1

Stage 2

Stage 1

Figure 183: Definite time overcurrent characteristics

Section 14Time inverse characteristics


409

en05000131.vsd

Time

Fault pointposition

Figure 184: Inverse time overcurrent characteristics with inst. function

The inverse time characteristic makes it possible to minimize the fault clearance timeand still assure the selectivity between protections.

To assure selectivity between protections there must be a time margin between theoperation time of the protections. This required time margin is dependent of followingfactors, in a simple case with two protections in series:

• Difference between pick-up time of the protections to be co-ordinated• Opening time of the breaker closest to the studied fault• Reset time of the protection• Margin dependent of the time-delay inaccuracy of the protections

Assume we have the following network case.

en05000132.vsd

I> I>

A1 B1 Feeder

Time axis

t=0 t=t1 t=t2 t=t3

Figure 185: Selectivity steps for a fault on feeder B1

where:

t=0 is The fault occurs

t=t1 is Protection B1 trips

t=t2 is Breaker at B1 opens



REB 670

t=t3 is Protection A1 resets

In the case protection B1 shall operate without any intentional delay (instantaneous).When the fault occurs the protections start to detect the fault current. After the timet1 the protection B1 send a trip signal to the circuit breaker. The protection A1 startsits delay timer at the same time, with some deviation in time due to differencesbetween the two protections. There is a possibility that A1 will start before the trip issent to the B1 circuit breaker.

At the time t2 the circuit breaker B1 has opened its primary contacts and thus the faultcurrent is interrupted. The breaker time (t2 - t1) can differ between different faults.The maximum opening time can be given from manuals and test protocols. Still att2 the timer of protection A1 is active.

At time t3 the protection A1 is reset, i.e. the timer is stopped.

In most applications it is required that the delay times shall reset as fast as possiblewhen the current fed to the protection drops below the set current level, the reset timeshall be minimized. In some applications it is however beneficial to have some typeof delayed reset time of the overcurrent function. This can be the case in the followingapplications:

• If there is a risk of intermittent faults. If the current relay, close to the faults, startsand resets there is a risk of unselective trip from other protections in the system.

• Delayed resetting could give accelerated fault clearance in case of automaticreclosing to a permanent fault.

• Overcurrent protection functions are sometimes used as release criterion for otherprotection functions. It can often be valuable to have a reset delay to assure therelease function.

14.2 Principle of operation

14.2.1 Mode of operationThe function can operate in a definite time delay mode or in a current dependentinverse time delay mode. For the inverse time characteristic both ANSI and IEC basedstandard curves are available. Also programmable curve types are supported via thecomponent inputs: p, A, B, C pr, tr, and cr.

Different characteristics for reset delay can also be chosen.

If current in any phase exceeds the set start current value (here internal signalstartValue), a timer, according to the selected operate mode, is started. The component



411

always uses the maximum of the three phase current values as the current level usedin timing calculations.

In case of definite time the timer will run constantly until the trip time is reached oruntil the current drops below the reset value (start value minus the hysteresis) and thereset time has elapsed.

For definite time delay curve index no 5 (ANSI/IEEE Definite time) or 15 (IECDefinite time) are chosen.

The general expression for inverse time curves is according to equation 31.

[ ] = + ×

->

æ öç ÷ç ÷ç ÷æ ö

ç ÷ç ÷è øè ø

p

At s B k

iC

in(Equation 31)

where:

p, A, B, C are constants defined for each curve type,

in> is the set start current for step n,

k is set time multiplier for step n and

i is the measured current.

For inverse time characteristics a time will be initiated when the current reaches theset start level. From the general expression of the characteristic the following can beseen:

( )- × × - = ×>

æ öæ öç ÷ç ÷

è øè ø

p

op

it B k C A k

in(Equation 32)

where:

top is the operation time of the protection

The time elapsed to the moment of trip is reached when the integral fulfils accordingto equation 33, in addition to the constant time delay:

0

- × ³ ×>

æ öæ öç ÷ç ÷è øè ø

òpt i

C dt A kin

(Equation 33)

For the numerical protection the sum below must fulfil the equation for trip.



REB 670

1

( )

=

D × - ³ ×>

æ öæ öç ÷ç ÷è øè ø

åpn

j

i jt C A k

in(Equation 34)

where:

j = 1 is the first protection execution cycle when a fault has been detected, i.e. when

1i

in>

>

Dt is the time interval between two consecutive executions of the protection algorithm,

n is the number of the execution of the algorithm when the trip time equation is fulfilled, i.e. whena trip is given and

i (j) is the fault current at time j

For inverse time operation, the inverse-time characteristic is selectable. Both the IECand ANSI/IEEE standardized inverse-time characteristics are supported. The list ofcharacteristics in table 259 matches the list in the IEC 61850-7-4 spec.

Table 259: Curve name and index no.

Curve name Curve index no.Curve name 1

ANSI Extremely Inverse 2

ANSI Very Inverse 3

ANSI Normal Inverse 4

ANSI Moderately Inverse 6

ANSI Long Time Extremely Inverse 7

ANSI Long Time Very Inverse 8

IEC Normal Inverse 9

IEC Very Inverse 10

IEC Inverse 11

IEC Extremely. Inverse 12

IEC Short Time Inverse 13

IEC Long Time Inverse 14

For the ANSI/IEEE characteristics the inverse time curves are defined according totable 260:



413

Table 260: Inverse time curves for ANSI/IEEE characteristics

Parameter/operationMode A B C p1 = ANSI Extremely inverse 28.2 0.1217 1 2.0

2 = ANSI Very inverse 19.61 0.491 1 2.0

3 = ANSI Inverse 0.0086 0.0185 1 0.02

4 = ANSI Moderately inverse 0.0515 0.1140 1 0.02

6 = ANSI Long-time extremely inverse 64.07 0.250 1 2.0

7 = ANSI Long-time very inverse 28.55 0.712 1 2.0

8 = ANSI Long-time inverse 0.086 0.185 1 0.02

For the IEC characteristics the inverse time curves are defined according totable 261:

Table 261: Inverse time curves for IEC characteristics

Parameter/operationMode A(b) B C p (a)9 = IEC Normal inverse 0.14 0 1 0.02

10 = IEC Very inverse 13.5 0 1 1.0

11 = IEC Inverse 0.14 0 1 0.02

12 = IEC Extremely inverse 80.0 0 1 2.0

13 = IEC Short-time inverse 0.05 0 1 0.04

14 = IEC Long-time inverse 120 0 1 1.0

For the IEC curves there is also a setting of the minimum time delay of operation, seefigure 186.



REB 670

en05000133.vsd

tnMin

Current

Operatetime

Figure 186: Minimum time delay operation for the IEC curves

In addition to the ANSI and IEC standardized characteristics, there are also twoadditional curves available; the 18 = RI time inverse and the 19 = RD time inverse.

The 18 = RI time inverse curve emulates the characteristic of the electromechanicalASEA relay RI. The curve is described by equation 36:

[ ]0.339 0.235

=>

- ×

æ öç ÷ç ÷ç ÷è ø

kt s

ini (Equation 36)

where:



i is the measured current.

The 19 = RD time inverse curve gives a logarithmic delay, as used in the Combiflexprotection RXIDG. The curve enables a high degree of selectivity required forsensitive residual earth fault current protection, with ability to detect high resistiveearth faults. The curve is described by equation 37:



415

[ ] 5.8 1.35 ln= - ×× >

æ öç ÷è ø

it s

k in(Equation 37)

where:



i is the measured current

If the curve type is chosen as 17 the user can make a tailor made inverse time curveaccording to the general equation 38.

[ ] = + ×

->


ç ÷ç ÷è øè ø

p

At s B k

iC

in(Equation 38)

Also the reset time of the delayed function can be controlled. We have the possibilityto choose between three different reset type delays. Available alternatives are listedin table 262.

Table 262: Reset type delays

Curve name Curve index no.Instantaneous 1

IEC Reset 2

ANSI Reset 3

If instantaneous reset is chosen the timer will be reset directly when the current dropsbelow the set start current level minus the hysteresis.

If IEC reset is chosen the timer is reset the timer will be reset after a set constant timewhen the current drops below the set start current level minus the hysteresis.

If ANSI reset time is chosen the reset time will be dependent of the current after faultclearance (when the current drops below the start current level minus the hysteresis).The timer will reset according to equation 39.



REB 670

2[ ]1

rtt si

in

=

->


ç ÷ç ÷è øè ø (Equation 39)

where:

The set value tr is the reset time in case of zero current after fault clearance.

The possibility of choice of reset characteristics is to some extent dependent of thechoice of time delay characteristic.

For the independent time delay characteristics (type 5 and 15) the possible delay timesettings are instantaneous (1) and IEC (2 = set constant time reset).

For ANSI inverse time delay characteristics (type 1 - 4 and 6 - 8) all three types ofreset time characteristics are available; instantaneous (1), IEC (2 = set constant timereset) and ANSI (3 = current dependent reset time).

For IEC inverse time delay characteristics (type 9 - 14) the possible delay time settingsare instantaneous (1) and IEC (2 = set constant time reset).

For the customer tailor made inverse time delay characteristics (type 17) all threetypes of reset time characteristics are available; instantaneous (1), IEC (2 = setconstant time reset) and ANSI (3 = current dependent reset time). If the currentdependent type is used settings pr, tr and cr must be given, see equation 40:

[ ] pr

trt s

icr

in

=

->


ç ÷ç ÷è øè ø (Equation 40)

For RI and RD inverse time delay characteristics (type 18 and 19) the possible delaytime settings are instantaneous (1) and IEC (2 = set constant time reset).

14.3 Inverse characteristics



417

Table 263: Inverse time characteristics ANSI

Function Range or value AccuracyOperate characteristic:

( )1= + ×

-

æ öç ÷ç ÷è ø

P

At B k

I

Reset characteristic:

( )2 1= ×

-

trt kI

I = Imeasured/Iset

k = 0.05-999 in steps of0.01 unless otherwisestated

-

ANSI Extremely Inverse no 1 A=28.2, B=0.1217, P=2.0,tr=29.1

ANSI/IEEE C37.112, class 5+ 30 ms

ANSI Very inverse no 2 A=19.61, B=0.491, P=2.0,tr=21.6

ANSI Normal Inverse no 3 A=0.0086, B=0.0185,P=0.02, tr=0.46

ANSI Moderately Inverse no 4 A=0.0515, B=0.1140,P=0.02, tr=4.85

ANSI Long Time Extremely Inverse no 6 A=64.07, B=0.250, P=2.0,tr=30

ANSI Long Time Very Inverse no 7 A=28.55, B=0.712, P=2.0,tr=13.46

ANSI Long Time Inverse no 8 k=(0.01-1.20) in steps of0.01A=0.086, B=0.185,P=0.02, tr=4.6

Table 264: Inverse time characteristics IEC

Function Range or value AccuracyOperate characteristic:

( )1= ×

-


P

At k

I

I = Imeasured/Iset

k = (0.05-1.10) in steps of0.01

-

Time delay to reset, IEC inverse time (0.000-60.000) s ± 0.5% of set time ± 10 ms

IEC Normal Inverse no 9 A=0.14, P=0.02 IEC 60255-3, class 5 + 40 ms

IEC Very inverse no 10 A=13.5, P=1.0

IEC Inverse no 11 A=0.14, P=0.02

IEC Extremely inverse no 12 A=80.0, P=2.0

IEC Short-time inverse no 13 A=0.05, P=0.04

IEC Long-time inverse no 14 A=120, P=1.0




REB 670

Function Range or value AccuracyCustomer defined characteristic no 17Operate characteristic:

( )= + ×

-


P

At B k

I C

Reset characteristic:

( )= ×

-PR

TRt k

I CR

I = Imeasured/Iset

k=0.5-999 in steps of 0.1A=(0.005-200.000) insteps of 0.001B=(0.00-20.00) in steps of0.01C=(0.1-10.0) in steps of0.1P=(0.005-3.000) in stepsof 0.001TR=(0.005-100.000) insteps of 0.001CR=(0.1-10.0) in steps of0.1PR=(0.005-3.000) in stepsof 0.001

IEC 60255, class 5 + 40 ms

RI inverse characteristic no 18

1

0.2360.339

= ×

-

t k

I

I = Imeasured/Iset

k=(0.05-999) in steps of0.01

IEC 60255-3, class 5 + 40 ms

Logarithmic inverse characteristic no 19

5.8 1.35= - ×æ öç ÷è ø

tI

Ink

I = Imeasured/Iset

k=(0.05-1.10) in steps of0.01

IEC 60255-3, class 5 + 40 ms



419

1 10 1000.01

0.1

1

10

100

k=

15

10

7

5

3

2

1

0.5

s

I/I>

xx05000764.vsd

Figure 187: ANSI – Extremely inverse



REB 670

1 10 1000.01

0.1

1

10

100

k=

15

10

7

5

3

2

1

0.5

I/I>

s

xx05000765.vsd

Figure 188: ANSI – Very inverse



421

1 10 1000.01

0.1

1

10

100

k=

15

10

7

5

3

2

1

0.5

I/I>

s

xx05000766.vsd

Figure 189: ANSI – Inverse



REB 670

1 10 1000.01

0.1

1

10

100

k=

7

5

10

3

2

15

1

0.5

s

I/I>

xx05000767.vsd

Figure 190: Moderately inverse



423

1 10 1000.01

0.1

1

10

100

k=

1.10.90.7

0.5

0.3

0.2

0.1

0.05

s

I/I>

xx05000768.vsd

Figure 191: IEC – Normal inverse



REB 670

1 10 1000.01

0.1

1

10

100

k=

1.10.90.7

0.5

0.3

0.2

0.1

0.05

I/I>

s

xx05000769.vsd

Figure 192: Very inverse



425

1 10 1000.01

0.1

1

10

100

k=

1.10.90.7

0.5

0.3

0.2

0.1

0.05

s

I/I>

xx05000770.vsd

Figure 193: Extremely inverse



REB 670

Section 15 Glossary

About this chapterThis chapter contains a glossary with terms, acronyms and abbreviations used in ABBtechnical documentation.

15.1 Glossary

AC Alternating current

A/D converter Analog to digital converter

ADBS Amplitude dead -band supervision

ADM Analog digital conversion module, with time synchronization

ANSI American National Standards Institute

AR Autoreclosing

ArgNegRes Setting parameter/ZD/

ArgDir Setting parameter/ZD/

ASCT Auxiliary summation current transformer

ASD Adaptive signal detection

AWG American Wire Gauge standard

BBP Busbar protection

BFP Breaker failure protection

BIM Binary input module

BOM Binary output module

BR External bi-stable relay

BS British standard

BSR Binary signal transfer function, receiver blocks

BST Binary signal transfer function, transmit blocks

C37.94 IEEE/ANSI protocol used when sending binary signalsbetween IEDs

CAN Controller Area Network. ISO standard (ISO 11898) for serialcommunication

CAP 531 Configuration and programming tool

Section 15Glossary


427

CB Circuit breaker

CBM Combined backplane module

CCITT Consultative Committee for International Telegraph andTelephony. A United Nations sponsored standards bodywithin the International Telecommunications Union.

CCM CAN carrier module

CCVT Capacitive Coupled Voltage Transformer

Class C Protection Current Transformer class as per IEEE/ ANSI

CMPPS Combined mega pulses per second

CO cycle Close-open cycle

Co-directional Way of transmitting G.703 over a balanced line. Involves twotwisted pairs making it possible to transmit information in bothdirections

COMTRADE Standard format according to IEC 60255-24

Contra-directional Way of transmitting G.703 over a balanced line. Involves fourtwisted pairs of with two are used for transmitting data in bothdirections, and two pairs for transmitting clock signals

CPU Central processor unit

CR Carrier receive

CRC Cyclic redundancy check

CS Carrier send

CT Current transformer

CVT Capacitive voltage transformer

DAR Delayed auto-reclosing

DARPA Defense Advanced Research Projects Agency (The USdeveloper of the TCP/IP protocol etc.)

DBDL Dead bus dead line

DBLL Dead bus live line

DC Direct current

DFT Discrete Fourier transform

DIP-switch Small switch mounted on a printed circuit board

DLLB Dead line live bus

DNP Distributed Network Protocol as per IEEE/ANSI Std.1379-2000

DR Disturbance recorder

DRAM Dynamic random access memory

DRH Disturbance report handler

Section 15Glossary


REB 670

DSP Digital signal processor

DTT Direct transfer trip scheme

EHV network Extra high voltage network

EIA Electronic Industries Association

EMC Electro magnetic compatibility

EMF Electro motive force

EMI Electro magnetic interference

EnFP End fault protection

ESD Electrostatic discharge

FOX 20 Modular 20 channel telecommunication system for speech,data and protection signals

FOX 512/515 Access multiplexer

FOX 6Plus Compact, time-division multiplexer for the transmission of upto seven duplex channels of digital data over optical fibers

G.703 Electrical and functional description for digital lines used bylocal telephone companies. Can be transported over balancedand unbalanced lines

GCM Communication interface module with carrier of GPS receivermodule

GI General interrogation command

GIS Gas insulated switchgear

GOOSE Generic object oriented substation event

GPS Global positioning system

GSM GPS time synchronization module

HDLC protocol High level data link control, protocol based on the HDLCstandard

HFBR connectortype

Plastic fiber connector

HMI Human machine interface

HSAR High speed auto reclosing

HV High voltage

HVDC High voltage direct current

IDBS Integrating dead band supervision

IEC International Electrical Committee

IEC 60044-6 IEC Standard, Instrument transformers – Part 6: Requirementsfor protective current transformers for transient performance

Section 15Glossary


429

IEC 60870-5-103 Communication standard for protective equipment. A serialmaster/slave protocol for point-to-point communication

IEC 61850 Substation Automation communication standard

IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers

IEEE 802.12 A network technology standard that provides 100 Mbits/s ontwisted-pair or optical fiber cable

IEEE P1386.1 PCI Mezzanine card (PMC) standard for local bus modules.References the CMC (IEEE P1386, also known as Commonmezzanine card) standard for the mechanics and the PCIspecifications from the PCI SIG (Special Interest Group) forthe electrical EMF Electro Motive Force.

IED Intelligent electronic device

I-GIS Intelligent gas insulated switchgear

IOM Binary input/output module

Instance When several occurrences of the same function are availablein the IED they are referred to as instances of that function.One instance of a function is identical to another of the samekind but will have a different number in the IED userinterfaces. The word instance is sometimes defined as an itemof information that is representative of a type. In the same wayan instance of a function in the IED is representative of a typeof function.

IP 1. Internet protocol. The network layer for the TCP/IP protocolsuite widely used on Ethernet networks. IP is a connectionless,best-effort packet switching protocol. It provides packetrouting, fragmentation and re-assembly through the data linklayer.2. Ingression protection according to IEC standard

IP 20 Ingression protection, according to IEC standard, level 20



IRF Internal fail signal

IRIG-B: InterRange Instrumentation Group Time code format B,standard 200

ITU International Telecommunications Union

LAN Local area network

LIB 520 High voltage software module

LCD Liquid crystal display

LDCM Line differential communication module

LDD Local detection device

Section 15Glossary


REB 670

LED Light emitting diode

LNT LON network tool

LON Local operating network

MCB Miniature circuit breaker

MCM Mezzanine carrier module

MIM Milli-ampere module

MPM Main processing module

MVB Multifunction vehicle bus. Standardized serial bus originallydeveloped for use in trains.

NCC National Control Centre

NUM Numerical module

OCO cycle Open-close-open cycle

OCP Overcurrent protection

OEM Optical ethernet module

OLTC On load tap changer

OV Over voltage

Overreach A term used to describe how the relay behaves during a faultcondition. For example a distance relay is over-reaching whenthe impedance presented to it is smaller than the apparentimpedance to the fault applied to the balance point, i.e. the setreach. The relay “sees” the fault but perhaps it should not haveseen it.

PCI Peripheral component interconnect, a local data bus

PCM Pulse code modulation

PCM 600 Protection and control IED manager

PC-MIP Mezzanine card standard

PISA Process interface for sensors & actuators

PMC PCI Mezzanine card

POTT Permissive overreach transfer trip

Process bus Bus or LAN used at the process level, that is, in near proximityto the measured and/or controlled components

PSM Power supply module

PST Parameter setting tool

PT ratio Potential transformer or voltage transformer ratio

PUTT Permissive underreach transfer trip

RASC Synchrocheck relay, COMBIFLEX

Section 15Glossary


431

RCA Relay characteristic angle

REVAL Evaluation software

RFPP Resistance for phase-to-phase faults

RFPE Resistance for phase-to-earth faults

RISC Reduced instruction set computer

RMS value Root mean square value

RS422 A balanced serial interface for the transmission of digital datain point-to-point connections

RS485 Serial link according to EIA standard RS485

RTC Real time clock

RTU Remote terminal unit

SA Substation Automation

SC Switch or push-button to close

SCS Station control system

SCT System configuration tool according to standard IEC 61850

SLM Serial communication module. Used for SPA/LON/IECcommunication.

SMA connector Subminiature version A, A threaded connector with constantimpedance.

SMS Station monitoring system

SNTP Simple network time protocol – is used to synchronizecomputer clocks on local area networks. This reduces therequirement to have accurate hardware clocks in everyembedded system in a network. Each embedded node caninstead synchronize with a remote clock, providing therequired accuracy.

SPA Strömberg protection acquisition, a serial master/slaveprotocol for point-to-point communication

SRY Switch for CB ready condition

ST Switch or push-button to trip

Starpoint Neutral point of transformer or generator

SVC Static VAr compensation

TC Trip coil

TCS Trip circuit supervision

TCP Transmission control protocol. The most common transportlayer protocol used on Ethernet and the Internet.

TCP/IP Transmission control protocol over Internet Protocol. The defacto standard Ethernet protocols incorporated into 4.2BSD

Section 15Glossary


REB 670

Unix. TCP/IP was developed by DARPA for internet workingand encompasses both network layer and transport layerprotocols. While TCP and IP specify two protocols at specificprotocol layers, TCP/IP is often used to refer to the entire USDepartment of Defense protocol suite based upon these,including Telnet, FTP, UDP and RDP.

TEF Time delayed earth-fault protection function

TNC connector Threaded Neill Concelman, A threaded constant impedanceversion of a BNC connector

TPZ, TPY, TPX,TPS

Current transformer class according to IEC

Underreach A term used to describe how the relay behaves during a faultcondition. For example a distance relay is under-reachingwhen the impedance presented to it is greater than the apparentimpedance to the fault applied to the balance point, i.e. the setreach. The relay does not “see” the fault but perhaps it shouldhave seen it. See also Overreach.

U/I-PISA Process interface components that deliver measured voltageand current values

UTC Coordinated universal time. A coordinated time scale,maintained by the Bureau International des Poids et Mesures(BIPM), which forms the basis of a coordinated disseminationof standard frequencies and time signals. UTC is derived fromInternational Atomic Time (TAI) by the addition of a wholenumber of "leap seconds" to synchronize it with UniversalTime 1 (UT1), thus allowing for the eccentricity of the Earth"sorbit, the rotational axis tilt (23.5 degrees), but still showingthe Earth"s irregular rotation, on which UT1 is based. TheCoordinated Universal Time is expressed using a 24-hourclock and uses the Gregorian calendar. It is used for aeroplaneand ship navigation, where it also sometimes known by themilitary name, "Zulu time". "Zulu" in the phonetic alphabetstands for "Z" which stands for longitude zero.

UV Undervoltage

WEI Weak end infeed logic

VT Voltage transformer

X.21 A digital signalling interface primarily used for telecomequipment

3IO Three times zero-sequence current. Often referred to as theresidual or the earth-fault current

3UO Three times the zero sequence voltage. Often referred to as theresidual voltage or the neutral point voltage

Section 15Glossary


433

434

Date post:	12-Dec-2015
Category:	Documents
Upload:	hathanhchinh2279
View:	218 times
Download:	1 times